Home

Omnii Hand-Held Computer User Manual

Contents

1. XXX aaa B 3 Image Capture Predefined Presets Imaging Me NU cccccccceeceeeeeeeeeeceeeeseeeseeeeseeeeseeeaaees B 3 Using the Imagers ADDIE Garter eae ANA AALAGA ANA AGA KAO tore B 3 Configuring the Image Capture Presets Imaging Me Nnu cccecceseeecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeees B 3 Selecing a CamMmeErA aaa ee tee nee eee ee ee eee ee eee eee ee B 4 Setting the Active Preset ceca eecanesaeeesseeecaeesausesaeeseeeeseeesnasees B 4 NOUN TPID ET AGA ARKA NN GA AA B 4 Creating a Custom Preset a B 5 Modifying a Custom PRE SEA ANAN AA ANA B 5 Removing a CUSTOM PIE ba GA Ae GAGA B 6 Configuring the Barcode Decoding Camera Presets Barcoding Meny B 6 SUN se GS AA AA AA B 7 Setting the Active Preset a B 7 MEN aS eee scree AA AA AA AA AA B 7 Creating a Custom Preset a B 7 Modifying a Custom Presa AG B 8 Removing a Custom Preset aa B 8 Configuring the Barcode Decoding Symbologies Barcoding Menu cccseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees B 9 Setting the Active PreSet ccccccccccccseccsseeceeeeseeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeseeeseueeseeeseaeeseeesaeessaeeseeseneeees B 9 MIC WING TPI OT AGA E E AA B 9 Creating a Custom Preset a B 10 Modifying a Custom Presa excissccresncesivnceucveseinasebeusdencndie seccuscattasreaGaendeseacnsuaskec
2. 2 XX aaa 2 18 AG CA AA AA AA eee eee 2 19 The Stant MENU AA EEE E EEEE EEE 2 20 The Kiosk Desktop She Ue ere cc ag aE Ea be E a trecetacme en 2 25 Restoring the Windows Classic Shell cccccccccssseseececeeeeeeeeeceeeeceeseeeeeeceeeeseaseceeeseeeeeeessaaeeeees 2 26 General Maintenance gs cnsccccscnentcnsdeeatesaesincocmaeUaueresidescovaceacsogeeduaassendeomacdeaneadausanegaceeesecurseedsencendic tos 2 2 Caring for the TOUCMS ChE GIN occ ces ccc ceeseecinvsaneussinentitenedeadaiens onsavecinadauaeabenn lt aa eua aa a aa a ai 2 27 ceanna NSO AA seen eaesesGoonieaneen 2 27 Chapter 3 Configuration Overview OSO NA aseran pianoon aR E RAEE AUNG GAD AA kUNG AGA 3 1 Sofware Aang AA E A a AE a 3 1 Table of Contents ili Microcar CONAN aa AA AN DAG ARTE AA aa 3 2 TVS COOK Panel ama ANEK NGYN NUNG GAGANA NAA 3 2 Control Panel Applications 2 2 QXXX a 3 3 APP LUC VS CV SARA 3 6 Bluetooth SS ON greece cates cs cence een wie nd seh est coe AA AA 3 7 LG AA APA APA 3 8 DENG AA NAAN GA NG NA AA AGA 3 9 Discovering and REMOVING Devices ccccccesccescceecceeecceeeccecueceaeecueccueesaeeseeseueecueesunsnass 3 9 Filtering By Class of Device COD aaa 3 10 Device Pop up MONU cece cecceeceeeceeeeeceeeenecenecnecaeeseesseeceeeseeteeeeseteecseetaeeeeteeeaeeteeseeeees 3 10 Parning a DENG coser n AA AG 3 10 SVOI AA AA AA ANA AA 3 12 NOE AA AA AA AA 3 13
3. E 1 Omnii XT15f specifications eee F 1 Omnii XT15f freezer model F 6 Omnii XT 15ni non incendive hand held l 1 Omnii XT15 specifications E 1 On amp OF DUNON paaa Kk aa divs vee bedeene sed 1 5 one dimensional internal scanner 2 14 2 15 One Shot Mode 0 00 ccc eee 3 30 ON FO AA 3 30 onscreen keyboard Soft Input Panel SIP 3 3 3 27 Open TekTerm application 0 3 39 operating system properties 3 63 orientation screen 0 00 a 3 58 P pairing Bluetooth devices 3 10 Parameter Scanning C 4 C 7 C 7 Parity port replicator 0 0 0 0 c eee eee 3 57 partitions CLEAUNG x ceccmtnketeeoee ease a ssensewaedaaes 3 59 deleting AAP iniii iranin 3 60 GISMOUNUNG seas aan ee eiaa YA aa MA MG a a a E A 3 60 IONMAIN APA 3 61 management 0 00 c eee eee 3 60 MOUNN jae2 eeecmeeeeyeenente ta e i 3 61 PDF and linear Predefined preset 000 c eee eee B 2 PH8 P GSM GPRS EDGE UMTS HSPA radio specifica WOMSi cet oneeanaeeneeeeetmerneteesteeedetaceeas E 6 phone Services setting up 3 74 Voicemail setting up 3 74 phone dialing a 1 8 3 70 Phonebook 2 eee eens 3 73 phone number dialing 1 8 3
4. 2 11 Ul AAAH ee oa EEEE 2 19 task MANAGEr 0 eee 2 22 themes desktop a 3 47 Total Recall AutoRestore Profile A A 3 67 backup creating cece eae 3 64 backup Profile restoring 3 66 clone Creating nanan ananuna naaa 3 65 Clone to USB 0 0 0 0 cee 3 67 managing profiles 0 0 00 eee eee 3 66 Restore Profile 0 0 0 0 3 67 Upload to A R C 0 cee 3 67 view Profile 0 0 0 0 ccc eee eee 3 66 touch pen USING 0 eee eee 2 16 touchscreen recalibration 0000s 2 8 3 62 stylus USING 2 16 touch pen using 00 2 16 Translations parameters barcodes 3 54 trigger double click 0 00 aaa 3 53 trigger MAPPINGS 0 eee 3 36 Trigger On Sequence port replicator 3 58 Trigger Press Type Manage Triggers menu 3 38 triggers CONTIQUFING 0 0 eee ee 3 36 troubleshooting ST40004 cee 4 16 troubleshooting tips scanning 2 15 U UMTS HSPA radio specifications E 6 Upload to A R C paaa aaa bee eedauiwex denedu ax 3 67 Use Virtual Serial Port 00 0 0 00000 G 6 V vehicle cradle cee eens 4 16 powered pinouts 0 A 3 NDI AA AA C 9 Voice CAMLISS PAA EEEE 3 72 Call Management 0a 3 72 conference calls
5. 0 00 eee eee 2 15 Verify a C 9 warning message 6 eee 3 53 scanning 1D internal n a kaha ORE KE wee N daa ad 2 14 2 15 appending characters 3 53 safety instructions 0 0 0 0 cece eee 2 13 symbologies aa 3 51 C 1 Translations tab 0 0 0 a 3 54 Scan Result 0 ccc eee 3 53 Scan Result Time 0 0 0 ccc eee 3 53 screen stylus using to navigate 2 16 touch pen using 00 a 2 16 Windows Embedded CE navigating 2 16 Screen Rotation 0 ccc eee 3 58 SE 1224HP specifications D 4 SE 1524 ER specifications 000 D 5 SE955 specifications 0c cc cee ee D 1 SE965 specifications nananana D 2 CGI joe cacencheeueeee ee BINA NA WAWA ndn seuss C 9 See Symbol a 2 5 SEVICES nee se bcneeeeesd vied visde enone 3 74 Set for AutoRestore 0 0 cee 3 67 Settings Control Panel a 2 23 Network and Dial up connections 2 23 RUN 2 23 Taskbar and Start Menu 2 23 Shell Settings Kiosk settings 3 46 SHIFT KEY PE eee 2 3 2 4 Short Code een eens C 9 Shutdown Suspend a 2 24 Shutdown Start Menu 0a 2 24 signal quality 802 11 0 0 eee eee 2 11 signal quality WWAN 0 2 2 00 0 0 ee eee eee 2
6. 3 48 Import Export to File 006 3 49 Restrictions PA AA 3 48 Shell Settings cee eee 3 46 Kiosk SNEll 7x7 apanna ka eRaRhE Npa AWA kA mAh h a 2 25 L Laser On Time 0 00 2 cece eee eee C 3 C 7 LED eii AAP PEPE PEPE PEE 2 9 TUNCHONS sci oa aa Na evan eu suse sees NA KG NG NG WA 2 9 Ce PAA 2 10 troubleshooting quad dock ST4004 4 16 Linear Predefined preset aa B 2 Linear and PDF Predefined preset 0 00 0 c cece eee B 2 Linear Security Level 0 0 00 a C 4 Lithium ion batteries ASANG 63o5ecoqageseceaerc AA i 1 4 REMOVING AA AA 1 4 Lock Sequence 2 2 a 3 35 Low light Predefined preset 0 00 0 cece eee B 3 Low light near Predefined preset 0 00 0 c cece eee B 3 Low power Predefined preset 0 0000 aana eee B 3 Low Power Timeout 05 C 4 C 7 M Macro keys 36 key keyboard 1 nannaa annann 2 6 59 key keyboard 0 cee eens 2 6 ACCESSING AA PRA a PEPE 2 6 executing a macro eee 3 32 Macros menu accessing 3 31 recording and saving 3 31 maintenance a 2 27 Manage Triggers ccc eee 3 36 Matrix Predefined preset 0 00 c cece eee B 2 MC75i GSM GPRS EDGE radio specifications E 5 memory card creating partitions 0 0 0 ce
7. 0 0 00 a 4 4 Hard Reset 0 0 0 ccc eee eee ene 1 7 ACL AAO 1 6 headsets pairing Bluetooth 3 10 heater components System Properties F 10 heater control Di Debug OG AAP 3 22 Heater Info Heater Settings F 8 Heater Settings Heater Info a F 8 HHP 5080 imager specifications D 9 holster hard shell 0 0 20 0 cece eee 4 4 2 of 5 Short Code 0 ee C 9 Identifier Default preset group imaging software B 2 imager EV15 specifications 0 00 aa D 6 HHP 5080 specifications 0 D 9 OEJO0OLR 620d cnctege Sens diaseewnganknedend D 13 two dimensional 2D imager 2 15 Imager amp Camera settings 3 26 Imagers applet 0c ccc eee eee B 1 Import Export to File Kiosk settings 3 49 indicators Index IV Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide 802 11 radio signal quality 2 11 battery eee ene 2 11 docking devices 6 0 aa 2 12 LED functions 0 0 00 c ccc eee 2 9 modifier keys 00 cece cece eee eee aes 2 11 ONSCIFEEN 1 eee eee eee 2 10 scanner message 2 14 2 15 2 16 task bar eee ene 2 19 WWAN radio signal quality 2 11 Ingenuity Kiosk Shell settings
8. Parameter Specification Input Voltages 3 3 V 10 75 mA max VCC VEC INTFC 1 8 V 10 or 3 3 V 10 30 mA max VCC ILLUM 3 0 V 8 4 V 800 mA VCC SENSOR 3 3 V 10 70 mA max VCC VCC_SENSOR VCC_INTFC 3 3 V VCC_ILLUM 5 0 V Operating Mode Supply Low Power Currents Average 750 pA Low Power 750 uA Idle 20 mA Aim enabled no illumina 70 mA tion or image acquisition Image Acquisition Illumination Enabled pene 550 mA Illumination and Aim Enabled 600 mA Maximum Sensor Power 40 mV p p 10 Hz 50 KHz and Supply Noise VCC SENSOR 100 mV p p 50KHz 100 KHz for bar code decoding 30 mV p p 10 Hz 100 KHz for image capture Optical Resolution Near sensor 5 mil Code 39 10 mil Data Matrix Far sensor 15 mil Code 39 35 mil Data Matrix Specular Dead Zone Illumination On Up to 20 depending on target distance and substrate glossiness Illumination Off None Skew Tolerance 60 Pitch Angle 60 Roll 360 Ambient Light Immunity 9000 ft candles 96 900 lux Sunlight Imaging Sensor Image Resolution 752 H x 480 V pixels wide VGA Grey Scale 256 levels 8 bits per pixel Field of View FOV SE4600LR Far System 11 6 horizontal 7 4 vertical SE4600LR Near System 13 horizontal 8 3 vertical Parameter Aiming Element D 14 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Specification Visible Laser Diode VLD 655 5 nm dominant wavelength Aiming Dot Optic
9. C 6 Delete Char Set ECIS C 6 LOU TWIN sac ec x Stepan Sct re wee See poe ae a ogee C 3 double click a 3 53 EA11 2D Imager specifications D 7 ECI Decoder 00 0 0 eee C 6 Good Scan Beep cece ee 3 53 Good Scan Vibrates 00 0 0 ee eae 3 54 Laser On Time eee ee C 3 C 7 Linear Security Level 00 00 0000 ee C 4 Low Power Timeout 006 C 4 C 7 Minimum Cancel Time C 4 C 7 Multiple Beep Tones 3 53 one dimensional 1D internal scanner 2 14 2 15 Parameter Scanning C 4 C 7 ports parameters cece eee 3 56 safety WarMiNgS 0 0 a 2 13 scan failure codepage 3 54 Scan Indicator 0 0 0 cee ees 3 53 Scan Log File eee eee 3 54 Scan Mode 0 0 cc eens C 4 scan Result Time a 3 53 SE 1224HP specifications D 4 SE 1524 ER specifications D 5 SE955 specifications AA D 1 SE965 specifications AA D 2 sal RA C 9 SOM CODE cick a a a ak LBG be ae tok Re C 9 Soft Scan Timeout 2 0 00 a ee 3 54 specifications internal 0 0 D 1 target dot duration C 3 C 9 techniques scanning 2 14 troubleshooting tipS
10. 3 47 input panel Control Panel 3 3 installation hand strap 2am en anche ge Saad denen geen 4 4 pistol grip n on eee eee 4 1 Snap Modules a 4 5 vehicle cradle a 4 16 integrated scanner option 2 13 Intensity 7035 backlighting 3 20 3 29 Internet Explorer a 2 20 IPvb a 3 69 ISM band Bluetooth radio 3 7 K keyboard 36 key keyboard 0 aaa 2 7 alpha keys 36 key keyboard 2 7 ee eS N AA 3 29 key repeat annuun nananana 3 28 3 29 One Shot Mode anaana aeann 3 30 onscreen Microsoft SIP 3 27 PRODCMICS nanna anaana aana 3 28 keyboard keyS nunnana nanan 2 2 ALT 2 4 arrow keys 2 cece eee ees 2 4 Backspace AA 2 4 CTR NONA MAA PE 2 4 BA AA 2 4 AA AA 2 4 function keys accessing 2 6 macro keys eee 2 6 3 31 IMOGMINGYS s oz ccc oe cela deen kh DING WANNA AG NG Ib Y NG 2 4 navigating using the keyboard 2 17 SCAN ccouseouchadndeabees GE Pa cree E 2 4 OM eeenepudusecrouslevedenescusaatueed 2 3 2 4 o NG AA 2 4 CA AA AA Sena eee ms 2 4 keyboard keys freezer 0 0 cee ee F 4 Key Repeat tab 0 0 0 eee 3 29 Kiosk MENUS n nananana anaana eee eee 3 44 Kiosk settings Administrator Password 3 45 Control Panel Settings
11. Aa 3 73 dialing a number a 3 71 PNONEDOOK 4 pawa ama a bene teuedestdedadseoas 3 73 phone dialer 0 0 0 0 cece eee 1 8 3 70 phone options 0 0 0 c eee eee 1 8 3 70 Services 0 cc eee eee eee ees 3 74 voicemail setting Up nananana eee eee 3 74 Volume amp Sounds Properties 3 75 W warm resel A nann eee eens 1 6 WAN AA PAA a 3 53 Wi Fi Config oonan nananana naaa 3 76 3 76 3 81 Advanced tab Country options aaa 3 84 Configure tab a 3 77 Stalls ab AA 3 77 Wireless Zero Config 3 84 WiFiConnect A R C 2 2 22 3 85 Windows Start Menu See Start Menu 2 20 WWINGOWS T s 4 2302028ncadaceesae eases aeewe see esas 3 18 Windows Embedded CE navigating in 2 16 Windows Explorer 0 0 00 cece eee eee 2 20 Windows Mobile Device Center setting up 3 19 Windows Vista 0 0 0 0 eee eee 3 18 Wireless WAN 22 222 00 cece cee ees G 1 G 14 AT Terminal 0 0 00 cc cece eee G 13 Drive Mode configuration G 10 modem information G 11 G 11 network diagnostics 00 0 e eee G 11 SMS Menu a G 13 Use Virtual Serial Port G 6 Ce AA AA G 14 Wireless Zero Config 3 84 H 1 H 6 X XT15ni non incendive hand held l 1
12. 3 29 menu key repeat settings 3 29 Rate of key repeats 3 29 resetting Omnii DOOLIODOO basaan aa AA s AASA 1 6 clean AA AA AP 1 6 Hard REBEL 43 paawa keresece en detacaies 1 7 hard reset ee ees 1 6 NEA APP AA 1 6 Restore NOW 0 aa 3 67 Restrictions Kiosk settings 3 48 Run Start Menu 0 0 0 0 cee ee 2 24 S safety instructions battery charger 0 cc ccc eee 4 8 SCANNET figs x ease eed ye ERRORE ER RR NR R A 2 13 safety warning SCanner 0 0 00 cece ee 2 13 Same Read Timeout 0 0 0 eee C 7 Same Read Validate 0 00 c cece eee C 7 Scan ale le ie AA 3 53 SCAN Key 2 2 eee eens 2 4 Scan Log File 44ANG NA LALA Ahhh baks 3 54 Scan Mode 2 2 2 ccc ee eee eee C 4 scanner Aim Duration 0 0 0 a C 4 aiming target dot duration C 3 C 9 aiming dot duration 0 0 0 0 ce eee eee C 4 appending data 0 ccc eee 3 53 Bad Scan Vibrates 0 0 00 eee eee 3 54 barcode appending data to 3 53 Bi Direction Redundancy C 5 Click Data appending data 3 53 Click Time double click 3 53 COGGDA0G AA 3 54 Continuous Scan Mode C 7 aces AA APP C 8 decoded internal a C 3 decoded Intermec ISCP
13. Saving and exiting the radio setup Once you ve completed the configuration press Enter or tap on OK The connection you created will be listed in the Wireless Information tab as a preferred network The radio will search for the SSID and compare the WEP and authentication information you specified If there is a match between the hand held settings and the access point settings the hand held will communicate on the network through the access point Assigning An IP Address lf your network is not using a DHCP server you will need to assign an IP address Refer to P Address on page 3 82 for details about assigning an IP address Name Server Refer to Name Server on page 3 83 for details about this option Advanced Features To display the Advanced Wireless Settings dialog box Tap on the Advanced button in the Wireless Information tab Refer to Figure H 3 Wireless Information This window lists the available preferred networks Figure H 6 Advanced Wireless Settings Advanced Wireless Settings OK Use Windows to configure my 3 3 wireless settings Windows will connect to the following networks whenever they are available Preference will be given to networks at the top of this list delta Delete Properties a Automatically connect to non preferred networks Networks to access E available Rearranging Preferred Networks The Omnii attempts to connect with the networks listed in this dia
14. e Inthe Control Panel choose the Kiosk icon Ay al Pi 9 Kiosk When opening the Kiosk application the Kiosk Access dialog will come up that enables you to either proceed to the Kiosk Settings menus or change from you current Access mode to the other Administrator or User The computer must be reset following a change and a confirmation will appear to enable you to continue or dismiss the change Configuration 3 45 Kiosk Access Kiosk Access Administrator mode is active P Remain in Administrator mode ay Change to User mode User mode is active 4 device reset is recommended to ensure full functionality reset now laf Configure Kiosk Settings When opening the Kiosk Settings option the following menus will be available Figure 3 4 Kiosk Settings ae Administrator password Bj Shell Settings La Restrictions 4 Control Panel Settings Import Export to File Updated changes to Control Panel Administrator Password By setting an Administrator Password you can limit access to various different components on the computer and the system tray icons for security The default security setting allows User access to all options therefore restrictions and settings can be configured without setting a password J NOTE Ifa setting or restriction is configured without setting an Administrator password the following mes sage is displayed Administrator password is currently no
15. e Tapon Yes to remove the preset or No to cancel the operation Imager amp Camera Settings B 9 V Configuring the Barcode Decoding Symbologies Barcoding Menu To configure the barcode decoding camera presets e Tap on Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt lmagers ie lt gt magets e Tap on the Barcoding tab Figure B 3 Viewing Barcode Decoding Symbologies Imager amp Camera Settings OK x x imaging Barcoding Fitter Translat 4L Camera Presets coia Camera Low light Low power Glossy surface Barcode Presets My Default Factory Default All Linear Linear and POF417 hd ow Ad Remove Aetate a R Read W wWrite 4 Active NOTE The bottom portion of the window displays the barcode decoding barcode presets Setting the Active Preset An active preset has an A to the right in Figure B 3 Viewing Barcode Decoding Symbologies on page B 9 the active preset is Default To set an active preset e Highlight the preset and tap on the Activate button Viewing a Preset To view the parameter settings in a preset e Highlight a preset and double tap on the View button The associated preset window is displayed B 10 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Symbology Settings OK x Preset Factory Default Hh Options H All 1D With Strong Recovery E Trioptic Code disabled H Code 128 EAM 13 H EAN S gt Settings in Predefined Preset are read
16. a 4 4 Protective Carrying Case Model ST6090 aa 4 4 Hard Shell Holster Model ST6055 a 4 4 Power Accessories mma A ARARA EEEa 4 5 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide MONOUSO AA 4 5 AC Wall Adaptor Models ST1050 and ST1050 AR 2 aaa 4 7 Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor Model ST3I113 a 4 7 Chargers and Docking Stations General Information XXA a 4 8 Important Charger Safety Instructions 2 a 4 8 Charging Me IC ioundeseued ees vemnaceeGeneececestedtets 4 8 Installation Chargers and Docking Stations a 4 8 ODE lt 1 0 a CON KOS aka ee ce ANG 4 9 Power Consumption CONnSsideratiOns cccccccsssceceeecececeecceceeseceeceneeeeceuaeeseseaeeeeeeeseeeeauneeeeeaaaess 4 9 Desktop Docking Stations Models ST4002 and ST4003 aaa 4 9 Charging a Battery Installed in the Omnii 4 11 DCG AN OS AA AA AA AA AA 4 11 SAN ah NAAN AN ANA AA 4 11 Charging th Omnii Balen aaa Gana 4 11 Charging the Spare Battery 2 Aa 4 11 Cleaning the Desktop Docking Station X aa 4 12 TOS NOGUN AA AA AA E 4 12 Docking station does not seem to power ON X Aa 4 12 The Omnii charge indicator LED stays oft Xa 4 12 The Omnii charge indicator LED is red 4 12 Spare battery L
17. ojx App Launch Keys Bluetooth H Certificates L Date Time 1 7 Dialing m Display FL Or Debug m Error Reporting RE H Internet Options H Keyboard m Manage Triggers e You can add a maximum of 18 applications after which the following message is displayed Maximum 18 entries reached Import Export to File A This option enables you to Export your settings file xm and save it in the location of your choice In addition an Administrator has the option to mport these settings from one device to multiple devices of the same oper ating system IMPORTANT A copy of this file should also be saved in a central repository for all our xml files with a predefined name so that our other utilities can locate it Import Export File a Import settings from a file Export settings to a file Tapping on the Export button will display a Save As Export Settings dialog with the default name Kiosk Set tings xml which the Administrator can change even after it has been saved The xmi file contains all of the Kiosk configured settings including the Administrator Password When the file is imported to a device the new password is applied immediately e Whether choosing to import or export files the same file location options under My Device will be listed Following the action a message stating the success of the operation and the location of the file will be displayed e With the
18. To delete a remap e Inthe Scancode Remapping tab highlight the scancode you want to delete and tap on the Remove button e Tapon OK Lock Sequence The Lock Sequence menu allows you to lock the Omnii keyboard to prevent keys from being pressed acciden tally when for example the unit is inserted in a holster Lock Sequence Keyboard Properties OK L Enable key lock sequence Show popup message Keyboard locked at startup Disable touch screen on lock Key Sequence SYM FIN Bksp SYM FN O SYM FN 8 e To lock the keyboard tap in the check box next to Enable key lock sequence e Tap in the check box next to Keyboard locked at startup e In the Key sequence drop down menu choose the key sequence you will need to type to unlock the keyboard NOTE lt is useful to leave the Show popup message enabled default so that anyone attempting to use the keyboard will see the key sequence they will need to enter to unlock the keyboard displayed on the screen A locked keyboard icon is displayed in the softkey bar when the keyboard is locked Omni Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide My Device My WiFiConnect Documents vo v Recycle Bin PartnerUp p z a Hg Internet Psion Explorer Shell Locked Keyboard Microsoft Remote iton WordPad Desktop e Type the key sequence to unlock the keyboard Manage Triggers Allows users to configure how barcode scanners and other devices such as RF
19. Cell Configuration 1 S2P 2 parallel connected cells Max Charge Voltage 4 2 V 1 Recommended Charge 5 0 hr charging must stop Termination Timeout Charge Temperature 0 C to 40 C 32 F to 104 F Discharge Temperature 30 C to 50 C 22 F to 122 F Storage Temperature 20 C to 50 C 4 F to 122 F Storage at elevated temperatures not recommended 25 C 77 F recommended storage temperature Cycle Life 300 cycles minimum with no degradation below 70 of nominal capacity based on 2 5A 4 20V charge 2 5A 2 75V discharge rates 25 C 77 F Figure F 3 ST3002 Battery and Safety Label not used with narrowband radio configuration Quick Defrost Application The Omnii XT15f is a freezer capable hand held computer that has integrated heaters that are designed to improve the functionality and operation of the hand held device in extreme cold environments The Arctic variant has two heaters one for the display and one for the scan window The Chiller variant has only one heater which is located on the scan window The Quick Defrost application is the nerve center of the heater related information The Settings tab allows the user to configure the suspend time of the heating system as well as the scan window power setting The Heater Info tab provides instantaneous heater informa tion for each individual heater and the overall heating system For environmental specifications for this computer see Hardw
20. Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Thermal Shock Humidity ESD Environmental Compliance 403 435 MHz non Canada 435 470 MHz 25 kHz 20 kHz 12 5 kHz 1 ppm at all operating temperatures 1 BER 110 dBm Comply with EN 55022 Class B FCC Part 15B Class B lt 60 dBc Psion proprietary protocol gt 40 dB Less than 25 ms Less than 20 ms 403 435 MHz non Canada 435 470 MHz 25 kHz non US 20 kHz non US 12 5 kHz 1 ppm at operating temperatures 1 BER 110 dBm 42 dBm 70 dB 20 and 25 kHz 60 dB 12 5 kHz gt 73 dB 57 dBm in standby 2 0 dB for 12 5 kHz 4800 and 9600 bps 8 0 dB for 20 25 kHz 9600 bps 12 0 dB for 20 25 kHz 19200 bps 30 C 70 C 40 C 60 C Per MIL STD 810G 30C to 50C in freezer compliant host 5 to 96 R H non condensing in compliant host 8 kV contact 15 kV air in compliant host REACH WEEE RoHS 2 China RoHS The Omnii XT15f Hand Held Computer Model 7545XT V NOTE Performance specifications are nominal and subject to change without notice The Omnii XT15f is a modular industrial hand held computer suitable for cold chain and extreme weather envi ronments These units are equipped with heating hardware to prevent condensation from developing on or inside the Omnii Two variants are available the Chiller and the Arctic The Chiller model is condensing resistant and the Arctic model is condensing free This variant is equ
21. Select the active Channels ee ma D625 462 5625 464 6375 464 6575 Channel switch speed E F Pli Ee Q care switch Dlima 23 f order Da Aha When a channel is out of range the Edit switch order screen allows you to indicate the order in which channels will switch Edit switch order the button is rarely used It is used when the order of channel switching needs to be tightly controlled It is not recommended that Edit switch order be used without a clear understanding of how to order the channel sequences for optimum performance Narrowband Radio Configuration J 5 Highlight the channel you want to edit in the Channel tab before clicking on the Edit switch order button Next tap on the Edit switch order button in the lower right corner of the Channel tab to configure channel switching order Edit Switch Order When CH 3 is out of range switch to other channels in this order Use auto switching which will impact performance Tap on the channel numbers in the order you want them to switch in the sample screen for example you can click on channels 1 2 and 3 in the order you want the channels to switch e Click on OK A IMPORTANT With manual channel switch order specified the channels will be switched exactly as stated It is important to also include the original channel at the end of the manual switch order as the example above shows original channel is 3 This allows the radio to return to this
22. The state of the device RAM contents is preserved Pressing Enter wakes the system from suspend state Suspend Threshold and Estimated Battery Backup Power Properties Battery Suspend Suspend Threshold Maximize Maximize operating backup Main Battery Status Good Estimated Operating Time PA Estimated Battery Backup Time 35 h The Suspend Threshold adjustment tells the system when to shut down when the battery drains If you choose Maximum Operating Time the unit will run until the battery is completely empty the RAM is only backed up for a short period of time If you choose Maximum Backup Time the hand held shuts off with more energy left in the battery so RAM can be backed up for a longer period of time IMPORTANT Selecting Maximum backup time will reserve approximately 20 of the battery capac ity for memory backup Once the battery is drained the system RAM memory is lost and the unit must cold boot In most real time transaction environments this is not a problem it only takes a few seconds to cold boot Batch transaction environments where data is not saved to a non volatile memory such as an SD FLASH card may need to pay particular atten tion to this parameter We do not recommend the storage of any valuable data in system RAM The Omnii Windows Embedded CE 6 0 environment does not store any critical data in RAM such as the registry or file system If your application does not save data
23. To prevent damage to the touchscreen use only your finger or the stylus pen sup plied with your Omnii e Use only mild detergent or soapy water to clean the hand held unit 2 28 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide e Avoid abrasive cleaners solvents or strong chemicals for cleaning The Omnii has a plastic case that is susceptible to harsh chemicals The plastic is partially soluble in oils mineral spirits and gasoline The plastic slowly decomposes in strong alkaline solutions e Exposure to aircraft de icing fluids can degrade the plastics on Omnii If the Omnii is used near aircraft de icing environments regular rinsing with water is recommended e To clean ink marks from the keypad and touchscreen use isopropyl alcohol Overview of Software The Omnii programs and applications are accessed through two main areas from the Desktop Start Menu Programs and Settings Control Panel This chapter details the configuration for the major software from both areas listed alphabetically Software Advantage Software Advantage is a collection of applications and features designed to support system administrators and end users These tools enable enterprises to customize the product to meet their needs and to maximize productivity e AGPS e App Launch Keys e Battery Health e Bluetooth Manager e Compass e Dr Debug e Manage Triggers e PartnerUp e Kiosk e Scanner e Total Recall e Tweakilt e WiF
24. UCC EAN 128 RSS Code 39 Code 93 2 of 5 Discrete 2 of 5 Codabar MSI Programmable Parameters Laser On Time Aim Duration Power Mode Trigger Mode Bi directional Redundancy Symbology types lengths Data formatting Ambient Light Artificial 450 ft candles 4844 Lux Sunlight 8000 ft candles 86112 Lux Laser Output Power peak 1 35 mW SE1224HP Decode Zones Note Typical performance at 68 F 20 C on high quality symbols 13 mil 25 err 26 00 sa 100 UPC 20 mil 25 MRD 130 50 20 20 mil 80 MRD 3 25 p 40 mil 4 50 55 mil 86 00 In 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 cm 0 127 254 381 508 635 762 889 1016 1143 1270 1397 1524 165 1 1778 190 5 2032 2159 2286 2413 Depth of Field Minimum distance determined by symbol length and scan angle Qa o 7 Internal Imager amp Scanner Specifications D 5 SE1524ER Extended Range Scanner Parameter Specification Type Light Source Scan Rate Scan Angle Field of View Scan Patterns Minimum Print Contrast Symbologies Programmable Parameters Ambient Light Laser Output Power peak SE1524ER Decode Zones Laser Class 2 Visible Laser Diode 650 nm 35 5 scans sec bi directional 13 5 0 7 Linear Minimum 25 absolute dark light reflectance measured at 650 nm UPC EAN Code 128 UCC EAN128 RSS Code 39 Code 93 2 of 5 Discrete 2 of 5 Codabar MSI Las
25. e In the Power Properties dialog box open the Battery Health tab Wakeup device on battery insert Add health colour to the Taskbar Battery tray icon Show popup UI on device resume always al Show cycle count in UI lo seconds to auto dismiss UI rating descriptions Fa BJ Current Battery Health Meter The Current Battery Health Meter default values are shown here as Excellent Used and Battery should be replaced If you tap on the battery icon in the taskbar a pop up screen will show the state of the battery The image below shows the default Excellent status screen Battery Health Battery Power 0720 Battery Health nnn Excellent Enable Battery Health Service This option allows you to enable the service To access the menus after enabling the service you will need to either wait until a resume from Suspend or restart the Omnii Wakeup Device on Battery Insert When this option is enabled whenever the battery is replaced the Omnii is powered up from Suspend and the current health of the battery is displayed Add Health Colour to the Taskbar Battery Tray Icon Enabling this option changes the background colour for the battery icon in the Taskbar based on battery condi tion Green excellent Yellow used and Red battery should be replaced 3 44 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Show Popup UI on Device Resume You can decide when the battery status pop
26. e Scroll through the parameter list until you reach the parameter that you want to change e Fora parameter that can take a range of values Highlight the parameter and then press the SPACE key or double click the parameter An associated dialog box containing the valid range of values for the parameter and the current setting like the sample screen following is displayed msec OK Enter value from O to 157 ETE msec Type a value in the field provided e Fora parameter that toggles between two values such as on or off and enabled or disabled Highlight the parameter and then press the SPACE key or double click on the parameter Either method toggles between the two available values e When you ve completed your edits tap on OK The parameter list is displayed the new value for the changed parameter is shown e Tapon OK to exit to the preset list and save the changes Removing a Custom Preset e Highlight the custom preset you want to delete and tap on the Remove button A window is displayed warning you that you are about to remove a preset e Tapon Yes to remove the preset or No to cancel the operation Barcoding Menu Configuring Symbologies To view the Symbology Settings options e Tap on the Barcoding tab highlight All and then double tap the View button To edit a default preset you must first activate it e Tap on My Default and tap on the Activate button an A appears to the right of My Default Once
27. hed AA E a N a m m 10 In the Modem dialog box choose the Next button to display the Phone Number dialog box 3 16 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide 11 12 13 14 File Edit Advanced Phone Number Aal My Connection Country code p Area code 425 Phone number roost Force long distance The phone number you enter is network carrier dependent Once you ve specified all the necessary infor mation choose the Finish button In the Control Panel choose the Dialing icon B gt Dialing The values in the Dialing Properties dialog box need to be edited according to your network carrier specifications Dialing Properties OK Location work Local settings ae Area code 425 Tone dialing Country Region Fl Pulse dialing 7 Disable call waiting dial F Dialing patterns are pa Local Long Distance t International 9 1FG 9 011 EFG Once you ve edited this dialog box to reflect your network carrier requirements press Enter to save your changes At this point return to the Contro Panel and choose the Network and Dial up Connections icon In the network connection window the new network configuration in this case New Connection is displayed Tap on the new icon a Beor kd Mee Configuration 3 17 When you tap on your new connection an onscreen message indicates the status of your connection connect
28. ners gt Options gt Display menu You can also enable sounds and vibrations to indicate good and bad scans by enabling those options in the Control Panel gt Scanners gt Options gt Display menu Troubleshooting If the scanner is not working investigate the following e Is the unit on e Check that the barcode symbology being scanned is enabled for the hand held you are using Check any other parameters that affect the scanning procedure or the barcode e Check the barcode to make sure it is not damaged Try scanning a different barcode to verify that the problem is not with the barcode e Check that the barcode is within the proper range e Does the hand held display the warning without scanning This suggests a hardware problem in the hand held e Is the laser beam scanning across the barcode e Once the scan beam has stopped check the scanner window for dirt or fogging Operating One Dimensional 1D Internal Laser Scanners e Turn the hand held on Wait until the unit has booted up completely AN IMPORTANT If an aiming dot is available on the installed scanner the dot will be enabled for a config urable time period including off after which normal scanning begins Refer to Dot Time msec on page C 3 for details Double clicking the trigger will override the aiming delay and initiate an immediate scan Note that the aiming dot is standard on long range and high visibility internal scanners e Aim at the barcode and
29. s network connection is severed the Status field displays Ready to connect The signal strength is displayed in the main Wireless WAN screen even while a connection is active The Rx bytes and Tx bytes fields estimate the amount of data transmitted and received respectively Shutting Down the Wireless WAN User Interface While it is not usual to shut down the GSM GPRS user interface you can accomplish this by tapping on the File menu and choosing the Exit command at the bottom of the main Wireless WAN dialog box NOTE Once you ve shut down the user interface you can only enable the radio by opening the Control Panel and tapping on the Wireless WAN icon to display the Wireless WAN dialog box G 4 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Advanced Information In most cases when a GSM GPRS radio and SIM are installed in your computer setup is automatic Follow the steps outlined under the heading Establishing a Packet Data Connection on page G 2 to make a connec tion The information in this section is for advanced setup purposes Entering a PIN Number If a PIN is required a PIN entry dialog box is displayed e Type your PIN and press Enter J NOTE If you exceed the number of allowable attempts a PUK entry window is brought to the fore ground You ll need to enter a new PIN number Once the correct PIN or PUK is entered or if none was required the modem is instructed to perform a GSM network registration
30. will move the display to the next screen J NOTE Although the Desktop appearance defaults to the Ingenuity theme the theme is not changed using the Kiosk Shell icon To change themes open the Shell Set tings gt Advanced menu in Kiosk Access see Shell Settings on page 3 46 Hold the stylus or your finger on the Active Tasks Favourites or Notifications Bar and swipe to the left or right to switch to the next screen Ail Active Tasks Bar Favourites Bar Notifications Bar 2 26 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide A different program Kiosk Access enables you to customize your computer settings remove or add shortcuts to the Favourites Bar and Control Panel and limit access to various different components on the computer and the system tray icons for security For details see Kiosk Access on page 3 44 To change your Desktop back ground refer to Shell Settings on page 3 46 Active Tasks Bar Open applications are shown in the top bar the most recently opened is the first icon on the left Tapping once on a program icon will maximize the application This feature replaces the Task Manager of the Windows Classic Shell Date Time Bar Tapping once on the date or time will open the Date Time Properties settings to enable you to change your settings and time zone Favourites Bar The Favourites Bar replaces the Windows Classic Shell Desktop and Start Menu These icons are the program
31. 1000 msec a double click occurs See also Trigger Press Type on page 3 38 Show All Modules By default the trigger mapping list only shows active mappings Mappings for drivers or applications that are not currently active are not normally displayed By checking this check box all mappings both active and inac tive are displayed Add Tapping this button brings up the Add Mapping dialog see Add and Edit Trigger Mapping on page 3 37 so that you can add new trigger mappings Edit Tapping this button brings up the Edit Mapping dialog see Add and Edit Trigger Mapping on page 3 37 so that you can edit existing trigger mappings Remove Tapping this button removes an existing mapping OK The OK button in the top right of the Manage Triggers screen saves all changes made If the cancel button X is tapped instead or the ESC key is pressed all changes made will be discarded Add and Edit Trigger Mapping These dialogs allow you to add and edit trigger mappings Add Mapping Edit Mapping Trigger key Trigger key Grip Trigger F Soft Scan F Trigger press type Trigger press type pi Down Up Down O Double click O Double click Module to trigger Module to trigger Non Decoded Scanner Non Decoded Scanner iy Show all modules Show all modules Trigger Key This drop down list allows you to specify the source of the trigger events such as the Soft Scan Left Scan etc for the trigger m
32. 11 SIM card inserting cee eee eee 2 12 SIP Soft Input Panel 0 0 00 eee 3 27 SMS menu WWAN 0000 ee eee eee G 13 Snap Modules DINOULS 0 ce eee eens A 2 ST4000 power only a e ee eee 4 5 ST4001 USB Host Client 4 5 A 2 ST4005 USB DE9M 4 5 A 2 SNTP Registry Editor a 3 70 Soft Input Panel Control Panel 2 3 3 Microsoft SIP 2 20 a KAG AD AGA NAKAKA AA cade ka 3 27 Soft Scan Timeout a 3 54 sound settingS 004504 KAL Wa AWRA Gmb ha mad 3 75 SPACE Key 2 2 2 4 specifications camera a E 2 E 20X scanner awan PANA KAB DA NGA Ka WG D 8 EV15 1D imager a D 6 HHP 5080 imager aaa D 9 Omnii Hand Held Computer E 1 Omnii XT15f specifications F 1 scanner internal a D 1 Symbol SE4500 imager D 10 Symbol SE4600 imager D 13 ST3002 Arctic battery specifications F 5 ST4000 Snap Module 0 0 0 2 eae 4 5 ST4001 Snap Module 00 4 5 A 2 ST4004 quad docking station 4 13 l c pl AA PAA 4 16 Ethernet a 4 15 troubleshooting aa 4 16 ST4005 Snap Module 0 4 5 A 2 Start Menu a 2 20 cycle tasks a 2 22 programs ee
33. 2 Adding a Remap To add a new remapping e Choose the Add button at the bottom of the dialog box The Remap Scancode dialog box is displayed Remap Scancode Scancode Label virtud keys la BACK SPACE TAB CLEAR RETURN CAPITAL ESCAPE virtual Key O Force Shifted O Function O Force Unshifted O Macro No Force e Type the scan code in hexadecimal in the field labelled Scancode J NOTE The Label field displays the default function of the scancode you are remapping Virtual Key Function and Macro The radio buttons at the bottom of the dialog box allow you to define to what the scan code will be remapped Virtual Key Function or Macro Configuration 3 35 When Virtual Key is selected you can choose to force SHIFT to be on or off when the virtual key is sent If No Force is selected the shift state is dependent on whether the shift state is on or off at the time the virtual key is sent When Function is selected a list of valid functions appears in the dialog box When Macro is selected the macro keys available on your unit are listed in the dialog box e Choose Virtual Key Function or Macro e Choose a function from the Function list in the dialog box and tap on OK Editing a Scancode Remap To edit a scancode e Inthe Scancode Remapping tab tap on the remap you want to edit e Tap on the Edit button and make the appropriate changes e Tapon OK to save your changes Removing a Remap
34. 3 020cm 3 5 in 8 9cm 7 6 in 19 3cm PDF417 9 in 22 9cm UPC 13 2 in 33 5cm Data Matrix 10 2 in 25 9cm QR 8 8 in 22 4cm MaxiCode 2 0 in 5 1cm 13 0 in 33cm SE4500SR Standard Range Imager Parameter Specification Power Requirements 3 3V 0 3 Vat 23 C Input Voltage Operating Mode Supply Currents 3 3VDC at 23 C Low Power 500 pA Idle 18 mA Image Acquisition 80 mA Illumination Enabled 200 mA Maximum Operating 250 mA aiming on during exposure illumination enabled Current Maximum Sensor Power 100 mVp p 3 3 V 10 Hz 100 kHz for decoding supply Noise at 23 30 mVp p 3 3 V 10 Hz 100 kHz for image capture Parameter Optical Resolution Specular Dead Zone Illumination On Illumination Off Skew Tolerance Pitch Angle Roll Ambient Light Immunity Sunlight Imaging Sensor Image Resolution Grey Scale Field of View FOV Focusing Distance from Front of Engine SR Aiming Element Internal Imager amp Scanner Specifications D 11 Specification 5 0 mil Code 39 6 7 mil PDF417 Up to 20 depending on target distance and substrate glossiness None 60 60 360 9000 ft candles 96 900 lux 752 H x 480 V pixels Wide VGA 256 levels 8 bits per pixel SE4500 SR 39 6 horizontal 25 7 vertical 8 in 20 3 cm Visible Laser Diode VLD 655 10 nm Central Dot Optical Power g 6 my Pattern Angle Illumination System LED
35. 3 3164 3 3164 2 1 2 Serial Client Server OBEX Client Server HSF HID host DUN EOT Device Name displays the broadcasted name of the hand held The name can be changed in the System Properties applet Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt System icon gt Device Name tab 3 14 Omni Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Local Address displays the MAC address BD_ Addr of the Bluetooth chip HCI Version amp LMP Version display the version of the chip firmware Component indicates the version of the Bluetooth Subsystem the manager drivers etc Profiles lists the supported profiles on this specific Omnii The Bluetooth GPRS WAN Connection The following steps describe how to set up an Internet data connection using a GSM cellular telephone with Bluetooth The Omnii communicates via B uetooth to the cell phone which then accesses a WAN Wide Area Network and transfers data using GPRS 1 Enable the Dial Up Networking service in the cell phone 2 Make the phone discoverable 3 Pair the phone service with the Omnii Dial Up Networking service using the Bluetooth Manager For instructions on pairing devices refer to Pairing a Device on page 3 10 4 To setup the Internet parameters choose the Network And Dial up Connections icon from the Control Panel Network and Dial u 5 Tap on Make New Connection File Edit Advanced TA Y ECOS101 Make New e PANG Soe a 6 Inth
36. 4 7 e The Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor powers the Omnii and recharges the battery using power drawn from your vehicle s automotive power outlet see Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor Model ST3113 on page 4 7 e The Desktop Docking Stations operate as both chargers and docking stations Operating as a charger both the battery installed in the Omnii and a spare battery can be charged Priority is given to charging the hand held s battery See Desktop Docking Stations Models ST4002 and ST4003 on page 4 9 Normally it takes 3 to 4 hours to charge a battery The Omnii intelligent charging system protects the battery from over charging by terminating the charge process when the battery is at maximum capacity Charge Completed During Sleep Mode While Operating 100 4 hrs 8 hrs IMPORTANT To avoid damaging the battery chargers will not begin the charge process until the battery temperature is between 0 C to 40 C 32 F to 104 F Installation Chargers and Docking Stations When installing a charger or docking station consider the following guidelines e Keep chargers and docking stations away from excessive dirt dust water and other liquids and contaminants Accessories 4 9 e Chargers will not charge batteries outside an ambient temperature range of 0 C to 40 C 32 F to 104 F It is recommended that the charger or docking station be operated at room temperature between 18 C and 25 C 64 F to 77 F for maxi
37. 7 5 mile a 7 Ho PORSIT 66 mik 5 3 3 125mmi5mils 1 25 man 10 mils D 8 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide EA20X Imager Parameter Specification Light Source 617nm highly visible LED 650nm laser framing aiming Scan Rate Linear Emulation Mode 2D mode 60 images s auto adaptive 200 scans s auto adaptive Scan Angle 26 0 horizontal 16 8 vertical Framing Angles Optical Resolution Print Contrast Minimum Resolution Symbologies 1D Symbologies 2D Voltage Operating Current Power Saving Mode Ambient Light 25 0 horizontal 16 0 vertical 752 H x 480 V pixels 256 gray levels Down to 30 on 1D 35 on 2D 1D symbologies 0 15 mm 6 mil Stacked PDF417 0 17 6 6 mil and 2D matrix 0 18 7mil EAN UPC GS1 Databar limited expanded amp omni directional RSS Code 39 Code 128 UCC EAN 128 ISBN ISBT Interleaved Matrix Industrial and Standard 2 of 5 Codabar Code 93 93i Code 11 MSI Plessey Telepen postal codes Australian Post BPO Canada Post Dutch Post Japan Post PostNet Sweden Post Data Matrix PDF417 Micro PDF 417 Codablock Maxicode QR Aztec GS1 composite codes 3 3V 5 410mA 3 3V scanning with power save TMA From 0 to 100 000 lux Regulatory Approvals UL cUL VDE certified ROHS compliant Class 2 Laser Internal Imager 4 Scanner Specifications D 9 EA20X Typical Rea
38. CE 6 0 User Guide A full charge will take 3 to 4 hours for a 5000 mAh battery This may take up to 8 hours if the hand held is also docked and charging Cleaning the Desktop Docking Station A IMPORTANT Do not immerse the unit in water Dampen a soft cloth with mild detergent to wipe the unit clean e Use only mild detergent or soapy water on a slightly damp cloth to clean the desktop docking station Avoid abrasive cleaners solvents or strong chemicals for cleaning The plastic case is susceptible to harsh chemicals The plastic is partially soluble in oils mineral spirits and gasoline The plastic slowly decom poses in strong alkaline solutions Troubleshooting The indicators applications and drivers required to use and monitor the desktop docking station as a dock as opposed to a charger are installed on the Omnii no applications are present on the docking station itself Docking station does not seem to power on e When first connected to the DC power supply the charger LED should flash a sequence of red yellow and green e If not the charger is defective and requires service The Omnii charge indicator LED stays off When the Omnii is docked into a powered desktop docking station and the Omnii charge indicator LED stays off there could be a problem with the hand held or with the docking station Use a hand held with a properly functioning charge indicator to isolate the problem NOTE The desktop docking statio
39. Calibration If your device isn t E responding properly to your taps you may need to recalibrate your screen To start the recalibration process tap Recalibrate e Follow the directions on the calibration screen to calibrate the screen Getting To Know Your Omnii 2 9 Indicators The Omnii uses LEDs Light Emitting Diodes onscreen messages vibrations and audio tones as indicators LEDs The Omnii is equipped with four coloured LEDs This section outlines what these LEDs indicate AN IMPORTANT Ifan LED is illuminated in red the operator should be cautious as this generally indicates an abnormal operating condition or active laser emission Figure 2 3 LED Status Indicators 1 Battery Charge Status 2 Operating System Status 3 Radio Status 4 Scanner Status Battery Charge Status LED The far left LED is reserved for battery charge status This indicator is active even when the hand held is inserted in a docking station and in suspend mode so that the charge status of the battery can be detected easily Charge LED Behaviour Function OFF External power not detected Solid Green Battery charging complete Flashing Green Charge in progress Yellow Cell temperature out of range for charge Solid Red Unable to charge battery Operating System Status LED The second LED indicates system notifications and operating system status It is also available for user loaded custom Windows Embedded CE applica
40. Control Panel Figure 3 2 nout Panel Properties Input Panel Properties OK Input Panel Current input method Options Allow applications to automatically show hide the Input Panel requires a warm reset To quickly switch input methods tap and hold the Input Panel button and then select the desired method from the menu e Tap on the Options button to change the appearance of your soft keyboard J NOTE You can also display this dialog box by double tapping on the Input icon in the far right corner of the taskbar Figure 3 3 Soft Keyboard Options Use gestures for Space Backspace Shitt and Enter pl Space f M1 Allow applicatio Backspace F show hide the a warm reset E Enter Keyboard Properties This icon displays the Keyboard Properties dialog box in which you can adjust the repeat rate of the keys the intensity of the keyboard backlight and the behaviour of the FN and SYM modifier keys This dialog box also allows you to define macro keys and Unicode characters e Inthe Control Panel choose the Keyboard icon keyboard Configuration 3 29 Key Repeat J NOTE These settings apply when a key is held down continuously e Inthe Keyboard Properties dialog box open the Repeat tab Keyboard Properties OK Repeat Backight One shots ma Repeat delay Long Repeat rate Slow Fast Tap here and hold down a key to test gagala Repeat Delay The value a
41. Device My WIFIConmect Documents Recycle Bin ee Ip NOTE Tap on the item in the menu with which you want to work If you re using the keyboard e Use the arrow keys to highlight a menu item and press Enter or If the menu item has an underlined character e Type the underlined alpha character For example to display the Run dialog box type the letter r Programs Getting To Know Your Omnii 2 21 e Choose Programs to display a sub menu of options The programs displayed will be those resident in the Windows Programs folder of the computer Figure 2 6 Program Sub Menu O My Device Piy WiFiLonnect Documents J P Recycle Bin PartnerUp BA E Dere e HE command Prompt Jh CREE internet Explorer RUA a Remote Desktop Connection Shy Wi Fi Config gt c3 ae e Windows Explorer This sub menu allows you to choose Command Prompt Internet Explorer installed applications e g Micro soft WordPad Kiosk Access Remote Desktop Connection Wi Fi Config or Windows Explorer Demo This folder contains the Scanner Demo Demo Signature and Demo Sound applications Scanner Demo can be used to test how the hand held reads barcodes Demo Signature allows you to capture a signature written on the screen with your stylus and save it to a file Demo Sound allows you to record and playback sound files The Sample Rate and the Bits Per Sample are the rates at which the sound will be recorded Sounds
42. Double Click Manage Triggers menu 3 37 Double Tap stylus settings 3 62 Di COU AA PAPA 3 21 heater control log 2 0 0c eee 3 22 Driver Mode configuration WWAN G 10 E EA11 2D Imager specifications D 7 EA20X scanner specifications D 8 ECI Decoder a na PRAAN ee0 sie de Ahaha C 6 Error Reporting a 3 23 ANG CA 2 4 Ethernet connecting with docking station 4 15 EV15 1D imager scanner specifications D 6 F formatting entire memory Card 0 0c eee eee eee 3 59 DaIUTONS o aeaa See en eae are an eons 3 61 freezer keyboards 000s cece eee eee F 4 freezer models Quick Defrost F 6 FTP Server Registry Editor 3 69 Function Keys 36 key keyboard 0 00 cee 2 6 59 key keyboard 0 eee 2 6 G gang charger cc eee eee 4 22 4 25 Glossy surface Predefined preset B 3 Good Scan Beep cece eee 3 53 Good Scan VibrateS nananana aaau eee 3 54 GPRS Bluetooth eee 3 14 GPS Settings built in profiles 3 23 Group PE SE AG AA TA KAG AN pa an ANA B 1 GSM EDGE 22 G 1 GSOM GPRO 645464636468 oe Ghee edd heb kias G 1 G 14 GSM GPRS EDGE radio specifications E 6 H hand strap a 4 3 hand strap installing
43. GSM GPRS universal handset e Bluetooth printer e Bluetooth headset Keep in mind that Bluetooth and IEEE 802 119g radios both operate in the 2 4GHz band Although the Omnii includes features to minimize interference performance of the system will not be optimal if you use both radios simultaneously Typically when both radios operate in the hand held at the same time they cannot transmit simultaneously this has a negative impact on overall system throughput To minimize the impact on the backbone 802 11 network we recommend using Bluetooth peripherals that have low transaction rates such as printers and scanners Bluetooth peripherals are configured by choosing the Bluetooth icon in the Control Panel In addition review the manual shipped with your Bluetooth device to determine the method used to associate with the Omnii host J NOTE The Bluetooth radio uses an internal antenna e Inthe Control Panel choose the Bluetooth icon to display the Bluetooth Manager screen 3 Bluetooth 3 8 Omni Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide The Bluetooth Manager allows users to search pair and connect to other Bluetooth devices within their personal area network The Bluetooth radio is disabled by default Before you begin the setup process e Tap on the Mode tab and tap in the check box next to Turn on Bluetooth Tap on OK When the radio is enabled a Bluetooth icon appears on the taskbar at the bottom of the screen It
44. If you tap on the Add New button rather than the Scan button you can create a network manually AN IMPORTANT The steps below describe how to manually create a network Keep in mind that this is intended only as an example and may vary from your own network requirements If for example you are using a different type of security for your network the fields you complete may not match those described here e Enter the SSID Service Set Identifier for your network Configure Profile OK SSID Production Auth Mode Open Authentication Mode The Omnii supports several classes of authentication Open WEP WPA WPA2 Personal PSK Enterprise CCKM WPA CCKM WPA2 and 802 1x with EAP Tapping on the Auth Mode menu displays your authentica tion options S510 Auth Mode Fun WiP5 Personal PSK WP5 Enterprise EAP WPA2 Personal PSK WPA2 Enterprise EOP CCKM WPA CCOKM WPAZ Configuration 3 79 V NOTE Each Auth Mode has a unique Configure Profile screen attached to it with fields appropriate to the authorization mode you ve chosen Open Authentication Open authentication does not provide security When this option is chosen the Omnii will connect to wireless networks which do not use authentication or encryption WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy WEP provides static security to prevent others from accidentally accessing your network If you choose this option you can specify the type of WEP authentica
45. Launch Bluetooth Certificates Keys b 4 s Bing Keyboard Manage Microphone Compass Date Time Dialing Triggers s GA e2 I Remove Scanners Screen A Programs Rotation ad Network Owner PartnerUp 2 o A Display Dr Debug Error and Dial u m i J Reporting CF b s Storage Stylus System r ool Manager al D Password PC Power D p 2 GPS Input Panel Internet Connection D et Settings Options 5 g p F a 9 System Total Recall TweakIT wu VW Properties Settings PsionvU Quick Region and Defrost Language w JO 7 MD gt ah Volume amp Wireless Sounds WAN Configuration 3 3 Control Panel Applications The Control Panel provides a group of applications that allow you to customize and adjust settings on your Omnii This section shows the related icons in the Control Panel and gives a brief description of each App Launch Keys By mapping keys to applications using this program you can then launch those applications from a single key press Bluetooth Opens the Bluetooth Manager which provides options for configuring various Bluetooth peripherals It also provides the capability to use a Bluetooth enabled cellular phone as a data modem to exchange information with other Bluetooth devices and provide network access Certificates This program provides access to the Certificates Manager and Stores The Certificates Manager displays the certificates in the Windows Certificates Store and allows you
46. Low Power Timeout is not used Parameter Scanning Setting this parameter to on enables decoding of parameter barcodes Linear Security Level This parameter allows you to select the security level appropriate for your barcode quality There are four levels of decode security for linear code types e g Code 39 Interleaved 2 of 5 Higher security levels should be selected for decreasing levels of barcode quality As security levels increase the scanner decode speed decreases Double tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can enter a value from 1 to 4 Linear security level 1 specifies that the following code types must be successfully read twice before being decoded Scanner Settings C 5 Code Type Length Codabar All MSI Plessey 4 or less DSof5 8 or less 2 of 5 8 or less Linear security level 2 specifies that all types of codes must be successfully read twice before being decoded Linear security level 3 specifies that code types other than the following must be successfully read twice before being decoded The following codes must be read three times Code Type Length MSI Plessey 4 or less D2of5 8 or less 2 of 5 8 or less Linear security level 4 requires that all code types be successfully read three times before being decoded Bi Direction Redundancy of NOTE This parameter is only valid if a Linear Security Level is enabled When this parameter is enabled a barcode must be succes
47. Now the desktop will be in focus and the arrow keys will highlight the icons Getting To Know Your Omnii The Taskbar My j ely WiFi Connect Documents vo v Recycle Bin PartnerUp 7 z NG Internet Kiosk Explorer He Ha Microsoft Remote WordPad Desktop The Omnii is equipped with a taskbar at the bottom of the screen It displays icons through which you can view the battery capacity and radio signal quality of your unit If the hand held is attached to a charger cradle docking station or Snap Module an associated icon is displayed In addition the taskbar displays the applica tion s currently running on your unit The taskbar also displays active modifier keys SHIFT ALT CTRL FN and SYM Keys that have been locked on are displayed with underlined letters For example if you have set the CTRL key lock to on in the Keyboard menu and you press the key it is displayed as an underlined Ctrl in the taskbar For detailed information on modifier keys and keyboard options see The Keyboard on page 2 2 Using the Taskbar A tooltip is displayed as each taskbar icon is highlighted The tooltip provides the status of each icon If you re using the touchscreen e Tap and hold on an icon to display the icon s tooltip Double tap the icon to open the Control Panel dialog box associated with the icon For example double tap the battery icon to display a dialog box listing the current batte
48. Off Sequence displays a screen with a hex array of 10 elements These parameters work in conjunction with Manage Triggers sending on and off data streams to the trigger module you assigned For example suppose you launch Manage Triggers and choose Decoded Scanner as the module to trigger Next you assign a trigger key for this example period To define the serial stream of data bytes to control the on and off function of the trigger key enter a hex value in the Trigger On Sequence and the Trigger Off Sequence fields When you press the trigger key the Trigger On Sequence is sent and when you release the trigger key the Trigger Off Sequence is sent turning the trigger key on and off Screen Rotation V This option allows you to determine how your Omnii screen will behave depending on how the unit is oriented e Tap Start gt Settings gt Control Panel and then tap on the Screen Rotation icon C All orientations Ben Portrait O Landscape Screen Rotation a7 T gt dah D e GU BA To Maintain Screen Orientation Choose either the Portrait or Landscape radio button and uncheck the Enable auto screen rotation box Your screen will appear in that mode without rotating when the Omnii is moved about To Enable Screen Rotation Check the Enable auto screen rotation box and the orientation you want Your screen will flip vertically Portrait mode or horizontally Landscape mode as you rotate the Omnii If you cho
49. Power Properties dialog box open the Battery tab to view battery details Power Properties OK Battery Suspend Suspend Threshold External Charger State Full Charge Complete Remaining Power 4612 mAh Full Capacity 4784 mah Time to Empty No data Operating Time Mo data Voltage kl Current O ma Temperature A D C Chemistry Li Ion Cycle Count 11 Power Saving Suspend e Inthe Power Properties dialog box open the Suspend tab Power Properties OK Suspend Suspend Threshold Adve 4 Power Source a Battery Power 8 Suspend Timeout Power Source This drop down menu allows you to specify whether the unit is using AC Power or Battery Power Configuration 3 41 A Suspend Timeout IMPORTANT We recommends setting the Suspend value to 3 minutes To further reduce power con sumption carefully consider the duration of time that the display backlight is on see Backlight on page 3 20 When the Omnii is idle not receiving any user input a key touch a scan and so on or system activity serial data an activity initiated by an application and so on the hand held uses the value assigned in the Suspend Timeout field to determine when the unit will go to sleep appear to be off When the time in the Suspend Timeout field elapses without any activity the unit enters suspend state In suspend state the Omnii CPU enters a sleep state and wireless communication is shut off
50. Rule definition a verify No rule Match and replace at index Replace at index Add barcode prefix suFFix Action verify barcode size No rule defined No rule defined Insert key Insert key When you choose a rule an associated screen is displayed in which you can define the rule 3 56 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Rule definition Watch at index verify Match Index ft From right Action must be Found at specified index Insert Key Case Rules The case rules are defined as follows e No rule ignored e Search and replace replaces all instances of the match string Note that this rule cannot fail e Match at index matches the match string at a specified index e Match and replace at index matches the match string at a specified index and replaces changes it e Replace at index replaces changes unspecified data in a given range e Add barcode prefix suffix adds a global prefix or suffix e Verify barcode size verifies the barcode size This rule should generally be assigned first before creat ing subsequent rules J NOTE Keep in mind that the effects of previously applied rules must be taken into account when creat ing subsequent rules For example if the barcode size is important it should be checked before any rules that might change the size are applied Translation information about the status of each case rule is displayed in the
51. Servers Mode Turn on Bluetooth v Discoverable Printer Port None Turn on Bluetooth activates the Bluetooth radio Discoverable determines whether the Omnii is visible or invisible to other devices Printer Port allows you to assign and enable a virtual outgoing COM port selected from the drop down menu to communicate with a paired Bluetooth printer Keep in mind that when a port is chosen the printer must be on and connected to the chosen port for a remote device to be able to connect Select a port within the Printer Port drop down list e g BSP1 Check the Printer Port check box Open the Device tab and tap on Scan Tap and hold each Bluetooth Printer device entry and then select Pair key in the Passcode if needed and then tap Done DO NOT select any services Close the Bluetooth Manager Select the Bluetooth device to print to you will need to key in or programmatically raise the following key sequence CTRL ALT F1 You can now select the Bluetooth device to which you wish to print Allow Bluetooth to wake system allows remote Bluetooth devices to wake the Omnii by requesting a Blue tooth service that requires host intervention This feature can also be used when the Omnii is waking from suspend to significantly to reduce the initialization time of the Bluetooth system About Device Name Local Address HCI version LMP Wersion Component Profiles OMI 002666368094
52. Unicode mappings are listed in the Unicode Mapping tab in order of virtual key value and then by order of the shift state If a Unicode mapping is not listed the Unicode mapping is mapped to the default Unicode value Adding and Changing Unicode Values IMPORTANT Changes to Unicode mappings are not saved until you exit the Keyboard Properties dialog box e Choose the Add Change button Configuration 3 33 Change Unicode Mapping OK a KA tet tot ot ot td o E SHIFT Pressed W CTRL Pressed Unicode Mapping fooo3 Default Unicode Mapping e Highlight a value in the Unicode mapping list In the sample screen above a value will be assigned to virtual key O VK 0 e Position the cursor in the Unicode Mapping field and type a Unicode value for the highlighted key J NOTE To add a shifted state SHIFT and or CTRL press TAB to position the cursor in the check box next to SHIFT Pressed and or CTRL Pressed Press SPACE to select the shift state you want to assign Removing Unicode Values e Inthe Unicode Mapping tab highlight the item you want to delete and choose the Remove button Scancode Remapping A scancode is a number that is associated with a physical key on a keyboard Every key has a unique scan code that is mapped to a virtual key a function or a macro Scancode Remapping allows you to change the functionality of any key on the keyboard A key can be remapped to send a virtual key e g VK_F repr
53. XT15f Hand Held Computer Model 7545XT aaa F 1 Hardware Specifications 2 2 2 a F 2 Regulatory FAD OVA ANA AGANG AA F 4 The Freezer Keyboards ccccccccecceecceececeecaueceaeecueecuecsueesaeceaceceecaeesseesaesaueesaeesaeseueesaeeseeeses F 4 Lithium ion Smart Battery 5000 mAh ST3003 for Omnii Chiller Model QXQXQX F 5 Lithium ion Smart Battery 5300 mAh ST3002 for Omnii Arctic Model cccecccececeeeeeeeeeee ees F 5 Quick Defrost Application AA F 6 SE ULLA S e E A EENE E EEE E E AR APA F 7 Ki ae A E A E EE ete EEE cee E AU F 8 Appendix G Wireless Wide Area Network WWAN Settings AECE WAN binicanssansrcavyesiiiorrassinsawscinendtuinanilipaunieynnactumaihe rekasisyawekaedttwuanen NGARAN NAY G 1 TAKOA ICONO GG A AA ANAN G 1 Establishing a Packet Data Connection aa G 2 Disconnecting From a Network ccccccsecceeeceeeceeceseeeseeeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeseeeseeeseeeseeeaeesaees G 3 Shutting Down the Wireless WAN User Interface 2 aa G 3 Advanced Information maana BANAAG NANG DNA AA a G 4 Entering a PIN NUMDETL cccccccscccececeeceeeeceeecaeecaeecaeesaeecaeesseecaeesseesseesaeecaeecseesueeaunenaes G 4 BIKOL NAG AA ere ee eee ee G 4 TOOTS METU AA PP AA PP NAP G 5 WWAN Data CORMGUE ANON AA G 5 SSCUNIY COMO WT AUG Na mam race ncddo crane AGA EEEE G 8 Network COMMOQUPAUO AA AA AA G 9 Driver Mode Co
54. and choose Non decoded All the available barcode symbologies for this type of scanner can be selected in this tab A plus sign to the left of the menu item indicates that a sub menu of parameters is attached e Tap on the sign to display the sub menu Scanner Settings C 9 e To change a parameter value double tap on the parameter If you need to type a value a dialog box is dis played in which you can type a new value If you need to change a yes or no value double tapping on the parameter toggles between yes and no If you re using the keyboard e Highlight the barcode you want to work with and press the RIGHT arrow key to display the sub menu e Use the UP and DOWN arrow keys to highlight a parameter e To change a parameter value press SPACE or the RIGHT arrow key If a field requires text entry a text box is displayed in which you can enter the appropriate value Options e Tap on the sign next to Options to display these parameters Dot Time msec The value selected for Dot Time msec determines in milliseconds how long the targeting dot remains on before the scanner switches to a normal scan sweep When you double tap on this parameter a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter a value from O to 3000 A value of O zero disables the target dot Short Code When enabled this parameter allows scanning of short 2 of 5 barcodes 2 characters When disabled these short barcodes are re
55. approvals Omnii including scanner E 3 arrow keys moving the cursor cece eee 2 4 AT Terminal WWAN 0 2220 G 13 audio indicators adjusting volume a 2 12 description of beep conditions 2 12 AutoRestore a 3 67 B background choosing for Desktop 3 48 background image display scheme 3 19 backlight display 3 20 TALIAN AA AA 2 8 Backspace DEL Key 0 0 0 cece eee 2 4 backup Profile Total Recall AutoRestore a 3 67 Clone to USB 653451642 ha KA LRADLID LG Liha 3 67 creating a 3 64 pO AA R A a 3 67 restoring 0 ee eens 3 66 Upload O AR C jo oom ere een ytd ced cee ees 3 67 VIEWING ee eee eee eens 3 66 backups managing profiles 3 66 Bad Scan Vibrates 0 ccc ee eee 3 54 barcode appending to ce eee 3 53 decodes required 0 0 ccc ee C 9 decoding edge to edge C 9 Decoding symbology predefined presets B 2 displaying type of barcode 3 53 parameters a 3 51 C 1 Security a C 9 Translation tab 0 3 54 barcode reader integrated scanner operation of 2 13 Index Il bar code symbologies color camera 000e eee eeee B 16 B 17 IMAGE nets new ded cda ete Gece NANANA Mmk B 16 battery a 2 1 2 2 Advance
56. backup e Whether to perform a quick format Quick formatting removes all reference to data in the partition without erasing the actual partition The partition will be treated as empty and new data will overwrite it 6 Tap Start The partition is formatted To mount a partition 1 Choose the desired partition 2 Tap the Properties button The Partition Properties dialog appears 3 Tap the Mount button The partition is mounted The asterisk appears next to its name in the partitions list The Partition Properties dialog has buttons for additional functions Partitions can be defragmented and their file structure can be scanned 3 62 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Stylus Properties J NOTE Touchscreen calibration may not be enabled on your unit If your screen appears to require recal ibration contact your supervisor e Inthe Control Panel choose the Stylus icon Stylus Double Tap e 1n the Double Tap menu follow the directions to tailor the sensitivity of the stylus when you tap on the touchscreen Stylus Properties Double Tap Calibration Touch Double tap this grid to set the double tap sensitivity for both the speed and physical distance between taps Double tap this icon to test your double tap settings If this icon doesn t change adjust your settings using the grid above Calibration Touchscreens rarely require recalibration However if your touchscreen has n
57. be as close as possible to the original prede fined preset To change a parameter value e Highlight the custom preset and double tap on the Edit button H Options Image Corrections Exposure Focus White Balance H Windowing To change a setting press space or double click e Tap on the symbols to expand the lists and view the parameter settings e Scroll through the parameter list until you reach the parameter that you want to change e Fora parameter that can take a range of values Highlight the parameter and then press the SPACE key or double click the parameter An associated dialog box containing the valid range of values for the parameter and the current setting like the sample screen following is displayed msec OK Enter value from O to 157 ad msec Type a value in the field provided e Fora parameter that toggles between two values such as on or off and enabled or disabled Highlight the parameter and then press the SPACE key or double click on the parameter Either method toggles between the two available values e When you ve completed your edits tap on OK The parameter list is displayed the new value for the changed parameter is shown e Tapon OK to exit to the preset list and save the changes Removing a Custom Preset e Highlight the custom preset you want to delete and tap on the Remove button A window is displayed warning you that you are about to remove a preset
58. be created and saved to the specified location The unit will then reboot To view profiles and choose restore options refer to Managing Profiles on page 3 66 Creating a Clone Cloning allows you to copy settings or configurations from one computer to another There are two types of clones to choose from a Full Clone and a Settings Only Clone A Full Clone contains all files most of the registry and the settings files AN IMPORTANT The target device for a Full Clone MUST have the same model type and OS build as the source otherwise problems can occur For example if the target device has a newer build of the OS the new build may have a different set of registry keys that may conflict with the source A Settings Only Clone can be copied to a wider array of devices but it should not be used as an autorestore profile Tap on the Create Clone button to begin the process Your Omnii model type and OS will be identified in the cloning statement to ensure that you target devices of the same type Give the clone profile a name and location then tap on Next Total Recall Click Next to create a clone profile of this device for another Psion 7545XC running Windows CE 6 0 Profile Name Profile Location Flash Disk Ea In this menu select All for a Full Clone or Selected Options for a Settings Only Clone If you choose Selected Options a menu will open to enable you to decide which options you want cloned 3 66 Omni
59. exception of the password changes made to settings will take effect only after a warm reset If further changes to the configuration are made they will overwrite the changes caused by the import oper ation After importing a file a dialog will appear to enable you to reset now or later 3 50 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Import Export File a Import settings success Klosk_Settings xmil A device reset is required reset now Mame KioskSettings Type xml Remote Desktop Connection Remote Desktop Connection located in Start gt Programs is an Omnii application used to connect to a Windows Terminal Server so that you can run a session on the Server machine using the Omnii Windows Embedded CE device Go to the following website to find information about setting up this connection http www microsoft com en us download default aspx or contact support services www zebra com support Scanners The Scanners icon in the Control Panel provides dialog boxes in which you can tailor barcode scanner config uration and choose the barcodes your scanner will recognize The parameters are preset with the default settings of the decoded scanner installed in the unit sf NOTE To enable a newly installed scanner press and hold down the FN key and the Power key simultaneously for a minimum of three seconds SNN Scanners You can test the scanner to ensure that it is operating proper
60. followed by a GPRS attach The main Wireless WAN dialog box reflects the progress of the initialization e Searching for modem e Initializing modem e SIM is ready e Searching for network e Registered on network e Searching for GPRS e Ready to connect If the modem loses the connection to the GSM network the following states are repeated Searching for network Registered on network Searching for packet data and Ready to connect Error States The following temporary error states i e these states may disappear without interaction may be displayed e Emergency calls only The modem has found a network but is not allowed to register e g no roaming agreement between net works The modem keeps searching for another network e No network found A network is not currently available The modem continues searching for a network e Packet data not available The current network does not support a packet data service Packet data not allowed The modem is not allowed to use the packet data service on the current network e g no GPRS roaming agreement between network a roaming agreement for voice may still be in place It is also possible that you do not have a subscription for GPRS at all The remaining error states are permanent e SIM is missing The SIM card is missing After the SIM has been inserted a warm boot may be required e SIM failure Wireless Wide Area Network WWAN Settings G 5 The SIM c
61. g n radio PCB substrate patch antenna Covers 2400 2484 MHz lt 2 5 1 VSWR 1 9 dBi 5 dBm typical 6 dBm max 2 400 2 4835 GHz 79 90 dBm typical 70 dBm max V1 2 32 2 kbps and 57 6 kbps asymmetric 433 9 kbps symmetric V2 0 2 amp 3 Mbps TI Wilink6 proprietary WiFi BT co existent scheme RA1202 Narrowband Radio General Specifications Radio Type Dimensions Weight Half duplex data only Radio Module 64 x 53 x 17 mm Radio module 58 grams max FCC Compliance and Approval FCC CFR47 Part 90 and Part 15 Industry Canada RSS 119 ETSI Compliance and Approvals ETSI EN 300 113 Frequency Power RF Antenna Interface RX Sensitivity UHF Band and II 403 435MHz 435 470 MHz 3 2V 4 2V 2 1A typ during transmit U FL connector 50 ohms 90 dBm typical 70 dBm max Power and Data Interface 54 Pin Samtec ASP 176298 02 E 11 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Transmitter Frequencies Channel Spacing Frequency Stability Digital Sensitivity Conducted Radiated Emissions Adjacent Channel Power Digital Protocol Transmitter Intermodulation Attenuation Transmitter Attack Time Transmitter Release Time Receiver Frequencies Channel Spacing Frequency Stability Digital Sensitivity Intermodulation Response Rejection Adjacent Channel Selectivity Spurious Rejection Conducted Spurious Emissions ETSI Co channel Rejection 1 Environmental Specifications
62. gt 60C a non Zebra battery may be installed or the battery may have fallen below the configured Suspend Threshold See Suspend Thresh old and Estimated Battery Backup on page 3 41 for details To switch on the hand held you will need to replace the overheated battery However if you supply AC power to the Omnii with a battery that falls below the configured Suspend Threshold the unit will switch on Switching the Omnii Off e To switch off the Omnii press the FN key and then press and release the Enter Power button The Omnii will automatically enter the Suspend state IMPORTANT IMPORTANT Turning off the hand held does not result in a complete shutdown rather the unit enters a power saving Suspend state When the Omnii is turned on from suspend state oper ation resumes within a few seconds If the word FN is displayed underlined in the taskbar area at the bottom of the screen this key is locked on and the Omnii will not switch off Press the FN key twice followed by Enter Power to switch the Omnii off However if you ve set the mode to Lock see Keyboard One Shot Modes on page 3 30 the Omnii can be turned off even when the FN key is locked on Resetting the Omnii V To perform a warm or cold reset you can access the menu by going to Start gt Shutdown Alternatively you can use the keyboard shortcuts described below NOTE If your Desktop is switched to the Kiosk Shell r
63. in your Omnii desktop go to Control PanelsScanners which opens the Scanner Settings menus In the Ports menu select on for the Power parameter under the COM6 port 4 6 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Figure 4 5 Snap Module Ports ST4000 Charger ST4001 USB ST4005 Serial No ports Micro B port Type A Host USB port Powered DE9M Serial port 5 VDC 500 mA max 9 pin 5VDC 1A max Back of Snap Modules DC IN port 12V 2 5 A Figure 4 6 Snap Module Installation Hand strap slot DC IN port To attach the Snap Module charger to the Omnii e Make sure that the charger connector and the Omnii docking connector are free of dust or any other debris before connecting them e Aslot in the side rail on each side of the hand held accommodates the locking clips of the charger To attach the charger align it with the base of the hand held and gently slide up until the locking clips snap into place Refer to Figure 4 6 Snap Module Installation on page 4 6 e To remove the charger press down on the base of the clip arms to release them from the Omnii side rails and slide the adaptor off Accessories 4 7 e Connect the charger to an AC or DC power source using the appropriate regional plug or cable Then connect the charger DC plug into the Snap Module DC jack You can also attach an ST4001 or ST4005 Snap Module to the Omnii and use the Omnii battery to power USB or serial peripherals for enhanc
64. interface Keep in mind that you must configure the access point and the hand held s to use the same settings Refer to the Active Remote Configuration A R C Administrators Guide PN 8000252 for details about updating devices on your network This manual is available at www ingenuityworking com knowledge w knowledgebase 1189 a r c active remote configuration aspx WiFiConnect Pistol Grips Pistol Grip Standard Pod Kit ST6000 Pistol Grip Standard Back A Kit ST6100 Pistol Grip Standard Back B Kit ST6400 Pistol Grip Freezer Standard Back Kit ST6500 Removing the Trigger Cover Before installing the pistol grip you need to remove the trigger cover Using a flathead screwdriver gently and carefully pry the trigger cover off the hand held 4 2 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Figure 4 1 Removing the Trigger Cover Attaching the Pistol Grip M NOTE Prior to installation make sure the trigger mechanism is securely snapped into the pistol grip body and that the trigger operates properly The pistol grip is attached to the back of the Omnii using the four threaded inserts in the upper part of the Omnii casing see Figure 4 2 Attaching the Pistol Grip on page 4 2 Four M3x6 Phillips head screws are provided e Position the pistol grip so that it fits snugly over the back of the unit and the holes in the pistol grip are aligned with the threaded inserts on the back of the hand held e Using a Phill
65. lol Aa AA AA AA AA 3 13 The Bluetooth GPRS WAN Connection 2 3 14 2 9 1 or AA eee ee ee E een ee 3 17 COND GAGA AKA AASA 3 17 Data Transfer between Omnii and a PC Uu 3 18 Uploading Data in a DOCKING Station a 3 18 USING IVIICFOSOM PACUVG SY NG sensisse iaoe ai ENNA NAGIN eerekebees 3 19 Using Windows Mobile Device Center 22 Xa 3 19 BIO Edo ULA AA AAH 3 19 B KOO sa AA AAO E EA 3 19 PROS AU ANG rete A E O A E O AE otis AEE E OEE E EEE E E 3 20 3121646 eee eee ee ee ee ee ee eee ee 3 20 DI DODU iment tence eee ae enon eee eee nn AA AA en eee ee ee eee eee eas 3 21 TEMAS srg ac seen etn te cesta et arcane E ANN NAPAHARAP APAKAN PARA AP NAPAPA 3 21 Bi AA AA 3 21 MONO MEET paanan NAGNE NAAPI QABALAG ANG GAN ANA AA E ENEE 3 22 SI NING AA 3 23 BON TO FM AA AA AA AA NAA 3 23 GPS Global Positioning System Settings 0 Aa 3 23 POWO AA AA 3 24 ie CA AA AA AA KANA 3 24 loo CA AA 3 25 NG AA 3 25 ODA BEN ANA ANA AA NAA 3 26 imager amp Camera Sengsara e AAO ON 3 26 BO INE AA AE EERE E E E AEE EE EEE 3 27 AG DONG OCICS AA a E a E a 3 28 By ROTO AA 3 29 Keyboard Cl 3 29 Keyboard One Shot Modes 111777777 a 3 30 Keyboard IWMACIO Keys uunawa dama AmNG DA naaa N ANAKAN SAAN NANALO nna Em ONG AAO EEEE PANAON AGA NAAN ANG 3 31 Unicode MAPPING soosse GAGO NN NA O E EE 3 32 Cde Re NaN enn R 3 33 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows
66. on page 2 8 for details Imager and Scanner Options If your Omnii is equipped with an internal imager or scanner please review the relevant sections Appendix B Imager amp Camera Settings and Appendix C Scanner Settings for details Appendix B Imager amp Camera Seitings lists their current model numbers descriptions and specifications Connectivity For information on connecting the Omnii to a PC please refer to Data Transfer between Omnii and a PC on page 3 18 1 8 Omni Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide The Omnii contains an integrated 802 11a b g n radio module The Wi Fi Config application is used to configure the radio for one or more wireless network profiles To configure the radio follow the steps outlined under the heading Wi Fi Config on page 3 76 To configure your Bluetooth settings please go to Bluetooth Setup on page 3 7 If you have a GPS Global Positioning System module you can choose from a set of GPS profiles built into the modem and set up AGPS Assisted Global Positioning System See GPS Global Positioning System Settings on page 3 23 The Omnii is available with one of the following Wireless WAN radio options the Cinterion MC75i EDGE and the Cinterion PH8 P HSPA See Appendix E Omnii Specifications for full specifications With either of these radios and a SIM card you can wirelessly transfer data see Appendix G Wireless Wide Area Network WWAN Settings and you can use
67. ose oes eae sow ecwuy dace ds eees 3 72 Call Management 0 00 eee 3 72 camera specifications a E 2 camera settings 0 ccc cece eee ees 3 26 case carrying 1 a 4 4 Certificates a 3 17 chargers kaawa oe atedede awe NI ANI GANA NDNUN NOYNOY 4 8 desktop docking station 4 9 INGIGAIONS AA AA 4 11 installing at a site 0 eee eee 4 8 operation eee es 4 11 Omni Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide operator controls 0 0 0 c eee eee eee 4 9 safety instructiOnS 0 0 nannan 4 8 Snap Modules 00 00 cee eee eee 4 5 ST4004 operator controls 4 14 ST4004 quad docking station 4 13 troubleshooting eee eee 4 16 Cinterion MC75i GSM GPRS EDGE radio specifications E 5 PH8 P GSM GPRS EDGE UMTS HSPA radio spec fications ee eee E 6 clean start 50 025 acer coms ean LAKAD KAKA sted wie had 1 6 Click Data scanner double click 3 53 Click Time scanner double click 3 53 clone Total Recall 0 0 0 cece eee 3 65 Clone to USB ces 3 67 Codepage a 3 54 Command Prompt a 2 20 communication Ethernet connection quad docking station 4 15 Compass 2 a 3 17 computer hardware properties 3 63 conference calls creat
68. press the scan key or the trigger A scan beam and a warning indicator appear until a successful decode is achieved or six seconds have elapsed Operating Internal Two Dimensional 2D Imagers An imager scanner takes a snap shot of a single barcode or multiple barcodes at one time It can find a barcode regardless of its orientation that is even a barcode printed at a 45 degree angle to the hand held will be decoded successfully 2 16 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide V NOTE When scanning multiple barcodes ensure that all of the desired barcodes are within the field of view of the scanner It is possible that even when all barcodes are within the field of view not all of them will be decoded Only successfully decoded barcodes are passed to the application pro gram The application program then issues a warning asking that you scan the missing barcodes When scanning a single barcode ensure that only the desired barcode is within the field of view of the scanner Because imager scanners generally have a shorter depth of field than laser scanners some practise may be required to find the optimal distance from the types of barcodes being scanned Although the imager includes illumination LEDs ambient light will help the imager decode the barcodes especially if the barcode is far from the hand held IMPORTANT Keep in mind that the imager scanner is a camera and the LED illumination is a flash Glar
69. radios always attach the antenna following the instructions on the AN package before connecting to power Once the antenna is installed e Remove the battery cover insert the battery and replace the battery cover To display the Narrowband screens and the Control Panel e Click on the Narrowband icon in the taskbar frm O roy O err radio txhaxd O err errhdr 1 errbdy O err 7 modech 7 Control Keep in mind that the Narrowband icon is only visible when a Narrowband radio is installed in the unit e Click on the Control Panel icon in the bottom right corner of the Statistics screen to display the additional Narrowband screens J 2 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Basic Tab Narrowband Radio OK Basic Channels eCHi co35 oi RSSI 128 F Starting channel cH 1 7 Radio type 511 Band 450 0 470 0 MHz Channel spacing 12 500 kHz Modulationjbaud 4 level 9600 Firmware ver 1 0 0 4600004 Import Export from oe to XML file XML file CH Channel CH displays the current channel This value may change when a channel is out of range Active channels are assigned in the Channels tab see Channels Tab on page J 3 CQ Channel Quality This option displays the channel quality CQ Channel Quality can be affected by the Channel switch speed set in the Channels tab RSSI Received Signal Strength Indicator RSSI is an indication of the power level being rece
70. scan log file See Scan Log File on page 3 54 when enabled This is useful if a case fails and you are trying to determine why a rule is failing Ports Figure 3 5 Console and Port Replicator Port Settings Scanner Settings OK B8 or Replicator Port A COMS ay Enabled off Baud 9600 3 Data Bits 8 oo Parity None 3 Stop Bits 1 Trigger On Sequence 00 Of Trigger Off Sequence 00 0077 El Port Replicator Port B COME Enabled on Power off at To change 4 setting press space or double click While you cannot configure the scanner you can configure communications with a serial decoded scanner using the options in this tab Configuration 3 57 Use these settings to ensure that the communication ports on the Omnii match the settings of the serial devices to which they are connected If the settings do not match exactly the devices may not function Note that some devices can auto detect serial port settings such as baud rate and in this case the Omnii will dictate the settings Baud rates often have a direct impact on performance they should be set as high as possible while still ensuring reliable communication Port Replicator Port A COM5 and Port B COM6 Port Replicator Port A COM5 and Port B COM6 are standard RS 232 DE 9 DTE ports on the Omnii port replicator module available on some snap modules and cradle types Enabled This parameter must be set to ON in order for the Omnii to reco
71. shortcuts from your Windows gt Start Menu Tapping once will open the program If you tap and hold on an icon the application name is displayed Notifications Bar This bar shows the run time program notifications for Battery Volume Wi Fi Phone or GPRS and other notifi cations for the programs you are running This feature replaces the Taskbar of the Windows Classic Shell Desktop Minimized View When an application is opened and maximized the desktop view is minimized and the Notifications Bar is shown at the bottom of the screen Tapping anywhere on the Notifications Bar except on the SIP will restore the Kiosk desktop J NOTE In order to use the SIP turn on the automatic settings in Control Panel gt Input Panel Kiosk Access The Kiosk Access program allows you to open a different program Kiosk which enables you to customize your computer settings remove or add shortcuts to the Favourites Bar and Control Panel and limit access to various different components on the computer and the system tray icons for security For details see Kiosk Access on page 3 44 To change your Desktop background refer to Shell Settings on page 3 46 To open Kiosk e Tap on the Kiosk Access icon in the Favourites Bar Restoring the Windows Classic Shell The default Desktop appearance and actions can be restored by tapping on the Kiosk Shell icon in the Favourites Bar V Getting To Know Your Omnii 2 27 Figure 2 10 Shell Switch t
72. status is unknown or the modem is not connected to any network the signal strength is 0 The modem has found a network and the signal strength is between 1 and 20 The modem has found a network and the signal strength is between 21 and 40 The modem has found a network and the signal strength is between 41 and 60 The modem has found a network and the signal strength is between 61 and 80 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide The modem has found a network and the signal strength is between 81 and 100 Once the modem detects that a packet data service is available a letter is added to the signal strength icon indicating the kind of packet data service Keep in mind that the signal strength icon is displayed without a letter if packet data service is not available or if it is available but not yet initialized For example G The modem has found a network the signal strength is between 41 and 60 and GSM GPRS packet ill service is available The signal strength icon is replaced by a connection indicator icon when a packet data connection is started G fi A GPRS packet data connection is active In addition to the signal strength or connection indicator a second icon may be shown 4 A new SMS Short Message Service message has arrived Ca The dialer icon is displayed when the Voice option is available SIM card and GPRS radio are installed When you have an active call this icon flashes
73. task manager window Getting To Know Your Omnii e Tap on Shortcuts gt Task Manager or e Press ALT ESC Task Manager Active Tasks Bluetooth Manager calendar Psion Teklogix Inc Home Interne Switch To End Task Settings The Settings sub menu includes the following settings Control Panel Network and Dial up Connections and Taskbar and Start Menu Figure 2 8 Settings Sub Menu My Device My WiriConnect Documents J y Recycle Bin FartneriJp Control Panel The Control Panel contains applets used to configure hardware the operating system and the shell If your Omnii is running with the TekTerm application or another application additional configuration applets may appear in the Control Panel Network and Dial Up Connections The Network and Dial up Connections window allows you to configure the Omnii network interfaces or execute an existing configuration Refer to Connectivity on page 1 7 for radio setup details Taskbar and Start Menu The Taskbar and Start Menu option displays a dialog box in which you can customize the taskbar choosing which options will be displayed Refer to Customizing the Taskbar on page 2 19 for additional details about this option 2 24 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Choosing the Run option from the Start Menu displays a dialog box in which you can enter the name of the program folder or document you want to open or launch Type the nam
74. the preset is activated you can enable or disable the barcodes the imager will read e Highlight My Default in the Barcoding tab e Double tap on the Edit button None of the other barcode decoding predefined presets are changed Symbology Settings sf NOTE For descriptions of the barcode symbologies review Barcode Symbologies on page B 15 B 12 Omni Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Filter Menu Manipulating Barcode Data To configure rules for manipulating barcode data e Tap on Start gt Settings gt Control Panel e Tap on the Imagers icon and then tap on the Filter tab Imager amp Camera Settings Ok Imaging Barcoding Filter Translat 4 Field Size Prete Sufix and Strip Chars dg ode 39 H Trioptic Code Hl Code 128 H EAN 13 H EAN 8 H UPC A UPC E H Code 93 Codabar H MSI Code 11 gt To change a Setting press space or double click Modifying a Barcode Setting The rules for manipulating data from selected barcode symbologies can be modified To change the settings for a symbology e Tap on the symbols to expand the lists and view the parameter settings e Scroll through the parameter list until you reach the parameter that you want to change e Fora parameter that can take a range of values Highlight the parameter and then press the SPACE key or double click the parameter An associated dialog box containing the valid range of values for the paramet
75. this check box is disabled Inbox Tapping on the nbox button opens the list of received messages Reading 50 messages for example from the SIM can take about 30 seconds By default the list of messages is sorted with the most recently received message first The list can be sorted by any other column by clicking on the corresponding column heading Clicking the same column heading twice reverses the sort order Tapping on any letter or digit moves the high light to the next message whose address begins with that letter or number G 14 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide vV NOTE The date and time formats can be changed through the Region and Language menu in Control Panel For a new date or time format to take effect the Inbox has to be closed and re opened The Open button opens the selected message in a new window such that the entire message can be read including the original formatting line breaks are replaced by spaces in the Inbox message list Pressing the Reply button opens the new message dialog as described above except the destination phone number is filled in already Outbox Tapping on the Outbox button opens the list of sent messages Otherwise the Outbox behaves exactly as the Inbox described above The date and time when a message was sent is not available for GSM modems SMS Configuration Tapping on the SMS Configuration button opens the SMS configuration dialog The SMS Centre address foll
76. to RAM we recommend keeping the Suspend Threshold setting as low as possible to maximize battery run time The Estimated Battery Backup is the amount of battery power that has been reserved or set aside to protect data until a charged battery can be installed in the hand held When the battery capacity is depleted up to the Estimated Battery Backup reserve specified in the Suspend Threshold menu the Omnii shuts off automatically and uses the reserve power to preserve the data stored on the computer Once the Omnii shuts down it cannot be switched on until a fresh battery is installed or the unit is inserted in a docking station or cradle 3 42 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide e Slide the Suspend Threshold button to the right to increase the battery capacity reserved for backup pur poses Data will be preserved to a maximum of 124 hours e Slide the Suspend Threshold button to the left to decrease the power reserved for backup purposes this increases the Omnii operating time the amount of time the unit will operate before shutting down but reduces the power reserved for backup purposes to a minimum of 24 hours Internal super capacitors will protect the data stored in the computer while the battery is swapped for a fully charged one AN IMPORTANT Once the battery is removed the super capacitors will preserve the data stored on the Omnii for approximately 4 minutes It is critical that you install a charged b
77. to replace the overheated battery However if you supply AC power to the Omnii with a battery that falls below the configured Suspend Threshold the unit will switch on Charging the Battery Batteries shipped from the factory are charged to approximately 40 of capacity Lithium ion battery packs must be fully charged before use These batteries can be charged with a variety of chargers and docking stations For detailed information on these accessories please see Chapter 4 Accessories Normally it takes 3 to 4 hours to charge a battery The Omnii intelligent charging system protects the battery from over charging by terminating the charge process when the battery is at maximum capacity Charge Completed During Sleep Mode While Operating AN IMPORTANT To avoid damaging the battery chargers will not begin the charge process until the battery temperature is between 0 C to 40 C 32 F to 104 F The Keyboard The Omnii offers a wide variety of Alpha and Numeric keyboard layouts See http www zebra com US EN Product Lines Psion WT mc_id psion_us_p_handheld for a list of avail able configurations Most of the keys on these keyboards operate much like a desktop computer Where a key or key function is not consistent with the PC keyboard those differences are described in the following sections The Omnii is equipped with either an Enter Power key or Power button 55 and 66 key keyboards only that allows you to switch
78. using the PS1350 15 90 VDC pre regulator or for freezer applications the PS1370 pre regulator Figure 4 21 Connecting ST1002 to vehicle power and communications in a typical setup Omnii MT3325 h Arm Ball Kit o R ST1002 MT3502 Circular Plate CA3001 Cable CA3002 Vehicle Power Outlet CLA Adaptor USB and Serial access Note The serial port is 5 VDC 1 A maximum power out and is defaulted to off To enable power to this port in your Omnii desktop go to Control Panel gt Scanners which opens J NOTE For the CA3002 Vehicle Power Outlet CLA Adaptor replace with same fuse type and rating Battery Charger 6 Slot Model ST3006 The ST3006 is designed to charge up to six Omnii lithium ion batteries at one time Accessories 4 23 AN IMPORTANT The battery charger is shipped with its own quick start guide ST3006 6 Slot Battery Charger Quick Start Guide PN 8000204 It is critical that it be reviewed for additional information and updates AN IMPORTANT When ordering a charger you must also order an IEC 320 IEC 60320 C13 power cord separately Figure 4 22 S13006 Battery Charger Charging bay 6 Charger indicator LEDs 4 per bay BOTTOM Rubber feet 5 DC IN connector Drain holes 6 Bracket mounting holes 2 Installation The charger can be wall mounted using the wall mount kit MT2031 or it can be operated on a flat surface Install the charger in an area that is fr
79. with Windows CE 6 0 User Manual Appendix D Internal Imager amp Scanner Specifications lists the specifications for the Omnii scanners and imagers Appendix E Omnii Specifications lists the specifications for your Omnii computer radios and battery Appendix F Omnii XT15f Freezer Variants describes the hardware and heating software of the freezer units Appendix G Wireless Wide Area Network WWAN Settings describes WWAN configuration information Appendix H Wireless Zero Config Settings outlines the steps used to configure your radio using Windows Zero Contig Appendix I Omnii XT15ni Non Incendive Safety Guidelines lists the approvals important warnings and cautions for the Omnii XT 15ni non incendive Hand held Computer Appendix J Narrowband Radio Configuration describes setting up the RA1202 Narrowband radio Text Conventions J NOTE Notes highlight additional helpful information AN IMPORTANT These statements provide particularly important instructions or addi tional information that is critical to the operation of the equipment A WARNING These statements provide critical information that may prevent physical injury equipment damage or data loss Overview of the Omnii Hand Held Computer The Omnii Hand Held Computer is a modular industrial hand held computer A variety of options are available to suit applications in courier delivery field service manufacturing facilities material handling appl
80. you want the hand held to emit a sound Sound Adjustments Volume amp Sounds Properties K Close Program Critical Stop E Default Sound Empty Recycle Bin NG Exclamation Sound Previews p ir Scheme This dialog box allows you to assign sounds to identify particular actions For example you can choose the sound your hand held will emit when you close a program and choose another sound for a failed scan etc Wi Fi Config The Wi Fi Config application is used to configure the Omnii 802 11a b g n radio for one or more wireless network profiles A network profile contains settings for SSID Service Set Identifier and security options J NOTE In most situations the configuration of your 802 11 radio will require parameter setting and access keys from a network administrator Configuration 3 77 To launch the Wi Fi Config application e Tap on Start gt Programs gt Wi Fi Config r E EJ i My Device Pala Fi Connect Documents J w Recycle Bin PartnerUp a Hi Demo Desk Des BE command Prompt fae Proc Internet Explorer Wi Fi Contig a Windows Explorer The Wi Fi Config screen is displayed Wi Fi Config Status The Status tab displays information about the wireless network to which the Omnii is configured to connect When there are no network profiles configured this tab is not populated Data Rate 54 bis RSSI 7 FP Status COMPLETED o 55ID
81. 0 0 cee eee nes B 2 Index VI Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Preset imaging software Custom 0 cc a B 1 Eeli e nk AKA an one NN beeen ade dea B 1 Predefined a B 1 Preset Group Default identifier imaging software B 2 Profile restoring backup 0 0 00 eee eee ee 3 66 viewing backup 00 cece eee 3 66 Programs Command Prompt 00000 eee eee 2 20 Internet Explorer a 2 20 Remote Desktop Connection 2 20 Windows Explorer aa 2 20 protective CASE ke eee ees 4 4 punctuation marks accessing SHIFT Key 2 3 2 4 0 QUICK DEMOS PAA F 6 Quick Defrost heater settings F 7 Quick Defrost Settings Quick Defrost 0 0 0 cc cece eee F 7 R radio 802 11 signal quality 2 11 Bluetooth 0 0 cee eee 3 7 3 17 specifications S02 MAa DIGIN kerri resanni ene sae mha E 8 PIUCGIOOIN v 25 lt ccceee veka bakahan BANA Ha bm E 10 Cinterion PH8 P GSM GPRS EDGE UMTS HSPA radio E 6 MC75i GSM GPRS EDGE E 5 WWAN signal quality la 2 11 recalibrating touchscreen 2 8 3 62 Registry Editor c5aawaZa Ra NA seddes NIYAN GI NG 3 68 Advanced Interface and Network 3 69 Remote Desktop Connection 2 20 3 50 Repeat Delay between key repeats
82. 02 battery not used with narrowband radio configuration and pistol grip Barcode Scanner Options J NOTE Both Arctic and Freezer variants include a heated scan window for Frost Free Scanning FFS e SE965HP 1D standard range laser e SE1524 ER 1D extended range laser e SE4600LR 2D Long Range Imager Display e 3 7 VGA 640 x 480 Transflective Color Touch Display Omnii XT15f Freezer Variants F 3 Chiller Variant Extreme Duty designed for rugged environments with improved impact resistance 1 25 Joule impact better abrasion resistance superior low temperature operation to 20 C 4 F with 160 cd m2 brightness Arctic Variant Extreme Duty is designed for rugged environments with improved impact resistance 1 25 Joule impact better abrasion resistance superior low temperature operation to 30 C 22 F with 160 cd m2 brightness The optically bonded display module prevents the build up of condensation fogging in between the display and the touchscreen The display heater is responsible for maintaining a acceptable refresh rate in extreme cold environments Keyboard Both variants include specially designed keyboards that resist freezing due to ice build up in condensing environments 58 key full alphanumeric with 6 single push Function keys 34 key numeric with 12 single push Function keys Power Management Chiller Battery Pack 5000 mAh high capacity Lithium ion For battery specifications see L
83. 1 77 in At grip area 31 mm 1 22 in e Weight Basic unit with battery 610g 1 34 Ib With battery high visibility display camera Push To Talk speaker EV15 1D imager 636g 1 40 Ib Processor and Memory Texas Instruments Sitara AM37xx ARM Processor 800 MHz OMAP3 compatible e RAM 512 MB e Flash ROM 1 GB Operating System e Microsoft Windows Embedded CE 6 0 User Interface e Colour Touch Display 9 4 cm 3 7 in diagonal E 2 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide VGA 640 x 480 Transflective High Visibility option superior sunlight visibility with 165 cd m2 brightness Extreme Duty option withstands 1 25 Joule impact superior low temperature operation to 20 C 4 F with 160 cd m2 brightness Better abrasion resistance Keyboards High reliability keypad ultra white backlight Large selection of both alpha and numeric formats See http www motorlolasolutions com US EN Product Lines Psion WT mc_id psion_us_p_handheld for a list of available configurations Indicators and Controls Four multi colour LEDs indicate the status of the battery application radio and scanner Side Buttons Volume Scan Enter Vertical Scroll Voice Audio amp Feedback High volume beeper 95 dBA Integrated Microphone and speaker Optional Push to Talk speaker Walkie talkie style Push to Talk VoIP over Wi Fi or WWAN Vibration feedback Power Management Battery Pack 5000 mAh h
84. 1a b g n radio attempts to connect to the network Once the association is complete the Status tab is populated with the appropriate information about your network Wi Fi Config OK Status Configure Advanced Channel M Disable Radio Data Rate 54 Mbs RSSI E BEERS Status COMPLETED SSID Production an TO Auth NONE oO Encrypt pwera MAC bo 13 e0 9d ef 55 IP fioize7i5 3 82 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Configuring TCP IP If your network is not using a DHCP server you will need to assign an IP address IP Address To assign an P address for your Omnii e Tap on the radio icon in the taskbar gar El CB hy WiFi Connect Documents J y Recycle Bin PartnerUp 5 A Internet Explorer Microsoft Remote WordPad Desktop Or Tap on Start gt Settings gt Network and Dial up Connections Tap on the radio icon for which you want to assign an IP address in the sample screen below the icon is labelled SD 086861 Make New AMBG7721 NGD EEES Connection Configuration 3 83 The Wireless Statistics screen is displayed e Tap on the IP Information tab Figure 3 7 SD O86861 IP Information SDID86861 OK IP Information Py6 Information 44 gt Internet Protocol TCP IP Address Type DHCP IP address 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Default Gateway J NOTE When DHCP is enabled tapping the Renew button forces the Omnii to renew o
85. 301 Screen Blanking version ensure that the screen blanking wires clearly labelled and the power wires red black leads are reliably secured away from each other or are separated with reliably secured certified insulation A minimum 2 8mm dis tance or 0 4mm distance through insulation is required for the separation The red lead of the power cable attaches to the positive vehicle supply The black lead connects to the nega tive supply this should be connected to a proper terminal block and not to the vehicle body 4 22 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide You may have the option of connecting power before or after the key switch It is preferable to wire the power cradle after the key switch that is it cannot be turned on without the key on However if the operator switches the key off repeatedly for long periods during a shift it may make more sense to wire the cradle before the switch Keep in mind that the Omnii will continue to operate with or without vehicle power as long as its battery has sufficient charge If an unfused power source must be used a fuse assembly PN 19440 300 must be added to the extension power cable the fuse and instructions are supplied with the cable Use only a 4A fast blow UL approved fuse in the fuse assembly PN 9016622 A WARNING 11 5 30 Vdc input only suitable for road vehicles A pre regulator is required for use on forklifts For such installations Zebra recommends
86. 70 3 71 picker cradle installing cable 4 20 DINOU AA AAP A 1 pistol grip installing a 4 1 pocket PC compatibility 006 3 39 port pinouts a A 1 Port Replicator settings COM5 and COM6 Baud 2 a 3 57 BEER CAP AAP Bee ad 3 57 Parity a 3 57 Port B COM6 Power 0 0a 3 57 Stop Bits eens 3 57 Trigger On Sequence 3 58 ports parameters eee 3 56 Postal Predefined preset 0 0 0 cece eee B 2 Power Sipi at cpas teens PPT 2 3 Properties 0 0 a 3 40 EaU e 5threned te Chee Cd TE EE NADA eeuee ns 3 40 to Port B COM6 0 0 0 0 0008 3 57 Power Management Properties Advanced 0 ce eee nes 3 42 battery capacity 0 0 0 cc eee eee 3 40 Battery Health 0 0 0 cece eee 3 43 Built in Devices a 3 42 suspend power saving 3 40 Suspend Threshold 0 0000s 3 41 Power Mode Decoded Internal Scanner C 4 Predefined preset 0 cece eee eee B 1 AN AA B 2 Glossy SUITACE aa nana ose deed aves eas wk ene B 3 imaging software 0 cece eee B 2 LIC Al AA ATE B 2 Linear and PDF 0 0 ccc cee eee B 2 LOW NCA AA AA AA AA B 3 Low light near 0 0 a B 3 LOW power 0 0 cece eee ees B 3 Matrix cee eee nes B 2 ile le PP wees eee B 3 Postal 2
87. Advanced The Advanced menu lists the system features you can restrict or block Restrictions OK Advanced Notifications Select the system feature to block or prevent Restrictions eee Prevent External Autorun Apps Prevent Activesync ft Prevent Autorun Apps Prevents launching Autorun applications from a storage card Notifications The Notifications menu allows you to block or disable notifications Restrictions Select the Start Menu Bar or popup notification to be blocked or disabled eet Dock Tether Manager C Low Battery Block the device connected notification from the Docking Tether Port Manager Control Panel Settings In these menus you can set which applets and tabs you want to Hide in Control Panel and which applets and tabs will be Accessible as a shortcut icon from the Desktop Configuration 3 49 e You have the option of setting the entire applet or specific tabs within the applet as hidden or accessible Any applet that can t be set is greyed out Control Panel Settings OK x Hide Accessible Unchecked control panels will be hidden from the Settings screen Control Panel Settings eet App Launch Keys Bluetooth Certificates Date Time Dialing Display Dr Debug Error Reporting Input Panel Internet Options Keyboard JSISISIEISIBIESISIEIE Control Panel Settings Hide Accessible Select control panels to be accessible from the Desktop
88. CE 6 0 User Guide Kole EG ANG en ee AA ee ee ee ee 3 35 Kanade IG OCS AA 3 36 Tngger Mappings AA NEE E EEEN SENE REEE 3 36 Add and Edit Trigger Mapping ccccccccccsseeeeecsceceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeseeeeeeseeeeeesseeeeessaaeeeesseaeeeeseaeeeseesaes 3 37 MICFODMONE zapaanaaa nm NAA PAUNANG ANA AG EE EAEE EEEE r aGasO 3 38 Tek len CENA NENA NGA NANANA DADAANAN 3 39 FAT UMS FC ANAN AA ANAN ce vdaray E EE 3 39 Pocket PC COMPAD AA AA pacdterstwanisuadcewednensedeneesetewetes 3 39 eg 1 al al 912 fo 3 aaa AGA ne E EE ee eee 3 40 Baton APC IY AN 3 40 Power SAVINGS NSDENG naaa aaa Aa 3 40 Suspend Threshold and Estimated Battery Backup 2 XXX aaa 3 41 ANAN a AA AA AA AA 3 42 BUA OMICS AA AA AA AA AA 3 42 BALO FO AA 3 43 KOSK ACCO mGA GA GAAN AA AG 3 44 Administrator TASS WONG waa eaea E AA NA ANA AGA 3 45 SAES E UN Soe E E Gasset 3 46 KESHCHONS aaa AN A E EEE AA OER 3 48 Control Panel Seting S aata nn RE Aena E AA ROA GA AA aNG 3 48 APOE XO O FIE n AYANG E E E E AA 3 49 Remote Desktop COnNECUON mamam NA AGA YAN NA ANAN 3 50 CAMS AA 3 50 A COS AA APA PA 3 51 EENT ger acetate revere peor she E EE EA EAA tene P E wines 3 51 Restoring Default Settings Lama vovmeawersk bonadditases cseciraaamneaviwdscanenseenarweaies 3 51 ODIOS GANAN ne eee ee eee 3 52 Double Click Parameters aaa AA AA AA 3 53 Display Parameters 2 3 53 pA Hanan AA ecu sioaeaase exces s aseegen secs sissedeo suas Saeseosenseae
89. Card There are two slots available in the battery compartment the lower slot is provided for a microSD Secure Digital card which provides additional non volatile memory to your Omnii and the upper slot is for a SIM Subscriber Identity Module card which allows access to the Voice option access to the Internet and so on microSD Card Slot SD Cover SIM Card Slot Inserting the Cards e Switch off the power to the Omnii e Remove the battery Getting To Know Your Omnii 2 13 e Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the SD cover screw Flip the cover open or remove it For a microSD card e Slide the microSD card door to the left to unlock it Flip it open e Slide the microSD card into the guides on the SD card door e Close the microSD card door and slide it to the right to lock it For a SIM card e Slide the SIM card metal door latch to the right to unlock it then flip the door open e Slide the card into the guides on the SIM card door e Swing the hinged door back down into place and slide the metal door latch to the left to lock it Scanners and Imagers AN IMPORTANT Itis critical that you review the Laser Warnings in the Omnii Hand Held Computer Regu latory amp Warranty Guide PN 8000191 before using any of the scanners described in this chapter For detailed scanner specifications and decode zone tables refer to Appendix D Internal Imager amp Scanner Specifications J NOTE To enabl
90. Computer Regulatory amp Warranty Guide PN 8000191 Battery Swap Time Assuming the default power saving parameters and battery reserve level have not been altered battery swap time is a minimum of 4 minutes you will not lose data if the battery is replaced within this time frame To protect data the safest place to store data is on a microSD memory card or externally to the device on a USB memory stick or on a PC You can also save data in the Flash Disk partition of the file system Refer to for details about reserving battery power for data backup purposes The Suspend Threshold adjustment in the Power Properties tab allows you to determine the battery capacity at which the Omnii will be shut down If left at the default value Maximum Operating Time the unit will run until 2 2 Omni Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide the battery is completely empty the RAM is only backed up for a short period of time If you choose Maximum Backup Time the Omnii shuts off with more energy left in the battery so RAM can be backed up for a longer period of time AN IMPORTANT If your Omnii fails to power up consider the following troubleshooting options The battery may be overheated gt 60C a non Zebra battery may be installed or the battery may have fallen below the configured Suspend Threshold See Suspend Thresh old and Estimated Battery Backup on page 3 41 for details To switch on the hand held you will need
91. D Stays Off When the Omnii is docked in a powered ST4004 and the hand held s charge indicator LED stays off there may be a problem with the Omnii or with the docking station Make sure a battery is installed in the Omnii otherwise use an Omnii with a properly functioning charge indicator to isolate the problem Power LED Does Not Light Up e Remove all Omnii units and unplug the docking station e Connect another device to the mains outlet to ensure there is power e Remove the IEC mains power cable from the charger and check it for damage e Reconnect the mains cable in the charger and mains outlet The Omnii Charge LED Flashes Yellow A flashing yellow Omnii charge LED the left most LED on the hand held indicates that the battery is not within the allowable charging temperature range 0 C and 40 C 32 F to 104 F Allow the battery to come to an acceptable range before reinserting the Omnii in the docking station The Omnii Charge Indicator LED is Red If the Omnii charge indicator is red when the Omnii is in any of the four bays the quad dock cannot read the battery is in charging timeout or it is not a Zebra battery e Remove the computers and disconnect the adaptor DC power cable e Wait at least 20 seconds and then plug the cable in again e If the Omnii indicator still shows a fault the Omnii requires service Powered Adaptor LED Stays Off e Check the AC cable Replace with the same type if the cable
92. DC power plug on the Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor into the DC IN port on the Snap Module 4 8 V Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide e Insert the Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor plug into automotive power outlet in your vehicle NOTE Battery charging continues whether the hand held is switched on or off Chargers and Docking Stations General Information Important Charger Safety Instructions A IMPORTANT Before charging a battery with a desktop docking station it is critical that you review the safety guidelines in the Omnii Hand Held Computer Regulatory amp Warranty Guide PN 8000191 and the Omnii Hand Held Accessories Regulatory amp Warranty Guide PN 8000205 Charging the Battery A The Omnii Hand Held Computer operates with lithium ion battery pack Model ST3003 Preparing the unit for operation requires that the battery pack be charged and installed in the hand held Batteries shipped from the factory are charged to approximately 40 of capacity Lithium ion battery packs must be fully charged before use These batteries can be charged with a variety of chargers and docking stations Currently the following are available e The Snap Module is a mobile adaptor for the Omnii Three models are available see Snap Modules on page 4 5 e The AC Wall Adaptor operates as an AC power source and also charges the battery installed in the unit see AC Wall Adaptor Models ST1050 and ST1050 AR on page
93. ED is red with a battery installed 2 2 2 XXXX Aa 4 12 Spare battery LED does not turn on when a battery is installed 4 12 Quad Docking Station Model No ST4004 aa 4 13 Dorr COMM OS maa NALNG E AAO AN NANANA AGO 4 14 PEGG eL AA EE EE AEE E E hee weeeeteandeaseaeanecunss 4 14 Quad Docking Station Operation Aa 4 14 Charging the Omnii Battery ccc ccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeee cece eeseeeseeeeseeeesaeetsneeseeetsneesaees 4 14 ASEAN 4 15 Connecting to the Ethernet Network a 4 15 Gl aning TASS 1A OO AA AA sqiandeteuddeencandstaasdegcessesenke 4 16 TOTS ST OMI AAAH duaeaceaeasssuouesuaencsesmesee 4 16 The Omnii Charge Indicator LED Stays Off 2 X a 4 16 Power LED Does Not Light Up cece a 4 16 The Omnii Charge LED Flashes Yellow cccccecccssceceeceeececeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeseeeeseeees 4 16 The Omnii Charge Indicator LED is Red 2 2 X a 4 16 Powered Adaptor LED Stays Of a 4 16 Vehicle Cradles Models ST1000 and ST1002 a 4 16 Vehicle Cradle Mounting Recommendations 0 Aa 4 17 Insertion and Removal of Omnii a 4 19 Maintaining the Vehicle Cradle 00 2 2 2 QX a 4 20 ST1002 Powered Cradle Installation Aa 4 20 VV IPI GUICG IIM
94. ID readers are triggered You can configure the trigger ID for each trigger button for both single and double click and the double click time e Inthe Control Panel choose the Manage Triggers icon e Manage Triggers e Inthe Manage Triggers screen you ll see a list of trigger mappings Manage Triggers Module Decoded Scann UpfOown Decoded 5cann o UpiDown Decoded Scann Uga Down Decoded Scann Soft Scan Up Down Decoded Scann al Cr Double click 0 1000 msec f C Show all modules Trigger Mappings A trigger mapping is an association between a particular key on the keyboard and a driver or application the module s sometimes referred to as trigger consumer s of the trigger source Along with keyboard keys the external trigger scan button is software based When the specified key is pressed the owner for example a decoded scanner is sent a message Configuration 3 37 A IMPORTANT Itis not possible to have two or more identical mappings for example F 1 cannot be mapped to the Non Decoded Scanner twice even if the trigger type is different A keyboard key that is used as a trigger source will no longer generate key data or perform its normal function For example if the space button is used as a trigger source it will not be able to send space characters to applications Double Click When a key is pressed and released then pressed again within the configured time between 0 to
95. Insertion and Removal of Omni If your Omnii is equipped with a cover or the ST6025 Double Loop Hand strap these accessories need to be removed before installing the unit in a vehicle cradle There is no need to remove other hand straps or pistol grips from the unit e Slide the Omnii into the cradle and press firmly downward until it locks into place On a vehicle it s a good idea to pull up on the Omnii to be certain that it is secure e To remove the Omnii press the release button on the front of the cradle until it releases Figure 4 19 Inserting Omnii into the vehicle cradle Release button 4 20 Omni Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Maintaining the Vehicle Cradle Two latches in the cradle hold the Omnii firmly in place Although these latches are designed for at least 100 000 insertion and removal cycles they will wear over time and will no longer lock the Omnii securely in the cradle For replacement parts and instructions contact Zebra Partial disassembly is required ST1002 Powered Cradle Installation A The ST1002 cradle is designed to allow the Omnii to be powered by a vehicle battery The battery installed in the Omnii is also recharged by the vehicle battery This option accepts DC power sources over the range 11 5V to 30V Voltages above that require the use of the preregulator Model No PS1350 WARNING Applying a voltage greater than that specified or reversing polarity may result in perm
96. Internal Imager 4 Scanner Specifications D 15 SE4600LR Decode Zones in om Note Typical performance at 73 4 F 23 C on high quality symbols 6 82 UE 4 102 2 61 5 8 4 Wz 8 152 m g 10 20 30 40 pi m g 254 50 8 762 101 6 1270 Depth of Field Notes Bar code width 10 9 in 49 in depth of field Total readable bar code width is 2x the width appearing at the top or bottom of the Width of Field scale in om Vi Note Typical performance at 73 4 F 23 C Ol p on high quality symbols t NO 610 h iz M5 o ol i z 5 F M 610 ja Apa i ss 914 ze 55 mel Data zizin Ine UU d evel Cooke 19 jim ae ii md Comte Fi oe eee Ph eval eters Cone 19 isa 100 al Code FA NG ml Code JF Gt mk OO OO ee Mm Di 5 150 235 3x 375 km Gi T90 351 0 511 5 62O bra Pala Depth of Field Near range determined by degree of reflectivity and width of bar code Notes Bar code width 72 8 in 360 in depth of field Total readable bar code width is 2x the width appearing at the top or bottom of the Width of Field scale The Omnii Hand Held Computer Model 7545 J NOTE For Omnii freezer unit hardware specifications please go to J NOTE Performance specifications are nominal and subject to change without notice Hardware Physical Dimensions e Width At display 100 mm 3 94 in At docking connector 45 mm 1 77 in e Depth At display 44 mm 1 73 in At docking connector 45 mm
97. Label MODEL No 7545 About This Guide XVII Omni Features Figure 1 1 Front View of the Omnii XT15 Model with Alohanumeric Keyboard Speaker LEDs Beeper Display Scan Key Microphone SYM Key FN Modifier Key Enter Power Key J NOTE The Omnii 55 and 66 key keyboards are equipped with a Power button as shown in 1 2 Omni Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Figure 1 2 Side Views of the Omnii XT15 Right Side Left Side Volume rocker button Vertical scroll button Scan button Enter button Battery release button Side rail Slot for Snap Module arm Figure 1 3 Bottom View 1 Docking Connector 2 Alignment Pin Holes 3 M2 5 Locking Screws for firmly attaching devices 4 4 Hand Strap Slot Basic Operation 1 3 Figure 1 4 Top View Laser Aperture End Cap Figure 1 5 Back View Camera Aperture Rear PTT Speaker Scanner Window optional Scanner Pod Expansion Back Pistol Grip Attachment Screws 4 Battery Pack Omnii Modules Available To see a current list of Omnii accessories and modules please go to the website at http www motorlolasolutions com US EN Product Lines Psion WT mc_id psion_us_p_handheld Documents Available To see a current list of documents and download what you need please go to the Knowledge Base on the IngenuityWorking community website http www ingenuityworking com knowledge w knowledgebase product man
98. NA NA GAAN AA ANNE GANA 1 6 Performing a Clean Stan awan aan ANAN An GA 1 6 31018 i 0 DOO SA ee ee ee ee eee eee 1 6 Penomnga real WRC SG k cnisia a ae i a a a Eii 1 7 Attaching Carrying Accessories 2 cess eeseeesseeesaeessneesseeesaeeeseeseesetaes 1 7 Calibrating the Touchscreen cscesccctecigndattoscntenerpiensevexcbacsesecactanunsesiuntestewau ler genawagerostacenaeseercabaetsieteoes 1 7 Imager and Scanner Qptions cess eeseeeseeeeseeesneesseeeseeessneessesesaes 1 7 OS OAINS CO acd stesiceieetereacetercesa 1 7 Bata NE LA AA 1 8 VOICES COMMIMUNI CANON AA 1 8 Chapter 2 Getting To Know Your Omnii Operating System AA AAP renne 2 1 BUS Ty e A E O AA AA AA 2 1 BaNG o e a E EE A E E E tesaneeannnen 2 1 Batey VAY MO perine UND A E EE 2 1 Charging he 21211 AA AA AA E eee 2 2 MRS TC CA AAP 2 2 Omni Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide REGUIAL E OY ee ne ne AGA eee eee 2 3 NOG CA AA 2 4 Activating Modifier Keys a 2 5 Kore date Bie el MS CA AA 2 5 Function Keys and Macro Keys cccccssececcsseeccceseeecceuacecceaseeceeseeeceeaseeessaseesesausessssuseesssageers 2 6 dail pi CA AA AA AN 2 6 ME eek AA AA 2 6 Numeric Keyboards Accessing Alpha Keys a 2 7 TS TRC Y Dai AC MOM AA AA AP 2 8 METS TNS ON A EE een eee ae og pentose cise ae E E E E 2 8 Adjusting the Display Backlight XXXX a 2 8 Calibra
99. NING WARNING WARNING WARNING WARNING This mark indicates that the user should read all included documentation before use Ce marquage indique que l usager doit avant l utilisation lire toute la documentation incluse Explosion Hazard Substitution of components may impair suitability for Class I Division 2 locations This unit has NO OPERATOR REPLACEABLE PARTS other than the battery pack Dis assembly assembly of the Omnii XT15ni must be performed by trained Zebra service personnel at a Zebra service depot No unauthorized substitution of parts is allowed for the Omnii XT15ni hand held Use ONLY the Zebra Model ST3003 NI battery pack in the Omnii XT15ni No substitu tions are permitted without authorization from Zebra personnel DO NOT CHARGE OR CHANGE BATTERIES in an area that is known to be hazardous Replace batteries in an area known to be non hazardous l 2 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide A WARNING A WARNING A WARNING WARNING WARNING EXPLOSION HAZARD DO NOT REMOVE OR REPLACE LAMPS FUSES OR PLUG IN MODULES AS APPLICABLE UNLESS POWER HAS BEEN DISCONNECTED OR THE AREA IS KNOWN TO BE FREE OF IGNITIBLE CONCENTRATIONS OF FLAMMABLE GASES OR VAPORS EXPLOSION HAZARD DO NOT DISCONNECT WHILE THE CIRCUIT IS LIVE UNLESS THE AREA IS KNOWN TO BE FREE OF IGNITIBLE CONCENTRATIONS Exposure to some chemicals may degrade the sealing properties of materials used in the fol
100. OF417 View add Remove activate R Read We Write 4 Active e Tap on an Barcode Preset to display the barcode symbologies Symbology Settings OK Preset Factory Default Options All 1D With Strong Recovery E Trioptic Code disabled Code 128 EAM 13 EAN E nu Settings in Predefined Preset are read only To change a setting in Customer Preset press space or double click p H H Fl F E P Read W Write A Active B 16 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Imager Barcode Symbologies The barcode symbologies for the mager are listed in this section Imager Barcode Symbologies All 1D With Strong Recovery Enabled Code 39 Code 128 EAN 13 EAN 8 UPC E UPC A UPC EAN Sharing Settings Code 93 disabled MSI Plessey disabled Code 11 disabled Interleaved 2 of 5 disabled Matrix 2 of 5 disabled Discrete 2 f 5 disabled Telepen disabled Gs1 DataBar disabled TLC 39 disabled 2D PDF 417 2D micro PDF 417 CodaBlock F disabled CodaBlock A disabled 2D Data Matrix 2D QR Code 2D Maxicode disabled 2D Aztec disabled Postal PlanNET disabled Imager amp Camera Settings B 17 Imager Barcode Symbologies Postal PostNET disabled Postal China disabled Postal Japanese disabled Postal Kix disabled Postal Royal disabled Gs1 Color Camera Barcode Symbologies The barcode symbologies for the Color C
101. OMNII HAND HELD COMPUTER USER GUIDE for Windows Embedded CE 6 0 OMNI HAND HELD COMPUTER USER GUIDE Windows Embedded CE 6 0 8000211 001 Revision A April 2015 Omni Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Manual Copyright No part of this publication may be reproduced or used in any form or by any electrical or mechanical means without permission in writing from us This includes electronic or mechanical means such as photocopying recording or information storage and retrieval systems The material in this manual is subject to change without notice The software is provided strictly on an as is basis All software including firmware furnished to the user is on a licensed basis We grant to the user a non transferable and non exclusive license to use each software or firmware program delivered hereunder licensed program Except as noted below such license may not be assigned sublicensed or otherwise transferred by the user without prior written consent from us No right to copy a licensed program in whole or in part is granted except as permitted under copyright law The user shall not modify merge or incorporate any form or portion of a licensed program with other program material create a derivative work from a licensed program or use a licensed program in a network without written permission from us The user agrees to maintain our copyright notice on the licensed programs delivered hereunder and t
102. Production BSSID O0 id vesS1 82 59 Auth og Encrypt era MAC b0 13 e0 9d ef 55 IP fioize7i5 Status Configure Disable Enable Radio This button toggles between Disable Radio and Enable Radio depending on whether the radio is turned off or on Wi Fi Config Configure e To configure the radio for a wireless network tap on the Configure tab Wi Fi Config OK Status Configure Advanced Connect Add New Edit Remove Scan Connect Used to connect to an already existing wireless network configuration 3 78 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Add New Used to create a new wireless network configuration Edit Used to change values in an already existing wireless network configuration Remove Used to delete a wireless network configuration Scan Used to detect and list available wireless networks You can highlight a network in the list and tap on Add New to activate the network There are two methods available when configuring a radio network you can either scan for an existing network or manually create a network If you tap on the Scan button a list of networks detected by the radio is displayed Highlighting one of the listed networks and tapping on the Add New button creates a new profile that is completed based on the security capabilities detected by the radio You may need to add additional informa tion depending on your network requirements Manually Creating a Network
103. S AA AA AA 4 20 Installation in High Voltage Vehicles cccccccsscccsccceeeceeceueceeccueceeeseueeauecaueeeesseeesseesaeesas 4 21 Wiring Vehicle Power and Communications to the Cradle ccccccccceeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaes 4 21 Battery Charger 6 Slot Model ST3006 occ a 4 22 WINS VA ANOVA AA AA E AA oaees 4 23 Operator Controls Table of Contents vii G4 are xe 9 ae 072 6 lt AA 4 24 CAN CNG TS AUC SS AA E E 4 24 TOUS SOG H AA E E EA E E E EE E E 4 24 Improper Battery Storage 2 Aa 4 24 Power Self test LEDs Don t Light Up 0 aaa 4 25 Indicator Does Not Light When Battery Installed aa 4 25 Appendices Appendix A Port Pinouts omr DOCK CONN O GA ATA NENG NAE TAGA Nan anG A 1 Shap Modules CONNECIONS assassiner a aa A EASA E A 2 Cable Connectors for Vehicle Cradle Model ST1002 aa A 3 Omnii Battery Contacts a A 4 Appendix B Imager amp Camera Settings BI VEE OCCU OA AA tac eauiaiedsonenen cnet ontectasen enna gndestusaenusteceoussaderians B 1 12108 1 C210 ADDIGIS oiaren a eee eee ee eee eee eee ee B 1 FS SS ec see scien ec te Ses AA AA B 1 Predeingd AA AA AA B 2 Barcode Predefined Presets Barcoding Meny aaa B 2 Barcode Decoding Symbology Predefined Preset ccccccccececeseeeeceeeceseeecaeeessueesaees B 2 Barcode Decoding Camera Predefined Presets
104. S AW ETS AA AA 3 73 ea AR AA EE 3 74 File Menu Phonebook Management 12202X a 3 74 Volume amp Sounds Properties 22 Q aa 3 75 Volume FCS SIS aa AA AA AA AA AA 3 76 SOG ACES HAVIN Sot ocsessecadecercesxcaceossenceniee E E E E E 3 76 ae AP 3 76 WEE CONG NAIS a anna KO E ana AG 3 71 VVC OMe COMIN CIOS a AANO NGA AA AA AA 3 71 Manually Creating a Network 0 a 3 78 PAUSINI VOC eee se ces cs GANA AA AA TANG GAY NG AN aNG 3 78 Aplea AA AA 3 79 BP ests AN ere caste ce sete AA AA EE 3 79 Verify Server Certificate 2 0 0 0 ceccccccccecccseeceeeeceeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeesneesegeeseeseaeesegeesaeessueeseeesageesags 3 80 Ena OPM a GAAN AD ee GA Aah 3 80 Connecting the Wireless Network ccccccceeccseccceseceeeceseeeeaeeeceeeeseessueeeseeeseeessneeseeeeseeees 3 81 18 4 ile Ulila Te PIR AA AA 3 82 FG ONS AA RA 3 82 Name ENE paaa AA AA AA ANAN 3 83 WIFI COMMG AQVANCEO ccc naagapan NANANA pa e a a aA S a EA AERE rD 3 84 Monitoring the Network Connection cccccccccsssccceceeeseeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseuseeeeeeseseeeeeesseaaeeeeseeaas 3 85 WIRFT CONAS AR Oa E E A E 3 85 Chapter 4 Accessories PISO Sater arses ae GANAN NAA NA AA Aa 4 1 Removing the Tigger COVER pasakan an maa naaa DALAN LANG 4 1 Attaching the Pistol Grip Aa 4 2 Carrying and Protective Accessories 4 3 The Hand Strap Model ST6025
105. SB key The profile will be automatically installed to the computer Flash Disk TotalRecall folder There is a short delay in deployment so that you can cancel the process if needed 3 68 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide USB drive prepared for cloning Autorun installation on next Omnii The following profile options are Terminal Provisioning System available Starting installation in 9 USB drive ready for deployment Deleting a Profile In the Total Recall home screen tap on Delete Profile In the next screen locate your backup file and tap on OK Total Recall Please select a profile from the list or click browse Flash DiskXDefault1 pfi A warning pop up screen appears asking if you re certain that you want to delete this file e Tapon Yes to delete the file Tweaklit F ot TweakIT Settings This utility allows you to tweak or adjust Advanced system settings interface network servers driver and radio and provides a Registry Editor Advanced Advanced CE Services Settings TweakIT Settings Registry Editor Li FTP Server He Advanced Services Settings FTP Server BE Advanced CE Services Settings Hk Advanced Interface and Network Settings Configuration 3 69 og x This option is enabled by default to allow file transfers Keep in mind that data transfer in either direction is restricted to the Temp folder that is data are alway
106. Settings menu refer to Barcoding Menu Configuring Symbologies on page B 11 Factory Default This preset enables the decoding of frequently used barcodes All This preset enables the decoding of all barcodes that the imager can decode Linear This preset enables the decoding of all the 1D symbologies that the imager can decode Linear and PDF417 This preset enables the decoding of all the 1D and PDF symbologies that the imager can decode Matrix This preset enables the decoding of all 2D symbologies that the imager can decode Postal This preset enables the decoding of all the postal symbologies that the imager can decode Imager amp Camera Settings B 3 Barcode Decoding Camera Predefined Presets The following presets enable successful barcode image capture in almost all conditions NOTE Itis recommended that the default preset be used whenever possible Default This preset works in a wide range of conditions It is optimized for a normal office lighting about 300 Lux Low Light This preset is designed for very dark conditions such as inside a warehouse where the lights are kept low or inside an unlit truck This preset increases either the exposure time or the gain Low Power This preset minimizes the use of the flash so as to conserve the battery power on the hand held Glossy Surface This preset minimizes the use of the flash so as to reduce reflection This preset is used to read barcodes t
107. WWAN Settings G 13 AT Terminal File MOM SMS Voice Data Network Security Data Confiquration Driver Mode Modem Info User Interface gt AT Terminal Rxf T kal The AT Terminal window allows AT commands to be entered and sent to the modem In some situations e g during approval testing it may be required to enter AT commands This feature should only be used if one has a good understanding of the AT command set of the installed WWAN modem SMS Menu SMS Short Message Service functions are accessed through the SMS menu For modems that support a SIM card the SIM initialization typically takes longer than the network initialization resulting in a noticeable delay before the SMS functions become available Wireless WAN Network IR SMS Configuration Signal 77 65dBm Status Ready toconnect Rx T kaila a B s9 a5 ad New Tapping on the New button opens a dialog for sending a new SMS message The recipient s phone number to be entered in the To field can consist of the digits O through 9 as well as the and characters optionally preceded by one character indicating an international number i e the country code follows immediately after the character By checking the Store message in Outbox field a new message can be stored in the Outbox before being sent If no storage space is available or the modem does not support the storage of outgoing messages then
108. Working website www ingenuityworking com knowledge w knowledgebase total recall aspx e Inthe Control Panel choose the Total Recall icon Total Recall Total Recall Create Backup Create Clone Manage Profile Delete Profile GUT version 5 0 199853 0 Engine version 5 0 19983 0 In the start up screen you can choose from four options Create Backup Create Clone Manage Profile and Delete Profile Creating a Backup e Tap on the Create Backup button to begin the process Total Recall Click Start to create a backup profile for this device Profile Name Defaulte Profile Location Flash Disk E This dialog box displays the Profile Name and the storage destination for the profile file e Inthe Profile Name field type a name for a profile e If you want to choose another location for your backup file optional tap on the button to the right of the Profile Location field and choose one of a number of folders Configuration 3 65 AN IMPORTANT Any profile not stored in persistent memory Flash Disk external USB drive will be erased during a clean boot therefore you should store profiles on a persistent drive When performing an autorestore the program only searches for the profile located in the Flash Disk TotalRecall folder If you store your profile anywhere else it will not be restored Only one profile can reside in that folder Tap on Start A backup of the current settings will
109. Z Zero Config Wireless 0 0 ccc eee 3 84 TECHNOLOGIES 1AZEBRA Zebra and the Zebra head graphic are registered trademarks of ZIH Corp The Symbol logo is a registered trademark of Symbol Technologies Inc a Zebra Technologies company 2015 Symbol Technologies Inc All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners 8000211 001 Revision A April 2015
110. a successful decode scan the entire barcode If you are using a 1D or PDF laser scanner make certain that the scan beam crosses every bar and space on the barcode including the margins on either end of the symbol If you are using a 2D imaging scanner make certain the red oval shaped framing mark is centered within the barcode you want to scan When using imaging scanners do not move the scanner while decoding the barcode Movement blurs the image Hold the scanner farther away for larger barcodes Hold the scanner closer for barcodes with bars that are close together Scanner Status LED Sounds and Vibrations The scanner LED the far right LED indicates whether or not your scan is successful The LED behaves as follows Scan In Progress scan LED displays solid red colour Getting To Know Your Omnii 2 15 e Successful Scan scan LED displays solid green colour and turns off when the scan is ended e Unsuccessful scan scan LED flashes red A barcode icon appears on the screen during a scan While the scanner beam is active the onscreen message states SCANNING If you want to turn off the onscreen message disable the Scan Indicator parameter in the Control Panel gt Scanners gt Options gt Display menu When the scan is successful the barcode data is displayed on the screen until the scan button or pistol trigger is released but only if the Scan Result parameter is turned on in the Control Panel gt Scan
111. aeeseenseseeeeneeenaes SE1524ER Extended Range Scanner SE1524ER Decode Zones 2111 a SE1524ER Decode Zone A Short Range Small Codes SE1524ER Decode Zone B Long Range Large Codes EVIA na E E E E EV15 Imager Decode Zone EA11 Decoded 2D Imager cccccccceeccseeceeeceeeceueceecceueecueeaueesaeceaesaueceaeseueceueeaueeeueesaeeeeesasessaeenas PAIT Typical Reading DIStaANCES AA AO AA AA AA EAZ IMAO T AA AA ee ene eee eer eee eee eee ee EA20X Typical Reading Distances aa AHP 0809R IMAGES Decoder ssiie nic csestcncncosenancusexencanebussneseoncwspaanskoescoquadocsneneduecaeanepauiedane enecouueceenedios ARP DOGO SIN NOI RANGE AA NAA AA genes SE4500SR Standard Range Imager SE 4S00SR Decode ZONE GANG AAO ANA ANA kA SE4600LR Long Range Imager SE4600LR Decode Zones Table of Contents ix Appendix E Omnii Specifications The Omnii Hand Held Computer Model 7545 22a a E 1 FLAW AA AA AA E 1 cle 02110 APOYA Ce eee en eee E eee a ee ee E 3 Lithium ion Smart Battery 5000 MAN ST3003 aa E 4 WIG EST RIGOS GA AA AA ee ee AG E 5 Cinterion MC75i GSM GPRS EDGE Radio cc aa E 5 Cinterion PH8 P GSM GPRS EDGE UMTS HSPA Radio aaa E 6 Model RA2070 802 11a b g n Radio aaa E 8 EUS TOO UID WS ACO aaa AA AA AA E 10 RA1202 Narrowband Radio E 10 Appendix F Omnii XT15f Freezer Variants The Omnii
112. al Power 0 6 mW typical Illumination System LEDs Pattern Angle Shock Vibration ESD Laser Safety Class LED Class Temperature Operating Storage Humidity Operating Storage Maximum Engine Dimen sions Weight Electrical Interface 625 5 nm dominant wavelength 16 horizontal x 11 5 vertical 2000 G 5 in the direction of any of the six principal axes applied via the mounting surface at 20 and 55 C for a period of 0 85 0 1 msec 2500 G 5 in the direction of any of the six principal axes applied via the mounting surface at 23 C for a period of 0 70 0 07 msec Unpowered SE4600LR withstands a random vibration along each of the X Y and Z axes for a period of one hour per axis 6 G rms defined as follows 20 to 80 HzRamp up at 0 04 G Hz at 3 dB octave 80 to 350 Hz 0 04 G7 Hz 350 Hz to 2 kHz Ramp down at 0 04 G Hz at 3 dB octave 2 kV connector CDRH IEC Class 2 IEC Class 20 to 55 C 4 to 131 F 40 to 70 C 40 to 158 F 30 C 22 F for Omnii XT15f Arctic variant 95 RH non condensing at 55 C 85 RH non condensing at 70 C 38 23 mm W x 19 34 mm H x 27 00 mm D 1 51 in W x 0 76 in H x 1 06 in D 45 52 grams 1 59 1 83 oz 27 pin 0 3 mm pitch ZIF connector NOTE Environmental and or tolerance parameters are not cumulative A thermal analysis is recommended if the application is subject to an extreme temperature environment
113. allers can speak to one another Call Lists Wireless WAN x Call List File Tools SMS WE Number 5556661212 4175551212 daa Baa Gio tm HH 01 1 t 6 2 Dla 5 Su OF E E 5 Su OF The Call List command manages your call history listing calls you ve Dialed Received and Missed When you choose one of these commands a dialog box lists the phone numbers A drop down menu provides a list of commands you can execute on a phone number in the Call List You can choose to e Dial the number e Send a New SMS or e Add to phonebook to add the highlighted phone number to your phonebook Refer to Phonebook on page 3 74 for details additional details about the Phonebook In the Call List e Highlight the phone number with which you want to work e Choose a command in the drop down menu e Tap on the Execute button to carry out the command 3 74 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Services Wireless WAN Call Management Call Lists Call Waiting Caller ID Call Barring Speed Dial Service Numbers Voicemail Access Hearing Sid a SOM ae The Service menu offers several options for your hand held to customize the behaviour of your phone You can for example bar incoming calls tailor to wnom your caller ID will be transmitted set up call forwarding enable the hearing aid service and so on If you choose an option it may take a number of seconds for your unit to read th
114. allows connection with either the CA3001 Vehicle Cradle Power and Communications Cable DE9M serial port 2 USB Host interfaces and power cable or the power only CA3000 Vehicle Cradle Power Cable For installation details see ST1002 Powered Cradle Installation on page 4 20 ST1002 Vehicle Cradle 44 pin connector CA3001 Vehicle Cradle Power and Communications Cable DE9M serial port Power connector USB Type A connectors USB host The following are the pin assignments of the interfaces DE9M Serial USB Type A Power Signal Pin Signal Signal VIN 11 5 to 30Vdc GND not chassis ground MOTION DETECT MOTION DETECT RETURN not ground A 4 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide DESM Serial USB Type A Signal Pin Signal Pin b5Vdc 1A power out Omnii Battery Contacts Figure A 1 Battery Contact Pinout 765432 1 SITE ETI Description BATT Positive lead of battery Plastic Rip provides mechanical polarity BATT Positive lead of battery BAT T CLK SMBus data clock BATT ID Connected to GND in the battery BATT DATA SMBus bi directional data line GND Negative lead of battery Negative lead of battery Introduction The magers applet is used to create modify delete and activate imager settings The principal uses of the application are to decode barcodes and to capture images This imager services application is used for cameras and imagers to configur
115. ame servers DNS primary Aa DNS secondary aaa WINS primary rr WINS secondary SS Show Data Profile OK Name 8 8 APN intermetfido ca Username os Password oO C Prompt user for password Force PAP authentica Advanced IP The Advanced IP button in the Show Profile and Edit Profile dialog boxes opens another dialog box that allows you to configure a static IP address as well providing DNS and WINS fields so that you can specify DNS and WINS resolvers Security Configuration WWAN Security N8 Current PIM Hew PIM Require PIN on resume The Security Configuration dialog box is accessed through the Tools menu The Security Configuration dialog box allows you to enable disable and change the PIN You will need the current PIN to make any of these changes The PIN must be enabled in order to be changed If the PIN is disabled the New PIN entry field is greyed out J NOTE Keep in mind that some network operators do not allow the SIM PIN to be disabled A new PIN must consist of 4 to 8 numeric digits The Require PIN on resume check box is independent of the aforementioned settings By default this check box is unchecked While this option remains unchecked any PIN entered on startup or through the Security Configuration dialog box and submitted successfully to the modem is stored in memory for as long as the device is not rebooted This stored PIN is then used without further user interacti
116. amera are listed in this section Color Camera Barcode Symbologies All 1D With Strong Recovery Enabled Code 39 Code 128 EAN 13 EAN 8 UPC E UPC A Code 93 disabled Codabar Interleaved 2 of 5 disabled Gs1 DataBar disabled Gs1 Composite 2D PDF 417 2D micro PDF 417 2D Data Matrix 2D QR Code 2D Maxicode disabled 2D Aztec disabled Postal PlanNET disabled B 18 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Color Camera Barcode Symbologies Postal Postal Postal Postal Postal Postal Postal PostNET disabled Australia disabled Canadian disabled Japanese disabled Kix disabled Korean disabled Royal disabled Barcode Settings The Scanners icon in the Control Panel provides dialog boxes in which you can tailor barcode scanner config urations and choose the barcodes your scanner will recognize NN Scanners The parameters are preset with the default settings of the decoded scanner installed in the unit For a listing of available scanners and their specifications please refer to AN IMPORTANT To enable a newly installed scanner press and hold down the FN key and the Power key simultaneously for a minimum of three seconds For information on configuring the Options Translations and Ports settings see Scanner Options The drop down menu to the right of the Scanner option allows you to choose configurations for one of the following scanner types
117. anent damage to the cradle power option and will void the product warranty Operating an Omnii XT15f Arctic unit in operating temperatures from 30 C to 50 C requires the use of the power preregulator Model No PS1370 The ST1002 Vehicle Cradle has a 44 pin connector that allows connection with either the CA3001 Vehicle Cradle Power and Communications Cable DE9M serial port 2 USB Host interfaces and power cable or the power only CA3000 Vehicle Cradle Power Cable For connector pinouts and a cable connections diagram see Cable Connectors for Vehicle Cradle Model ST1002 on page A 3 Figure 4 20 Connecting to vehicle power CA3000 Vehicle Cradle Power Cable CA3001 Vehicle Cradle Power and Communications Cable For a diagram of a power with communications setup see Figure 4 21 Connecting ST1002 to vehicle power and communications in a typical setup on page 4 22 The Omnii charging LED see Battery Charge Status LED on page 2 9 indicates that external power is avail able and it also indicates the charging status of the internal battery Wiring Guidelines Before installing the cables between the cradle and other devices consider the following e Ensure that drilling holes will not damage the vehicle or its wiring e Protect cable runs from pinching overheating and physical damage e Use grommets to protect cables that pass through metal Accessories 4 21 e Use plastic straps and tie downs to secure cables and conne
118. application to the list of items in the selection window You can add a maximum of 18 applications after which the Add option will be greyed out and the following message is displayed Maximum 18 entries reached When you select an application and tap on Edit you will see fields for Command Parameters and Display Name e Command The Command field is prefilled with the path and name of the executable exe or corre sponding link nk If the selected file can t be found e g external memory card has been removed files have been deleted a message will be displayed at the bottom of the screen These files cannot be found e Parameters The Parameters option provides the option of adding extra parameters to the application for exe files only not nk For example if the Command field is running pword exe Microsoft Word Pad the Parameters field could specify a document to open e Display name This is an editable field which is prefilled with the name of the application Configuration 3 47 Advanced The Applications menu allows you to enable or disable some device functions Windows Classic Shell Shell Settings x Shell Settings Applications Advanced Applications Advanced Allow access to Start Menu Bar e Allow access to Start Menu Bar Disable access to the Start Button a all al Pad Disable access to the Notifications Disable access to Start Menu Bar v Administrator access in Start Men
119. aptured Images To configure the location for saved images open the dialog box as follows e Tap on Start gt Settings gt Control Panel e Tap on the Imagers icon and then tap on the Advanced tab Imager amp Camera Settings OK Filter Translations Advanced Abo 4 Imager Built in Service Max Number Barcodes File Location ely Documents My Pictures File Marne Format fcsimg jpg Load Defaults To define the location where imager files will be stored e Tap on the File Location button B 14 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide gt PdbInfo gt Program File SD MIMIC Cari O Temp e Type the file Name choose the Folder and file Type e Choose the Location in which your files will be saved e When you have completed all the changes tap on the Save button Configuring Triggers Viewing the Trigger Configuration The trigger on the Omnii is configured using the Manage Triggers applet The magers applet provides a shortcut to the Manage Triggers applet e In the Advanced tab tap on the Trigger Control button e Toview all the triggers and the hardware devices that are configured to use them tap in the check box next to Show all modules UpiDown Decoded Sc Grip Tri Up Down Imager And L Side Up Down Decoded Sc L Side Up Down Imager And Scan Up Down Decoded Sci Scan Up Down Imager And Soft Scan Up Down Decoded Sc Soft Scan Up Down Imager Soft Scan Up Down Ima
120. ard is permanently disabled e g because the wrong PUK has been entered too many times A new SIM is needed e Modem failure The modem did not respond to commands as expected If a warm boot does not clear this condition the modem may need to be replaced e NDIS error An internal software error has occurred If a warm boot does not clear this condition Zebra technical support may need to investigate further Tools Menu The Tools menu in the main Wireless WAN dialog box offers some additional advanced setup features File OTEN SMS Voice Data Network Security Data Configuration Driver Mode Modem Info User Interface gt AT Terminal RiyT kaiba WWAN Data Configuration WWAN Data Configuration OK LAN co ordination Use virtual serial port Enable automatic configuration Active profile Default Select profile Default F Enable Automatic Connect If the Enable automatic connect check box is checked unchecked by default the Wireless WAN user inter face will attempt to establish a GPRS connection whenever GPRS is available e g after resume from suspend without further user interaction To activate the automatic connection mode e Tap on the OK button While automatic connection mode is enabled the Connect Data button in the main Wireless LAN dialog box changes to Disable Auto To close the currently active connection if any and disable the automatic connection mode Omni Hand H
121. ards Press the SHIFT key to turn the shift state on it will be represented by an up arrow in the taskbar then press another key to access the shifted function of that key Press the SHIFT key twice to lock the shift state on the up arrow in the taskbar will be underlined Press SHIFT again to turn the shift state off To access CAPS LOCK mode press FN SHIFT In this state if you press a numeric key the number is displayed rather than the normal shifted function of that key Press FN SHIFT again to turn the CAPS LOCK mode off The Arrow Keys The Arrow keys are located near the top of the keyboard and are represented on the keyboard as triangles pointing in different directions The Arrow keys move the cursor around the screen in the direction of the arrow up down left and right The left arrow key should not be confused with the BACKSPACE key which is depicted as a left arrow The cursor is the flashing box or underline character that indicates where the next character you type will appear The BACKSPACE DEL Key The BACKSPACE key represented on the keyboard as an arrow pointing left moves the cursor one char acter to the left erasing the previous key stroke The DEL key FN BACKSPACE erases the character at the current cursor position The CTRL and ALT Keys The CTRL and ALT keys modify the function of the next key pressed and are application dependent Pressing either key tw
122. are Specifications on page F 2 To ensure proper operation of the hand held device in a freezer environment the surface temperature is managed by the heating system to prevent the formation of external internal condensation on critical modules The heating system consists of two heating elements one for the display and one for the scan window Quick Defrost Settings The individual heaters for the computer modules can be monitored and the duration of time for them to remain on during Suspend mode can be configured Omnii XT15f Freezer Variants F 7 e Inthe Control Panel choose the Quick Defrost icon Quick Defrost Settings The Quick Defrost application opens in the Settings tab Suspend Threshold e The Suspend Threshold option allows you to maintain heat for a limited time when the computer enters Suspend mode Once the threshold is reached the heater will stay off while the computer is in suspend e To set the time slide the trackbar to the desired time and click OK Values range from 0 to 5 minutes Quick Defrost settings Heater Info Suspend Timeout minutests Scan Window Power for heating the scan window High power F ad Kab ske gt hah ab SU J NOTE A longer suspend threshold will reduce your overall battery shift life Scan Window The Scan Window option allows you set the level of power for the periphery scan window heater There are two pull down options High power default This he
123. ass 3 24dBm 1 3dB for UMTS 1900 WCDMA FDD Bd II Class 3 24dBm 1 3dB for UMTS 900 WCDMA FDD Bd VIII Class 3 24dBm 1 3dB for UMTS 850 WCDMA FDD Bd V Class 3 24dBm 1 3dB for UMTS 800 WCDMA FDD Bd VI Omnii Specifications E 7 Parameter Specifications 3GPP Release 6 7 DL 14 4Mbps UL 5 7Mbps UE CAT 1 6 11 12 supported Compressed mode CM supported according to 3GPP TS25 212 UMTS features 3GPP Release 4 PS data rate 384 kbps DL 384 kbps UL CS data rate 64 kbps DL 64 kbps UL GSM GPRS EGPRS features Data transfer GPRS e Multislot Class 10 e Full PBCCH support e Mobile Station Class B e Coding Scheme 1 4 EGPRS e Multislot Class 10 e EDGE E2 power class for 8 PSK e Downlink coding schemes CS 1 4 MCS 1 9 e Uplink coding schemes CS 1 4 MCS 1 9 e SRB loopback and test mode B e 8 bit 11 bit RACH e PBCCH support e 1 phase 2 phase access procedures e Link adaptation and IR e NACC extended UL TBF e Mobile Station Class B CSD e V 110 RLP non transparent e 14 4kbps e USSD SMS Point to point MT and MO GPS features Protocol NMEA Modes Assisted GPS control plane AGPS E911 E 8 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Parameter General Software AT commands Specifications Power saving modes GPS tracking in parallel to 2G 3G diversity operation Hayes 3GPP TS 27 007 and 27 005 and proprietary Cin
124. ata transfers do not require ActiveSync Instead you will need to download Windows Mobile Device Center For instructions go to the following website and type the name into the search box http www microsoft com downloads en default aspx To transfer data between your PC and your hand held e Tap on Start gt Computer to display the drives The Omnii will be visible here e Open drives files and folders as you would on your PC Display Properties e Inthe Control Panel choose the Display icon a Display Background e Inthe Display Properties dialog box open the Background tab This dialog box allows you to customize your background image Display Properties OK Xx Background Appearance Backlight Backlight mi Tile image on background 3 20 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Appearance e Inthe Display Properties dialog box open the Appearance tab This dialog box allows you to customize the display colour scheme Display Properties OK Background Appearance Backlight _ Scheme Dialog Box Text Button Item Desktop Backlight The backlight is activated for a configurable amount of time The Display Properties dialog box in the Control Panel allows you to specify the intensity of the backlight along with how long the backlight remains on when the unit is not in use no key press scanner trigger etc J NOTE Keep in mind that this option may be restricted to su
125. ates as the vehicle moves When the GPS module is set to this profile and the vehicle enters an area such as a tunnel where satellite coverage is interrupted it wi attempt to predict the vehicle position Pedestrian profile is designed for those using the GPS module while walking It takes into account the slower pace of the pedestrian when mapping the location of the user When the GPS module is set to this profile and the operator moves into an area where satellite coverage is interrupted the GPS module will not attempt to predict the operator s movement Configuration 3 25 Programs AGPS Tap on the GPS Program Port drop down menu to choose the communication COM port that the GPS software will use to communicate with the GPS receiver GPS Settings Power Profiles Programs aps Info GPS Program Port None Choose the communications port that applications will use to obtain GPS data GPS Settings Bower Profiles Programs AGPS Info Last Updated Expiry Date Status fide Update Settings 7 a gt ih lls To determine your location a GPS module receives data from three or more GPS satellites in fixed orbit around the Earth The GPS module triangulates your location based on the time it takes for signals to get to and from the satellites This works well in fairly clear areas outdoors for example However if you re attempting to triangulate your location in city centres where signals bounce off tal
126. ating profile has been designed for users that are in and out of the freezer frequently with a freezer dwell time of less than 20min This heating profile keeps a constant positive temper ature on the scan window eliminating any formation of external internal condensation from frequent transi tions Please note that this heating algorithm provides additional power at the expense of the battery shift life Low power This heating profile has been designed for users that will be spending long durations in the freezer environment It is a less aggressive algorithm compared to the high power mode that maximizes battery shift life It addresses the formation of internal condensation to keep the scan window clear of condensation These two scan window power modes can be adjusted on the fly to give the user the needed flexibility for optimal performance F 8 Omni Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Heater Info e Inthe Quick Defrost dialog box open the Heater Info tab This dialog box allows you to monitor the status of each heater and test the entire system Temperature Selection You have the option of setting the display temperatures to Celsius or Fahrenheit Quick Defrost Settings Heater Info Heater System Status Voltage Curent Power Temperature Humidity Display Status Current Power Temperature Scan Window Status Current Power Temperature System Test Turns on all heaters fo
127. ator Zebra strongly recommends that you seek professional mounting advice from the vehicle manufacturer Ensure that you read the ST1002 Vehicle Cradle Installation Instructions document PN 1020305 enclosed with the ST1002 for important safety information on con necting fuses Cable routing within a vehicle cab also requires careful consideration especially for devices with loose cables If you are unable to obtain suitable advice contact Zebra for assistance Note also that for better protection the equipment should be mounted inside the vehicle roll cage Pedestal mounts are recommended for all fixed mount locations because they offer optimal operator access In addition for safety reasons only pedestal mounts with fully locking joints should be used in vehicles Always adjust the pedestal for the optimum viewing angle and securely tighten the hex and wing screws 4 18 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide The most effective way to mount the vehicle cradle is to use brackets with the MT3324 short arm or MT3325 standard arm kit The ST1002 requires either the MT3326 or MT3327 bracket the ST1000 requires the MT3328 bracket AN IMPORTANT Itis strongly recommended that all forklift mounting solutions use clamp bases rather than plate bases that require penetrating through the vehicle for installation A clamp base is required to secure the vehicle cradle arm assembly to the vehicle Choose from one of the
128. attery before this time elapses Advanced e Inthe Power Properties dialog box open the Advanced tab Allow suspend with Active PPP connection Active network interface Active TCP IP connection Low power warnings Battery low power threshold above the Suspend Threshold Enable battery warnings Allow Suspend With This menu allows you to specify whether or not your unit will enter Suspend Mode while it is operating with an active PPP connection network interface or active TCP IP connection Low Power Warnings The sliding scale at the bottom of this menu allows you to specify the remaining battery capacity at which a warning message is displayed on the Omnii screen from 0 to 20 Built in Devices e Inthe Power Properties dialog box open the Built in Devices tab Power Properties OK Battery Heath Lal WWAN power mode Enabled Turn Off on Suspend Configuration 3 43 WWAN Power Mode This menu allows you to enable power to your WWAN radio and whether or not the radio will turn off when the Omnii enters Suspend Mode To configure the radio please refer to Appendix G Wireless Wide Area Network WWAN Settings Battery Health The Battery Health service provides an estimate of battery health based on a number of different measure ments beyond just capacity IMPORTANT Battery Health is an estimate and should not be depended on to provide a 100 account of battery condition
129. ault parameter Default all settings Length Restriction BF Add Remove Data To change 4 setting press space or double click e Choose Default parameter to reset the parameter to the default setting Options This tab allows you to tailor the double click parameters display and data handling options associated with your scanner Scanner Settings OK Barcodes Options Translations Ports Internal scanner Non confhgurable Bf Couble Click Click Time 0 msec 3 Click Data O E Display Er Data handling Codepage Default Local ASCII To change a setting press space or Anihle rlirk a Ball BB Configuration 3 53 Double Click Parameters Click Time msec This parameter controls the maximum gap time in milliseconds for a double click If the time between the first and second clicks of the scanner trigger is within this time it is considered a double click The allowable range is O to 1000 A value of zero disables this feature A double click produces different results depending on whether or not a value is assigned in the Click Data parameter When a value is not assigned for the Click Data double clicking the scanner trigger overrides the target dot delay set in the Dot Time parameter and initiates a normal scan sweep If a value is assigned for the Click Data parameter double clicking the scanner trigger inserts the Click Data value rather than initi ati
130. authentication The name of the newly created profile must be different from all existing profiles Also the name cannot be Default When the New Data Profile dialog box is opened a proposal for a unique name is filled in the corre sponding entry field If a manually configured profile has a secret password and unauthorized access to the device is a concern even after the SIM PIN has been entered the password should not be entered in the New Data Profile dialog box and the Prompt user for password check box should be checked instead In this case you will be prompted for the password each time a connection is initiated the Connect Data button in the main Wireless WAN dialog box is selected By default the connection uses PAP Password Authentication Protocol a simple authentication protocol used to authenticate a user to a remote access server or Internet Service Provider However if your ISP does not support PAP tapping in the box to the left of Force PAP authentication disables PAP and directs the connection to use CHAP Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol instead Reset The Reset button in the New Profile and Edit Profile dialog boxes resets all entry fields to the values they had when the dialog box was opened G 8 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Advanced IP Figure G 3 Assigning IP Information Show Advanced IP OK Lise network assigned IP address IP address Use network assigned n
131. ayes 3GPP TS 27 007 and 27 005 3 2 to 4 3 V EDGE class 12 max 236 8 kbps downlink Mobile station class B Modulation and coding scheme MCS 1 9 GPRS class 12 Mobile station class B PBCCH support Coding schemes CS 1 4 Up to 14 4 kbps V 110 Non transparent mode Point to point MO and MT Text and PDU mode E 6 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Parameter Voice Interfaces Specifications Triple rate codec for HR FR and EFR Adaptive multi rate AMR Basic hands free operation Echo cancellation Noise reduction Hirose U FL R SMT 50 ohm antenna connector Antenna solder pad Molex 80 pin board to board connector Power supply Audio 2x analog 1x digital Serial interface ITU T V 24 protocol SIM card interface 3 V 1 8 V Cinterion PH8 P GSM GPRS EDGE UMTS HSPA Radio Parameter Specifications General Frequency bands GSM class Output power according to Release 99 HSPA features GSM GPRS EDGE Quad band 850 900 1800 1900MHz UMTS HSPA Five band 800 850 900 1900 2100MHz Small MS Class 4 33dBm 2dB for EGSM850 Class 4 33dBm 2dB for EGSM900 Class 1 30dBm 2dB for GSM1800 Class 1 30dBm 2dB for GSM1900 Class E2 27dBm 3dB for GSM 850 8 PSK Class E2 27dBm 3dB for GSM 900 8 PSK Class E2 26dBm 3 4dB for GSM 1800 8 PSK Class E2 26dBm 3 4dB for GSM 1900 8 PSK Class 3 24dBm 1 3dB for UMTS 2100 WCDMA FDD Bd Cl
132. begins another dialog box tracks the progress of the file transmission HSP HFP Headset Profile Hands Free Profile Service Commands The HSP Headset Profile allows users to connect their device to Bluetooth enabled headsets and other audio devices HSP HFP services provide the following unique menu options e Connect Audio establishes an audio connection to the Bluetooth headset e Disconnect Audio disconnects the audio connection from the Bluetooth headset e Volume Control displays a dialog box where the headset and microphone volume can be adjusted Device V In this tab users can discover and display Bluetooth devices Bluetooth TORPSG 011 00 1E37AE4096 All Clear Discovering and Removing Devices Scan discovers Bluetooth devices in range of the Omnii and lists them in this tab Any existing devices previ ously discovered and listed will also be displayed Clear removes all Bluetooth devices listed except those with currently paired and connected services NOTE To limit the number of devices listed to a particular type of device refer to Filtering By Class of Device COD on page 3 10 next section 3 10 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Filtering By Class of Device COD Bluetooth OK Paired Device Servers Mode About Select device to start pairing Name Adress This menu allows you to filter the displayed devices by their COD If for example you choo
133. bled the input barcode and the modified translated output barcode are logged in the file Flash Disk ScanLog txt Keep in mind that if Scan Log File is enabled there is a slight performance reduction when performing multiple scans since the log file is written to persistent storage Data Handling Codepage If you are encountering a scan failure because there is an unrecognized language character in the barcode the Codepage option may correct the problem by allowing the SO 8859 1 Latin 1 codepage to be used The default value is Default Local ASCII IMPORTANT Do not change this parameter from the default setting unless you are certain that it will correct your scan problem Translations The Translations menu allows you to define up to 10 cases each consisting of up to 10 rules in sequential order Only one case will be applied to a barcode and a case will only be applied if all rules specified in the case are successful if a rule within a case fails the entire case fails Configuration 3 55 Scanner Settings Barcodes Options Translations t Case 1 empty tl Case 2 empty t Case 3 empty H Case 4 empty H Case 5 empty Case 6 empty Case 7 empty Case 8 empty tl Case 9 empty H Case 10 empty To change a setting press space or double click e Inthe Translation menu tap on the Case to create rules H Case 2 empty 7 To change a setting press space or double click
134. cific scanners Refer to the option names in this section for scanner model identification Dot Time msec The value selected for Dot Time msec determines in milliseconds how long the targeting dot remains on before the scanner switches to a normal scan sweep When you double tap on this parameter a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter a value of 0 msec 200 msec or 400 msec A value of 0 zero disables the target dot Laser On Time The value assigned to this parameter determines how long the laser will remain on when the scan button or trigger is pressed Double tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in which you can enter a value between 5 and 99 The value is measured in tenths of seconds C 4 Omni Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Decoded Internal Advanced Options Scan Mode You can set the method of scanning by setting this parameter to Scan beam only Aim with Scan 1 trigger pull Aim with Scan 2 trigger pulls Aim with Scan on trigger release and Continuous Scan Mode Default is Scan beam only Aim Duration This parameter determines the total time the aiming pattern appears before the scanner laser begins sweeping When you double tap on this parameter a dialog box is displayed in which you can enter a value from O to 30 O to 3 sec A value of 0 zero disables the aiming dot Minimum Cancel Time The value assigned to this parameter determines the time delay before t
135. ck the check box to disable this option Figure H 5 Network Key and Key Index Wireless Properties OK Network name SSID SECTOR 1 This is an ad hoc network wireless access points are not used Encryption WEP Authentication Open Network key 12345 Key index ji The key is provided automatically Enable 802 1 authentication e Key Index This field is used to identify the WEP key Enter a value from 1 to 4 e Enable 802 1x authentication 802 1X is the IEEE standard that offers additional security for local area networks It provides authentication for user devices attached to an Ethernet network whether wired or wireless A security protocol packet such as TLS or MD5 encapsulated in an EAP is used in conjunction with the 802 1X standard to authenticate users at the MAC layer Available EAPs are listed in the drop down menu next to the EAP option To activate 802 1X highlight 802 1x authentication and check the check box e EAP Type Extensible Authentication Protocol This drop down menu lists the EAP types available on your system The items in this drop down menu will vary depending on your network setup Keep in mind also that some authentication protocols require that you select a Certificate By selecting the Properties button you will be able to select a Certificate Compass on page 3 17 provides a website that outlines how to create certificates for your network Wireless Zero Config Settings H 5
136. ctors in their desired location away from areas where they may get snagged or pulled e Keep cables away from heat sources grease battery acid and other potential hazards e Keep cables away from control pedals and other moving parts that may damage the cables or interfere with the operation of the vehicle Installation in High Voltage Vehicles WARNING Voltages exceeding 30VDC are considered hazardous Installation of powered cradles in vehicles that operate above 30VDC require special consideration as listed below Due to the hazardous voltages present on these vehicles it is necessary to ensure that the powered cradle power supply cable connector is not accessible to the vehicle operator and does not get exposed to water or other liquids Exposing an accessible power connector to water or other liquids could create a hazardous situation resulting in serious injury or death Avoiding this hazard can be accomplished in the following way e Use the PS1350 pre regulator or for freezer applications 30 C the PS1370 pre regulator e Ensure the power connector is wrapped securely with a waterproof electrical tape and installed in a dry location on the vehicle away from the vehicle operator s reach perhaps under a vehicle dash or in a sealed housing e Cover the power connector with a waterproof heat shrink material see Extreme Wet Environments on page 4 21 for additional details All other installation requirements outlined
137. current components which will be placed in the My Device folder in Windows Explorer System Properties H Software components Psion 1 10 22115 0 Ayan 3 1 22751 0 Total Recall 5 0 22700 0 TIl273 Wan 3 0 22120 0 RILCinterion 2 10 22744 0 Demo Apps 1 0 5238 0 Devicescape Agent 2 14 22207 Psion Configuration 3 2 0 0 Bluetooth 3 6 0 0 Dr Debug 2 7 0 0 gt fl es e Instead of expanding each section of items individually you can also choose to open all the lists at once by choosing the Expand button which will then change to a Collapse button to enable you to collapse all the sections as well 3 64 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Total Recall Total Recall is a utility we developed to maintain applications and settings during a cold boot as well as clone settings to other devices This utility creates a restore point of a device at a known state This can be used as a backup of the device the administrator can clean the terminal and restore the profile at any time or a clone the administrator can store different configurations for different uses to clone to other hand held computers af NOTE Total Recall works differently e g restore on cold boot or on clean boot on different OS platforms and versions e g Windows CE 5 0 6 0 Windows Mobile Windows Embedded Hand held For detailed information and other updates on Total Recall information please go to the Ingenuity
138. d To stop press the button or CTRL ALT Enter Stop Recording 17 e Type the macro sequence you want to assign to the Macro key You can type text and numbers and you can program the function of special keys into a macro e When you ve finished recording your macro sequence press the key sequence CTRL ALT Enter or choose the Stop Recording button 3 32 Omni Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide A new screen Verify Macro displays the macro sequence you created The Save button is highlighted e Press Enter to save your macro or highlight CANCEL and press Enter to discard it Executing a Macro To execute a macro e Press the macro key to which you ve assigned the macro Deleting a Macro To delete a macro e Inthe Macros tab highlight the macro number you want to delete Choose the Delete button Unicode Mapping A e In the Keyboard Properties dialog box open the Unicode Mapping tab Keyboard Properties OK The Unicode Mapping tab is used to map combinations of virtual key values and CTRL and SHIFT states to Unicode values This tab shows the configured Unicode character along with the Unicode value For example the sample screen above shows a U 0061 indicating that the character a is represented by the Unicode value 0061 and so on Keep in mind that Unicode configurations are represented as hexadecimal rather than decimal values All user defined
139. d be corrected for subsequent software releases e An operator has assigned individual GPRS user names and passwords e Avery large site has its own APN Such connections always have to be configured manually e A customer has subscribed for a static IP address By definition this must be configured manually e An operator may use a different APN for certain groups of customers Since the automatic configuration can configure only one APN per operator such connections have to be configured manually Profiles In the following section all the parameters that need to be configured for a connection such as APN user name password DNS server addresses etc are referred to as a profile Every profile is identified by an arbi trary unique name The profile named Default is special in that it is always present and can neither be edited nor deleted The Default profile uses parameters from a built in database The home network the network that issued the SIM is used for the database look up While there can be many configured profiles only one profile can be active at any time If connection profiles are configured manually the Enable automatic configuration check box should normally be unchecked In one particular use case manually configured profiles may be combined with automatic configuration If multiple SIM cards are used with the same device each SIM card being from a different operator and some or all of them requiring a manually set
140. d dialog box 3 42 Battery Health dialog box 3 43 Built in Devices dialog box 3 42 capacity dialog box 3 40 charger safety instructions 4 8 charging 0 cee eee 1 4 2 2 4 8 charging with desktop docking station 4 11 contact pinout a A 4 estimated battery backup time 3 41 installing 0 0 a 1 4 power saving suspend dialog box 3 40 replacing 0 a 1 4 specifications cc ee ees E 4 specifications Arctic ST3002 F 5 ST3006 6 slot battery charger 4 22 4 25 Suspend Threshold dialog box 3 41 swap IME 1 a 2 1 taskbar icon eee eee 2 11 Baud port replicator a 3 57 beeper adjusting volume a 2 12 description of beep conditions 2 12 Bi Direction Redundancy eee ee C 5 Bluetooth radio devices pairing a 3 10 ISM band 0 0 ccc eee eee 3 7 radio configuration 3 7 3 17 specifications a E 10 Bluetooth radio GPRS sSetup 00 0 0 cee 3 14 SEUUD a ee ee ee ee eee oe 3 7 Boot to BooSt ce 1 6 Bright For backlight 00 e eee eee 3 20 C cable diagrams 1 0 0 ccc ce eee eee A 1 calibrating touchscreen 2 8 3 62 SE e e 60 bobo
141. d in which you can choose how long the fix is stored in your Omnii the field values cannot be edited The Use custom settings option is generally used to configure devices that will have access only to an intranet rather than the nternet and should only be altered with the assistance of qualified personnel They will be able to help you configure our devices and web server to retrieve the ephemeris data Info File Date Firmware Version 1 0 BETA C1 B0OZ GPS Day GPS Week O Last Updated Next Download Prediction Interval O Remote File fpackedDifterence Updated Enhemeris Saved to 1GpsInfo txt a D S tah alls This tab provides general information about the GPS module such as the firmware version the date on which files were last updated and so on If GPS module support service is required you may be asked to tap on the Save button in this tab and forward the information to our support staff Imager amp Camera Settings The Imagers applet is used to create modify delete and activate imager and camera settings The principle uses of the applet are to decode barcodes and to capture images A Demonstration Application is provided to demonstrate how the imager works Refer to Demo on page 2 21 for details Refer to Appendix B Imager amp Camera Settings for configuration details e Inthe Control Panel choose the Imagers icon NB magets Configuration 3 27 J NOTE This icon is only displayed when the ap
142. d in white and blue print respectively above the keyboard keys dependant on your keyboard format SYM NOTE When using the Mobile Devices SDK Developers Guide PN 8100016 note that the SYM key is interchangeable with the ORANGE key The Symbol SYM modifier key is represented on the keyboard by the characters SYM and provides access to commonly used symbolic characters Pressing the key brings up the Symbol soft input panel SIP onscreen keyboard with symbols mapped to each key If you wish to adjust the settings for the pop up screen e g time of delay before screen appears etc modify the file softinpuipanel xml located in the Windows folder NOTE Modifier keys are remapped in Control Panel and the Symbol SIP will automatically show and use the new mappings after the next reboot The onscreen keyboard corresponds to the specific keyboard on your Omnii either numeric or alphanumeric Figure 2 2 Symbol Soft Input Panels Se W Ba Meleke ny oc g FN Suoog esc kay Ta ooa E SYM Calo Pao on FN FN seag Internet Browser Keys maha 36 KEY Numeric Keyboard 59 KEY Alpha Keyboard Activating Modifier Keys When a modifier key is pressed it is shown in the softkey bar at the bottom of the screen making it easier to determine whether a modifier key is active For example if the CTRL key is pressed Ctrl is displayed at the bottom of the unit screen Once the next key is pressed the mo
143. d in your Omnii the radio signal icon is not displayed in the taskbar Windows Start Button If you are using the touchscreen you can either tap the Windows icon at the bottom left of the screen or press the Windows key to display the Start Menu and then tap on the desired application Modifier Key Indicators SHIFT CTRL ALT FN and SYM are modifier keys that have onscreen indicators to show when a key is active or locked If a modifier key is pressed once to activate it the key is displayed in the taskbar for example pressing the FN key once displays FN in the taskbar If a modifier key is pressed twice it is locked on and the onscreen indicator is displayed with underlined letters in the taskbar for example pressing FN twice displays FN in the taskbar Power The battery shaped icon displayed in the taskbar provides quick access to the charge state of the battery Tapping on the icon once will show the percentage charge left in the battery Tapping on the icon twice opens the Power Properties menus see Power Properties on page 3 40 where you can set the low battery warnings levels and time to enter Suspend If the Omnii is using external AC power an AC icon is displayed in the taskbar 802 11 Radio Signal Quality Increasing radio signal quality is represented by longer filled bars within this icon al oll all al al al Good Weak No Radio Reception Reception Link WWAN Radio Signal Quality Wireles
144. d keyboard shortcuts as desktop Windows with one difference the point and click action is accomplished using a touchscreen rather than a mouse Actions can be performed using any combination of keyboard shortcuts or touchscreen tapping In those applications that support it you can also flick and pan your finger to scroll through screens Navigating Using a Touchscreen NOTE If the touchscreen is not registering your screen taps accurately the touchscreen may need reca libration Refer to Calibrating the Touchscreen on page 2 8 The Omnii comes equipped with a stylus a pointing tool that looks like a pen The stylus is used to select objects on the touchscreen You can also use gestures with your fingers You can use two gestures pan and Getting To Know Your Omnii 2 17 flick Use left or right flicks to quickly move between tabs of a multi tab control panel or to scroll long lists of options Use panning by touching and dragging a page that has scrollbars NOTE To prevent damage to the touchscreen use only a finger touch or the stylus pen supplied with your Omnii To choose an icon open a file launch an applet or open a folder e Double tap on the appropriate icon Navigating Using the Keyboard If you would like to use keyboard input to choose icons and navigate dialog boxes refer to the table following Operation Key or Key Combination Switch between active ALT TAB applications Open task manager ALT ESC Mov
145. depending on what is installed in on your hand held Decoded internal Decoded HHP Decoded Intermec ISCP and Non decoded Scanners C 2 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Scanner Settings OK Barcodes Options Translations Ports Scanner Decoded internal Decoded internal H AdvaNDecoded Intermec ISCP H Data Options Code 39 HI Code 128 Hl EAN 13 Hl EAN 8 UPC A Hl UPC E E UPC ESN Shared Settings H Code 93 disabled To change a setting press space or Anihle rlirk a Bs th alls The symbologies listed change to reflect the scanner you choose and the barcodes it supports Always defer to your barcode scanner programming manual when in doubt about the availability or settings for any parameter J NOTE Your Omnii comes preconfigured from the factory for internal scanner types The type of scanner installed can be determined from the System icon in the Control Panel under the System Prop erties tab AN IMPORTANT To improve the decode speed and performance enable set to on only those codes that are required by the application Keep in mind that some barcode types are only available when an internal imaging scanner is installed All internal scanners can be configured using these dialog boxes Restoring Default Settings If you want to restore the factory defaults after making changes the defaults can be applied to a selected parameter sub tree of parameters or al
146. difier key becomes inactive and disappears from the taskbar Locking Modifier Keys When a modifier key is pressed twice it is locked on A locked modifier key is displayed in underlined letters in the taskbar For example pressing the FN key twice locks it on it is displayed as an underlined blue FN in the taskbar at the bottom of the computer screen The same is true of the SYM key which is shown as an underlined orange SYM in the taskbar The locked modifier key will remain active until it is pressed a third time to unlock or turn it off Once a modifier key is unlocked the underline representation at the bottom of the screen is no longer displayed 2 6 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide V NOTE The locking function of the modifier keys can be changed so that pressing a key once will lock the key on If you disable the One Shot function of the key pressing it once will lock the key on Pressing the same key a second time will unlock or turn it off Refer to Keyboard One Shot Modes on page 3 30 for details Function Keys and Macro Keys In addition to the standard keyboard functions see The Keyboard on page 2 2 the Omnii supports function keys and macro keys All function keys and macro keys can be custom defined for each application The TekTerm Client application utilizes these keys for detailed information see the TekTerm Client Software User Manual PN 8000073 Function Keys Function k
147. ding Distances Typical Reading Distances Parameter Focal Point SR Image Sensor Motion Tolerance Rotational Sensitivity Viewing Angle Ambient Light Illumination LEDs Aiming Input Voltage Imager Input Voltage HHP 5080 POF417 10 mils 0 15 11 b mils i 0 25 mm 10 mils 100 contrast UFC EAN 0 5 mm 20 mils LETS POPE PTET Pee PPT ee ETP TTT ee Pee ee AA AA AA HHP 5080SR Imager Decoder Specifications 7 inches 17 8 cm from lens plate 752 x 480 CMOS sensor 4 inches per second 360 40 Total darkness to 100 000 lux full sunlight 626 nm 30 nm LEDs 526 nm 30 nm Laser 650 nm 10 nm 3 3 VDC 5 23 C 3 0 VDC to 5 5 VDC 23 C D 10 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Parameter Specifications Current Draw Imager Max Operating Current 100 mA Standby Current 100 pA Current Draw HHP 5080 Average Current Interlaced Mode 510 mA Standby Current 120 uA Peak 600 mA Symbologies 2 Dimensional PDF417 MicroPDF417 MaxiCode Data Matrix QR Code Aztec Aztec Mesa Code 49 UCC Composite Linear Code 39 Code 128 Codabar UPC EAN Interleaved 2 of 5 Reduced Space Symbology Code 93 Codablock Postal Postnet US Planet Code BPO 4 State Canadian Post Japanese Post KIX Netherlands Post HHP 5080SR Working Range Data is characterized at 23 C 73 4 F and O lux ambient light Symbology Size mil Near Far Linear 8
148. e 3 54 MAI aNG E AA 3 54 Case NSS aaa ANG AA AA ANA 3 56 POR ta AA AGA AA 3 56 Port Replicator Port A COM5 and Port B COM6 aa 3 57 Bee ROO 9 eee AA NG ANA AANGAT NG 3 58 DIOPACS MANAGED AA NUN NN DAGA AA DP 3 59 Formatting a Memory Cala aa AA ANA a 3 59 CHEATING Al llo AA AA AA AA 3 59 Partition Management cccccssececcssseecceesececseusececsauseeccauaeesceaaseeeesuaeeeeeaaeeeesaueeeessugeeessageeessssagess 3 60 Si Cdo AL AA ee eee eee eee eee eee ee ae eee 3 62 DOUDE TI 4 MAA AA E AA AA EE A 3 62 CS ANI aU ARA PERA PA AA PA 3 62 TOU AA PE 3 63 SYRIAN AAP 3 63 aaa PAA 3 64 VS UN Nh BACKUD a AA AA AA AA 3 64 Oi fered ge a CONE as E eee es 3 65 Table of Contents v Managing G ae eee tee ee eee ne ere eee ee eee 3 66 AE WIG Ir HONING eere E E E E 3 66 Profile UO CAN 3 66 Dec A PTO MO a ee ee NAA NADAAN AG E eee ee ee ee 3 68 I ELA AA AA AA AE 3 68 AOV AUC GO AA AA AA AA AA 3 69 Advanced CE Services Settings aa 3 69 Advanced Interface and Network Settings X aaa 3 69 Advanced Bl eU RA 3 70 RegS Iy EONO cressoni E E AA 3 70 Voice Using the WWAN Phone Dialer ccccceccsscccececeeecueecuecceeeceeceaeecueceeesauecauesseseeeseeesaass 3 70 DANG a Number AA ANA E AA 3 71 Recevng Klea Lake PAA O S SS 3 72 VOICE WON onran a E E E EE E AE anos teunycommucsanne 3 72 Call Management 2 2 3 72 O
149. e o fal Gil 2 32PM Motion Meter Dr Debug OK Status Utilities Motion Meter Settings Displays the 40 most severe events Duration C Tapping on the Start button enables the Motion Meter feature Once enabled this applet records the number of impacts the Omnii has sustained the distance of the fall in meters the duration in 10 S of a second and the date and time that the event occurred The top 40 events are logged in a non volatile location and can be used for diagnostic purposes by us or the site administrator Configuration 3 23 Settings Dr Debug Status Utilities Motion Meter Settings Error Level critical Log Folder Windows System DrDebug e Choose an Error Level from the drop down menu e To change the location where debug information will be stored tap on the button to the right of the Log Folder option Error Reporting Error Reporting allows you to enable or disable Microsoft error reporting prompts e Tap on Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Error Reporting icon to access your options Error Reporta KSI z Report software errors to ME aad Microsoft to help improve all products Error Enable error reporting Reporting Display upload success Display upload failure File system usage O 300 KB oe Larger Sizes Increase C 600 kB the opportunity to 200 KB correct problems O 1200 KB GPS Global Positioning System Settings This applet allows y
150. e Make New Connection dialog box choose Dial Up Connection Enter a name for your GPRS network connection Make New Connection Type a name for the connection GPRS network Select the connection type Dial Up Connection O Direct Connection O virtual Private Network O Virtual Private Network L2TP O BPP over Ethernet PPPoE Configuration 3 15 7 Choose the Next button to display the Modem dialog box Pa My Connection Select a modem 8 In the drop down menu labelled Select a modem choose the name of the modem with which you want to connect and then choose the Configure button to display the Device Properties dialog box The Omnii communicates via Bluetooth to your Bluetooth equipped cellular telephone and retrieves the parameters for the Device Properties dialog box Omnii then disconnects Connection Preferences Baud Rate 19200 Data Bits Parity Stop Bits Flow Control Hardware F Terminal Use terminal window before dialing Use terminal window after dialing Manual Dial 9 Under the Call Options tab turn off Cancel the call if not connected within and press Enter to save your changes Device Properties Port Settings Call Options Call Setup Cancel the call if not connected awithin 120 seconds Wait for dial tone before dialing Wait for credit card lo Sec Extra Settings Special modem commands may be inserted into the dial string hm
151. e a newly installed imager or scanner press and hold down the FN key and the Enter Power key simultaneously for a minimum of three seconds If your unit has a Power button press and hold down the FN key and the Power button for a minimum of three seconds The Omnii supports a wide range of scanner options to address a variety of user application requirements Refer to the following sections for detailed information e Scanner list and specifications Appendix D Internal Imager 4 Scanner Specifications e Configuration Scanners on page 3 50 and Manage Triggers on page 3 36 e Scanning Techniques on page 2 14 outlines the mechanics of a successful scan e Scanner Status LED Sounds and Vibrations on page 2 14 details how to interpret whether or not a barcode has been successfully scanned 2 14 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Barcode Parameters Appendix C Scanner Settings Imager Settings Appendix B Imager amp Camera Settings Troubleshooting on page 2 15 provides some helpful suggestions should the scan fail Scanner types include Long Range reads large 1D barcodes 55 mil at long distances up to 3m Standard Range High Performance reads damaged or low contrast regular 1D barcodes 5 55mil at medium distances up to 1m Extended Range reads regular 1D barcodes 5 55mil at short to medium distances 1m as well as large 1D barcodes e g 55 mil at long distances 1D Image
152. e can be an issue on reflective media such as plastic coated barcodes just as glare is an issue for photographers When pointing at a shiny surface either shift the barcode to the side or top or angle the barcode so that the glare reflects away from the imager scanner Most imagers take several snap shots of the barcode in order to decode it It is normal for the LEDs to flash two or three times Hold the unit steady between flashes to improve decode performance e Turn the hand held computer on Wait until the unit has booted up completely e Aim at the barcode and press the scan key or the trigger Hold the trigger until a successful or failed scan result is obtained e When the scan button or trigger is pressed a red oval shaped light the framing marker is displayed Centre the framing marker in the field either in the centre of the barcode you want to scan or in the centre of the area in which multiple barcodes are to be scanned The illumination LEDs will flash typically several times and a picture of the barcode is taken Windows Embedded CE 6 0 Navigating in Windows Embedded CE and Applications Graphic user interfaces such as Windows Embedded CE for portable devices and desktop Windows Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows 8 etc utilize point and click navigation An equivalent keyboard shortcut is also available for every point and click action Windows Embedded CE supports the same point and click user interface an
153. e eee 3 59 formatting entire 0 0 cee eee 3 59 formatting partition 0 0 0 e eee eee 3 61 messages scan Indicator cc eee 3 53 scanner warning message 3 53 Scan Result nananana PA PP 3 53 microphone adjustments nannan anaana 3 75 microphone gain adjustment 3 38 microSD Card inserting 2 0008 2 12 Microsoft ActiveSync aaa 3 18 Microsoft Soft Input Panel SIP 3 27 Minimum Cancel Time 008 C 4 C 7 Mobile Device Center Windows setting up 3 19 Model RA2070 radio a E 8 modem information WWAN G 11 modem using VPN clients 00 G 6 modifier keys 0 0 ccc ee ees 2 4 OCN AE UPSET PP PA EG 2 5 One Shot Mode aa 3 30 UIOCKING APA 2 5 Motion Predefined preset B 3 mounting partitions 0 ce eee 3 61 Multiple Beep Tones a 3 53 N NAM AA 3 83 Narrowband statistics SCrEEN 1 ee eee J 6 Narrowband radio setup 0 000 cee eee J 1 network connection monitoring 3 85 non incendive Omnii XT15ni 0 l 1 0 Omnii 0 slice CA E 3 model numbers 00000e ee eens xiii F 1 specifications sma kas PAPAG vevoteseadesceechede de E 1 Omnii RT15 specifications
154. e file system The Flash Disk is preserved e Press and hold down the FN key the Enter Power button and the SCAN key simultaneously for a minimum of six seconds The Omnii displays the Boot to BooSt menu e On an alpha keyboard type clean e Ona numeric keyboard type 25326 Boot to BooSt If you choose Boot to BooSt the BooSt menu is loaded e Press and hold down the FN key the Enter Power button and the SCAN key for a minimum of four seconds Basic Operation 1 7 e Press 1 to launch the OS Performing a Hard Reset AN IMPORTANT This procedure is recommended as a last resort when all other methods fail To execute a hard reset e Remove the battery e Using a coin or other conductive item connect pins 5 and 6 of the battery contacts for at least six seconds e Replace the battery and power Omnii on The terminal will boot as if from a cold reset Attaching Carrying Accessories Zebra recommends that a carrying accessory a hand strap be installed on the Omnii before use For detailed information please see Carrying and Protective Accessories on page 4 3 Calibrating the Touchscreen J NOTE The touchscreen function can be turned off see Touch on page 3 63 The Omnii touchscreen feature is factory calibrated and ready to go however over time the touchscreen s operating parameters may change and it may need to be recalibrated for correct operation Refer to Cali brating the Touchscreen
155. e following accessories can be ordered for your Omnii Description Model Number AC Wall Adaptor ST1050 or ST1050 AR Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor ST3113 Snap Module Charger Only ST4000 Snap Module USB Host Client plus Charger ST4001 Snap Module DE9M powered serial plus Charger ST4005 Snap Modules NOTE The Snap Modules are shipped with their own quick start guide Omnii Snap Modules Quick Start Guide PN 8000220 The guide should be reviewed for additional information and updates Snap Modules are mobile power chargers for the Omnii They are compatible with the AC wall adaptor Model ST1050 or ST1050 AR and the Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor Model ST3113 Three types of Snap Modules are available e Model ST4000 Charger only variant powers and charges the hand held e Model ST4001 USB variant powers and charges the hand held It provides communications via USB 1 1 2 0 Host and USB 2 0 Client connectors and provides a DC IN port When attached to the Omnii it allows ActiveSync or Windows Mobile Device Center connectivity with your PC and the use of a USB device such as a USB memory key or supported peripheral e Model ST4005 Serial variant provides a powered DE9M serial connector It powers and charges the Omnii and provides serial communications to tethered devices The DE9M connector is capable of speeds up to 115 200 bps Pin 9 is reserved for 5V power out and is defaulted to off To enable power to this port
156. e last user action keypress or scan trigger J NOTE Tapping in the check box next to When using external power keep the backlight always ON forces the keypad backlight to remain on when the unit is operating with external power Keyboard One Shot Modes e In the Keyboard Properties dialog box open the One Shots tab Keyboard Properties OK xd Repeat Backlight One Shots m One Shot Modes alt fOneshotjLock F shift flock Ctrl OneShot S Y hi Oneshot Lock l EN OneShot flock The options in this tab allow you to determine how modifier keys on your Omnii behave For each modifier key ALT SHIFT CTRL FN and SYM you have the following options in the drop down menu Lock OneShot and OneShot Lock J NOTE Keep in mind that checking the taskbar lets you know whether or not these keys are locked on For example if the FN key is locked on the taskbar at the bottom of the screen displays it underlined If this key is displayed without the underline in the taskbar you ll know that the key is not locked It will become inactive following a key press A N IMPORTANT Once you ve assigned a One Shot mode to a modifier key you need to tap on the OK button at the top of the tab to activate your selection Lock If you choose Lock from the drop down menu pressing a modifier key once locks it on until you press the modifier key a second time to unlock or turn it off OneShot If you c
157. e linear 1D stacked linear matrix true 2D and postal barcodes A Demonstration Application is provided to demonstrate how the imager works Refer to for details Required Applets In order to configure imaging the Manage Triggers applet must be present in the Control Panel along with the Imagers applet J NOTE The Imagers icon is only displayed when the appropriate imager is installed in your Omnii If there is an imager installed but this icon is not present additional software ICS may need to be installed To enable a newly installed imager press and hold down the FN key and the Enter Power key simultaneously for a minimum of three seconds Presets There are two methods that can be used to configure an imager using the magers applet e Use a predefined preset e Create a custom preset based on a predefined preset AN IMPORTANT Itis strongly recommended that a predefined preset is used whenever possible Each predefined preset contains a coherent group of settings that are known to work together in the intended environment In almost all situations at least one of the predefined presets results in a satisfactory outcome A preset is a group of exposure and image correction settings Each preset configures the imager for a specific purpose such as barcode decoding or image capture B 2 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Presets also allow easier and faster configuration of the imager afte
158. e nee 2 20 RUN a 2 24 SEALS e AA yee ewes 2 23 Shutdown 0 a 2 24 system tray aaa 2 22 task manager a 2 22 Statistics screen AA J 6 Stop Bits port replicator 00 3 57 stylus touch pen USINg 0 cee eee 2 16 Stylus Properties cee eee 3 62 Double tap stylus sensitivity 3 62 Surface ClOSSY AA PEE B 3 Suspend Shutdown menu 0 eee 2 24 Suspend Timeout 0 0 cee eee 3 41 swap time for battery 0 0 0 0 0c ce eee eens 2 1 panes tee aye aa Oe T EE ae ener oe So oe ech a ae 2 5 symbologies barcode 3 51 C 1 displaying type of barcode 3 53 Symbol SE4500 imager specifications D 10 Symbol SE4600 imager specifications D 13 Symbol Soft Input Panel figure 2 5 System Properties c eee eee 3 63 System Properties heater components F 10 system WAY us aam 0G AKA haha kA Kaha daka AA DAA KAA 2 22 T TANGY 5 60 PAA r 2 4 target dot duration of C 3 C 9 taskbar onscreen indicators Index VillOmnit Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide 802 11 radio signal quality 2 11 AC power 0 a 2 11 Daey APAPAP AAP ieee 2 11 docking deVICES 0 cee 2 12 modifier keys 0 aaa 2 11 WWAN radio signal quality
159. e network settings J NOTE Keep in mind that some services may not be supported by your network or they may not have been subscribed to e Tap on the service you want to enable The service dialog boxes allow you to tailor your available services to meet your requirements Voicemail Access lf your service includes Voicemail choosing this option for the first time displays a screen in which you can enter your voice mail provider phone number File Menu Phonebook Management Tapping on the File menu provides access to your Phonebook Phonebook The Phonebook allows you to store frequently used phone numbers When no numbers have been added to your phonebook the only command available to you is New Entry Phonebook Phonebook Version D 4 ae Sl To add a new phone number to your phonebook e Choose New Entry in the drop down menu and tap on Execute Configuration 3 75 Phonebook Entry Name Number Store in SIM Save New Entry iy e Type the name corresponding to the phone number you want to add e Press Tab and type the phone number you want to store e Tap in the check box next to Store in SIM to save the phone number there or leave this check box blank if you prefer not to store the number on the SIM card e Tap on the Execute button to save the phone number in your Phonebook Phonebook entries are saved even after you exit Wireless WAN Once you ve added a phone
160. e of a program folder or document and Windows will open it for YOU Open Shutdown The Shutdown menu includes these options Suspend Warm Reset and Cold Reset My Device Ply WiFi Connect Documents U v Recycle Bin PartnerUp Yi E Warm Reset J kg old Reset Suspend The Suspend option suspends the Omnii immediately This is equivalent to turning the hand held off Warm Reset The Warm Reset option resets the hand held leaving all saved files and registry settings intact Any unsaved data is lost Cold Reset The Cold Reset option resets the hand held Any files not stored in permanent memory are lost however the registry settings are saved Getting To Know Your Omnii 2 25 The Kiosk Desktop Shell The appearance and actions of the desktop can be changed by tapping on the Kiosk Shell icon on your desktop which activates the Kiosk shell J NOTE The Omnii will be reset if you choose to switch shells Figure 2 9 Switch to Kiosk Shell Kiosk Shell Switching the Kiosk Shell requires a device reset All unsaved data will be lost Switch the Shell and reset now After resetting the Omnii the desktop appearance will be very different The programs are accessed with finger or stylus taps and swipes If there are more applications than shown on one screen a white animated dot will be present on the side of the screen in the direction of the next set of icons Swiping the screen to that direction
161. e talkie style Push to Talk VoIP over WiFi or WWAN e Vibration feedback Wireless Connectivity e Integrated Bluetooth V2 0 EDR e Integrated 802 11a b g n WiFi e Bluetooth coexistence e CCX v4 e Optional SIRF Ill GPS Receiver e Optional GPS GPRS EDGE WWAN radio e Optional GPS GPRS EDGE with UMTS HSPA WWAN radio e Optional RA1202 Narrowband radio J NOTE 802 11b g and Bluetooth are available simultaneously The following figures illustrate the main features of the Omnii for detailed views please see Omnii Features on page 1 1 About This Guide xv Figure1 Omnii XT15 and RT15 Alphanumeric Variants Omnii XT15 Omnii RT15 59 Key ABC Keyboard 55 Key ABC Keyboard Figure2 Omnii XT15f Freezer Variants Alphanumeric Numeric Omni Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Manual Figure3 Bottom View Docking Connector Figure4 Top View Scanner Window Laser Aperture Regulatory Labels Figure5 Laser Warning Label A WARNING Using controls or adjustments or performing procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation exposure MODEL No 7545 1003838A This label is attixed below the scanner window Figure6 SE955 Laser Warning Label MODEL No 7545 lt L co o gt wo co o o Figure SE965 and SE4500 Laser Warning Label MODEL No 7545 Figure8 LED Radiation Notice Label MODEL No 1003837A Figure9 SE4600 Laser Warning
162. e the cursor Arrow keys Open file folder or icon Enter Exit amp Save Enter Close Exit amp Do Not Save ESC Navigate Dialog Boxes TAB To move cursor up SHIFT TAB To display the contents of the next tab in a dialog box CTRL TAB Select Radio Button Press Button SPACE Go to Start Menu Windows Keep in mind that unlike a desktop computer the Omnii does not support key chording pressing two keys at the same time You must press one key followed by the next in sequence 2 18 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide The Windows Classic Shell Startup Desktop When the Omnii boots up the default startup desktop Windows Classic Shell is displayed Any applications stored in the Startup folder start up immediately lt J NOTE The startup folder is located in Windows StartUp and Flash Disk StartUp Figure 2 5 Omnii Windows Classic Shell Startup Desktop war Ed My wWiFiConnect Documents J y Recycle Bin PartnerUp A Internet Explorer a9 Microsoft Remote WordPad Desktop To access desktop icons e Double tap on the icon to open a window or in the case of an application icon launch an application On the keyboard e Use the arrow keys to highlight the icon and press Enter to launch the highlighted icon J NOTE lf the arrow keys do not highlight the desktop icons the desktop may not be selected Press Win dows to display the Start Menu and select Desktop
163. e there is an active connection e g a voice call If the status in the main window shows No network found or Searching for network then typically only Batt and Temp are available For the status Emergency calls only MCC MNC LAC CID and BCCH may be available For the GSM 1800 MHz and GSM 1900 MHz bands it may not be possible to convert the ARFCN for BCCH and TCH to a frequency because the channel numbers overlap This can be overcome by enabling only the GSM bands used by a particular network i e either GSM 1800MHz or GSM 1900 MHz is disabled If the network uses frequency hopping during GSM voice calls then hopping is displayed in the TCH field User Interface Wireless WAN File MM SMS Voice Data Network Security Data Configuration Sign Driver Mode Modem Info F User Interface gt Taskbar AT Temna Sounds Rx TX a bytes ee D gt Bon O dhl Taskbar Choosing Taskbar displays a dialog box in which you can determine which Wireless WAN icons will be displayed in the taskbar OK x Configure TaskBar Icons Enable New SMS icon Enable Voice Dialer icon Sounds Tapping on the Sounds option displays a dialog box in which you can customize which sounds your Omnii will emit and when these sounds will be played Configure Sounds OK Data Play connect disconnect sound SMS Play new message notification startup way Voice Play ringtone Ring wav Wireless Wide Area Network
164. ection on page 4 15 AN IMPORTANT Use IEC 320 C13 power cords approved by Zebra with the ground pin connected to a proper earth grounded receptacle Check with a qualified electrician if you are uncertain of your receptacle grounding The ST4004 supplies DC power to enable the Omnii internal fast charger Normally a full charge of the battery will take from 3 to 4 hours e Insert up to four Omnii computers into the docking station charging bays pressing down gently but firmly to seat them securely e During the charge the Omnii LED slow flashes green e When the battery finishes charging the LED turns solid green e To remove the Omnii push down on the release mechanism on the front face of the docking bay The hand held will detach from the docking bay release arms and can be pulled up and out J NOTE Battery charging continues whether the Omnii is switched on or off Figure 4 13 nsertion and removal of Omnii computers Release arm Release mechanism Accessories 4 15 Installation Place the charger in an area that is free from excessive dirt dust water and other liquids and contaminants The ambient temperature must be in the range 0 C and 40 C 32 F to 104 F The docking station will not charge batteries outside of this temperature range For maximum performance it is recommended that the charger be operated at room temperature a temperature range between 18 C to 25 C 64 F to 77 F Connecting
165. ed ECI Decoder Setting this parameter to on enables the scanner to interpret any Extended Channel Interpretations ECIs supported by the scanner This parameter has no effect on symbols that were not encoded using ECls If this parameter is set to off and a symbol that was encoded using an ECI escape is scanned the scanner transmits the ECI escape followed by the uninterpreted data The barcode symbologies for the scanner are listed in table following table Decoded Internal Barcode Symbologies Code 39 UPC EAN Shared Settings Trioptic Code disabled Code 93 disabled Code 128 Codabar disabled EAN 13 MSI Plessey disabled EAN 8 Interleaved 2 of 5 disabled UPC A Discrete 2 f 5 disabled UPC E Gs1 DataBar disabled Decoded HHP To configure imagers please see Appendix B Imager amp Camera Settings Decoded Intermec ISCP Barcodes Jecoded Intermec ISC Scanner Settings Scanner Ana Tock E Options H Advanced Options H Code 39 H code 128 UPC EAN Shared Settings H Code 93 disabled 7 To change a setting press space or double click Scanner Settings C 7 e Tap on the Scanner drop down menu and choose Decoded Intermec ISCP Decoded ISCP Options Laser On Time The value assigned to this parameter determines how long the laser will remain on when the scan button or trigger is pressed Double tapping on this parameter displays a dialog box in
166. ed disconnected error messages and so on Certificates This program provides access to the Certificate Manager and Stores The Certificate Manager displays the certificates in the Windows Certificate Store and allows you to import delete and view these certificates Omnii checks that the certificate has been digitally signed by a certification authority that the Omnii explicitly trusts This option is used in conjunction with 802 1x authentication to enhance Omnii security e Inthe Control Panel choose the Certificates icon 4 wy Certificates Your Omnii has certificates preinstalled in the computer My Certificates is the repository for the device s personal certificate store Other Authorities is the repository for the intermediate certificate store and Trusted Authorities is the repository for the Trusted Root certificate store Certificates Trusted Authorities Lists the certificates trusted by you Entrust net Certifi Entrust net Secur Equifax Secure Ce GlobalSign Root cix You can import or remove certificates and view certificate information for any listing including names dates serial numbers etc For a detailed description about Certificate setup for both the server and client side devices Omnii Hand Held Computers refer to the following website http technet microsoft com en us windowsserver dd448615 aspx Compass Like all compasses the Omnii digital compass indicates the direction in whic
167. ed mobility J NOTE lf you are using a hand strap there is no need to remove it before installing the Snap Module since the Omnii hand strap slot will still be accessible AC Wall Adaptor Models ST1050 and ST1050 AR The AC wall adaptor available for your docking station or Snap Module allows you to operate your hand held using AC power while charging the battery inserted in the unit The ST1050 is shipped with adaptor plugs suitable for use in the following regions United Kingdom Australia Europe and North America e Choose the adaptor plug that is suitable for use in your country Slide the adaptor plug into the Universal AC power supply snapping it into place These two pieces coupled together are referred to as an AC wall adaptor e Insert the DC plug into the docking station or Snap Module jack e Plug the pronged end into an AC outlet Figure 4 7 5T1050 AC Wall Adaptor and plugs The ST1050 AR wall adapter is kitted with an AC plug that is suitable for use in Argentina Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor Model ST3113 The Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor allows you to power your hand held and recharge your battery using power drawn from your vehicle s automotive power outlet when used in conjunction with a Snap Module Figure 4 8 57317113 Vehicle Power Outlet Adaptor i DC power plug e Attach a Snap Module to the base of the hand held Refer to Snap Modules on page 4 5 if you require further details e Insert the
168. ed to need to define command line parame ters for your application If you don t want to assign any parameters you can leave the Data field blank If for example you want to assign an application launch key to launch the WordPad application you can leave this field blank If you want to assign an application launch key that will open a specific document in the WordPad application you need to browse to and choose that document while the cursor is in the Data field e Tapon OK Configuration 3 7 App Launch Keys key Batra App Windows explore nk t Sai 2 e Ifyou need to Edit Remove or Add another App Launch Key you can do it from this final screen Other wise tap on OK to save your Application Launch Key e To launch the application you chose press the application key you assigned Bluetooth Setup Bluetooth is a global standard for wireless connectivity for digital devices and is intended for Personal Area Networks PAN The technology is based on a short range radio link that operates in the ISM band at 2 4 GHz When two Bluetooth equipped devices come within a 10 metre 32 ft range of each other they can establish a connection Because Bluetooth utilizes a radio based link it does not require a line of sight connection in order to communicate It is possible to communicate with a variety of Bluetooth peripherals including GSM GPRS handsets scan ners printers and so on We provides built in support for e
169. edueatebtonwecaced B 10 Removing a Custom Preset eeens oiir Ga B 11 Barcoding Menu Configuring Symbologies X aaa B 11 1911018 816 ENING saaa E E AA B 11 Filter Menu Manipulating Barcode Data A aa B 12 Omni Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Modifying a Barcode Setting 24am ma GAGANA NAY GA AG Translation Menu Configuring Rules Advanced MENU ssa pka ANG ABEL EEE D AUG NONG AA AANGAL File Locations for Captured Images Configuring Triggers AG Kee o RS a lalo SS AA RA Imager Barcode Symbologies 00 a Color Camera Barcode Symbologies Appendix C Scanner Settings NG Kee SL CA AA s167 1A r OPON AA APAN Restoring Default Settings Decoded Internal Scanners Decoded Internal Advanced Options a Decoded Internal Data Options H aaa Decoded ARR saa AA AA AA AA Decoded Intermec ISOP kana AA AA NAA AA AA Decoded CP OPUONS Kaka AA E Decoded ISCP Advanced Options 2 aaa Non Decoded SCAMS Lo ssis eane a E OE A A OOS AA AAH E AP AP O PAPANO Appendix D Internal Imager amp Scanner Specifications NS AA EEE E AREA E E SE955 Decode Zones 1001 1a Te Ot NAG AA UNAN AGA AA ANG Be FO LCG LONGS iro NAA AAO SE1224HP High Performance Scanner SE1224HP Decode ZONES ccccceccssecceeeseceeeceneceecececccsecceeeseeeseeetseeteecseeteees
170. ee from excessive dirt dust and contaminants The ambient temperature must be in the range 5 C to 39 C 41 F to 102 F The charger will not charge batteries outside of this temper ature range For maximum performance it is recommended that the charger be operated at room temperature a temperature range between 18 C to 25 C 64 F to 77 F The charger can consume up to 6 A at 120 VAC 3A at 240 VAC Check to ensure the mains circuit supplying the charger is adequate for this loading especially if several chargers are being powered from the same circuit After unpacking the unit 4 24 A Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide e Visually check the charger for damage e Install the IEC power cord and apply power IMPORTANT Use IEC 320 C13 power cords approved by Zebra with the ground pin connected to a proper earth grounded receptacle Check with a qualified electrician if you are uncertain of your receptacle grounding All charge indicators flash momentarily at power up to indicate that the charger is ready for operation If you choose to wall mount the charger detailed installation instructions are included in the Omnii 6 Slot Battery Charger ST3006 Quick Start Guide PN 8000204 included with the charger kit Be sure to locate the charger in an area where there is no risk of injury to persons walking in the vicinity Operator Controls The gang charger does not have operator controls or a pow
171. efer to The Kiosk Desktop Shell on page 2 25 resetting the unit is done solely by use of the keyboard shortcuts 1 6 Omni Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Cc mm io Ed 4 My Device few WiFiConnect Documents U y Recycle Bin PartnerUp CI Shortcuts r GF Settings paii ti Suspend kl Shutdown SJ Warm Reset FI a H Cold Reset Performing a Warm Reset During a warm reset running programs are halted The contents of the file system RAM Disk Flash Disk and the registry are preserved e Press and hold down the FN key and the Enter Power key simultaneously for a minimum of four seconds J NOTE You need to reset your Omnii after configuring the radio by switching between Windows Zero Config and WiFi Config Performing a Cold Reset A cold reset reinitializes all hardware All RAM including the RAM Disk is erased Non volatile storage such as the Flash Disk is preserved as is the file system To execute a cold reset e Press and hold down the SYM key the FN key and the Enter Power key simultaneously for a minimum of four seconds sf NOTE As part of the normal Windows Embedded CE cold boot process the screen may go blank for a few seconds after the splash screen loading bar reaches the end The desktop is displayed after a few moments Performing a Clean Start A clean start returns the Omnii to factory settings flushes the registry keys and deletes volatile storage and th
172. el No ST4004 AN IMPORTANT The quad docking station is shipped with its own quick start guide Omnii ST4004 Quad Docking Station Quick Start Guide PN 8000222 It is critical that it be reviewed for addi tional information and updates AN IMPORTANT When ordering a charger you must also order an IEC 320 IEC 60320 C13 power cord separately Figure 4 11 Front view y Za j HUB Y WO lt A Charging bays 4 S T A a NG fa BANN EY J wy ND kin ml NG Docking connectors 4 Figure 4 12 Rear view RJ45 Ethernet ports DC IN connector The ST4004 Quad Docking Station is designed to accept up to four Omnii hand held computers The docking station powers the units and their internal battery charger The docking station also connects up to four of the hand held computers to a 10 100 Base T Ethernet network and allows for Ethernet data transfer An additional Ethernet interface is available for connecting more docking stations downstream up to 4 on the same network 4 14 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Operator Controls The ST4004 has no operator controls or power switch Indicators The quad docking station is equipped with Ethernet activity and link LEDs see Figure 4 14 Ethernet network connection on page 4 15 Quad Docking Station Operation Charging the Omni Battery e Insert the DC power plug into the ST4004 rear DC IN connector see Figure 4 14 Ethernet network conn
173. eld Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide e Tapon Disable Auto IMPORTANT Automatic connection mode should not be used if applications other than the Wireless WAN user interface e g Connection Manager are expected to open and close connections If the automatic connection mode is enabled and another application closes the GPRS connection the WWAN user interface will immediately try to re establish the connection Use Virtual Serial Port If Use virtual serial port is enabled packet data connections are established through the virtual serial port of the WWAN driver rather than through the WWAN driver directly This check box should only be checked if certain third party VPN Virtual Private Network clients are used that do not work correctly otherwise The default setting is disabled unchecked NOTE The connection setup takes longer through the virtual serial port Enable Automatic Configuration In most cases the data connection is configured automatically and no user interaction is required This is true even if multiple SIM cards from different operators are used with the same device The connection parameters are adjusted automatically when a new SIM card is detected this may require a warm boot The connection parameters are retrieved from a database Manual configuration should be necessary only if e One or more parameters in the database are incorrect or a new operator is not yet in the database The database shoul
174. er On Time Aim Duration Power Mode Trigger Mode Bi directional Redundancy Symbology types lengths Data formatting Artificial 450 ft candles 4 844 Lux Sunlight 4 000 ft candles 86 112 Lux 1 26 mW SE1524ER Decode Zone A Short Range Small Codes Ww in om i Note Typical performance at 73 4 F 23 C 13 395 4 on high quality symbols oy t a a 8 20 3 h ii 4 10 2 oe sami O aaa AS 4 10 7 2 o Lami 72 0 a B 20 3 a 12 30 5 iiie 10 mil 4 340 d 50k 15 mil yno 5 0 Aral 96 0 AA AA a a a oo T in oO 20 40 0 100 cm D 5 6 101 6 15724 203 7 254 0 Depth of Field Omni Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide SE1524ER Decode Zone B Long Range Large Codes Note Typical performance at 73 4 F 23 C 72 1829 on hagh quality 5ymbols ee PE aT G 48 1219 oo 24 6510 5 seoe b UA m h Lh H fi Hi H i Jil li Pt i DEAN k 5 D amp 24 610 aaa 48 121 9 55 mil f2 102 9 15 0 el GO CG TO mil elective 367 0 j 100 mil reflective Sad O im O 140 240 60 480 BOO cm O 04 6 609 6 9714 24 1219 2 1524 0 Depth of Fiekd Mear range determined by degree of reflectivity and wich of bar code EV15 Imager Parameter Specification Light Source 3 617 nm highly visible LED Reading Distance Up to 90 cm 35 in Symbologies UPC E8A EAN RSS Code 39 Code 128 UCC EAN 128 ISBN ISBT Interleaved Matrix Indus
175. er and the current setting like the sample screen following is displayed Enter value from O to 127 p chars Type a value in the field provided e Fora parameter that takes a single character Highlight the parameter and then press the SPACE key or double click the parameter The following screen is displayed Prefix Char Press the Key to Insert Press ESC for the default value e When you ve completed your edits tap on OK Imager amp Camera Settings B 13 Translation Menu Configuring Rules Translation rules enable the automatic processing of barcode data Up to 10 cases can be defined each consisting of up to 10 sequential rules J NOTE Changes made to the translations configuration using the Scanner Control Panel program are syn chronized with changes made here Changes made in either place affect both translation tables e Tap on Start gt Settings gt Control Panel e Tap on the Imagers icon and then tap on the Translations tab Imager amp Camera Settings Ok x Barcoding Filter Translations Adv 4 ui H Case 2 empty H Case 3 empty H Case 4 empty H Case 5 empty H Case 6 empty H Case 7 empty H Case 8 empty H Case 9 empty H Case 10 tempty To change a setting press edit button oF space or double click For instructions on adding editing and removing translation rules refer to Translations on page 3 54 Advanced Menu File Locations for C
176. er switch There is no dedicated indicator light to show that the charger is powered but the charge slot LEDs will light up briefly when first applying power Charge Indicators Each battery charge slot is equipped with four LEDs to indicate the charge status of the battery When the Omnii batteries are inserted in the charger the colour and behaviour of the LEDs associated with the charging bays in use indicate the status of the charge Charge LED Behaviour Function OFF No battery detected Solid Green Battery charging complete Each LED represents 25 battery capacity Flashing Green Charge in progress Each LED represents 25 battery capacity Flashing Yellow Battery is not charging due to out of temperature conditions Solid Red Unable to read battery charging timeout or non Zebra battery Charging Batteries e Install the battery with the battery contacts facing the charger Slide the battery between the guide rails until it lightly latches in place The 4 LED bar for the battery bay shows 25 charger per LED A flashing green LED shows charging is under way The LED directly below the slot in which a battery is inserted lights up immediately If the battery tempera ture is outside 0 C to 40 C 32 F to 104 F the LED flashes yellow until the temperature is acceptable A fully discharged battery will normally take 4 5 hours to charge At full capacity it turns solid green When the battery is fully charged the charger s
177. esents the F key VK_RETURN represents the Enter key etc perform a function e g turn the scanner on change volume etc or run a macro There are three different tables of scancode mappings the Normal table the FN table and the SYM table J NOTE When using the Mobile Devices SDK Developers Guide PN 8100016 note that the ORANGE key is interchangeable with the SYM key Similarly in the context of the scancode mapping tables Orange is interchangeable with SYM The Normal table defines unmodified key presses the FN table defines key presses that occur when the FN modifier is on the SYM table defines key presses that occur when the SYM modifier is on The default mappings of these scancodes can be overwritten for each of these three tables using the Scancode Remap ping tab accessed from the Keyboard Properties dialog box 3 34 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Keyboard Properties OK Scancode Remapping Normal O sim JEN ads The first column in the Scancode Remapping tab displays the scancodes in hexadecimal If the scancode is remapped to a virtual key that virtual key is displayed in the next column labelled V Key A virtual key that is Shifted or Unshifted is displayed in the third column labelled Function If the scancode is remapped to a function or a macro the first and second columns remain blank while the third column contains the function name or macro key number e g Macro
178. ever been calibrated or if you find that the stylus pointer is not accurate when you tap on an item follow the directions below e Choose the Calibration tab and then tap on the Recalibrate button Stylus Properties OK E Double Tap Calibration If your device isn t A responding properly to your taps you may need to recalibrate your screen To start the recalibration process tap Recalibrate e Follow the directions in the Calibration tab to recalibrate the screen You will be prompted to save the cali bration data If you do not receive a prompt to save your data there could be a problem with your touchscreen hardware Contact your representative Configuration 3 63 Touch This tab allows you to disable the touchscreen e Choose the Touch tab Select the check box next to Disable the touch panel System Properties This program identifies the computer software and hardware components indicating which components are installed their identification version or part numbers and whether they are enabled or disabled e In Control Panel choose the System Properties icon System Properties System Properties Ge Harcware H Data Capture E GFS HAARAAN Info H Display H Keyboard l Bluetooth E WANE i E Dock E System Software E Software E Components Psion CSPs a BO ah all amp s e By choosing the Export button you can create a log SystemProperties xml of your
179. eys perform special custom defined functions within an application These keys are accessed by pressing one of the dedicated function keys on the keyboard or through the appropriate SHIFT or FN key sequence depending on the keyboard variant being used Alphanumeric Keyboard Function Keys The Alphanumeric keyboards are equipped with up to thirty function keys including those function keys that are colour coded in blue print above the alpha keys or function keys depending on your keyboard To access the blue function keys press the FN key followed by the appropriate alpha or function key Function keys F1 through F24 can be used with the Windows Embedded CE operating system or another application The additional function keys F25 through F30 along with the macros are not used as part of the Windows Embedded CE operating system Numeric Keyboard Function Keys The Numeric keyboards are equipped with up to 24 function keys including those function keys that are colour coded in white print above the function keys Function keys F25 through F30 can only be accessed by remapping another key to that function To access the white function keys press the SHIFT key followed by the appropriate function key Macro Keys IMPORTANT Refer to Keyboard Macro Keys on page 3 31 for details about creating macros Several of the Omnii keyboards are equipped with a series of macro keys that can be programmed to replace frequently used ke
180. f you are restoring a profile that is a backup or Full Clone the computer will clean reset first if the profile is a Settings Only Clone it will not e Set for AutoRestore creates a profile that is automatically restored following a cold reset or a clean start The profile is stored in the Flash Disk TotalRecall folder IMPORTANT After setting an autorestore profile that profile will overwrite any other profile already placed in the Flash Disk TotalRecall folder In an autorestore Total Recall only restores the profile located in the Flash Disk TotalRe call folder If you store your profile anywhere else it will not be restored The following profile options are available Profile successfully copied to Flash Disk TotalRecall e Upload to A R C uploads the profile to the Active Remote Configuration server After you tap on Send a message will come up either confirming that the upload was complete or that the connection to the server failed Upload profile to A R C server A B C Server Nada port ht 10 10 10 10 0001 Profile Name Flash Disk Default1 pfl Ka Progress Po e Clone to USB writes a clone of the profile to the USB drive After you tap on the button a message will come up either confirming that the USB drive is ready for deployment or that it is not available e When you are ready to install the profile on another unit turn on the next computer to be cloned and insert the U
181. following clamp base sizes e MT3505 e MT3507 Model Rail Width MT3505 Clamp base for 4 or 12 RAM arm 2 max width MT3507 Clamp base for 4 or 12 RAM arm 3 max width MT3509 Rail base for 4 or 12 RAM arm 1 1 4 to 1 7 8 MT3510 Rail base for 4 or 12 RAM arm 2 to 2 1 2 Figure 4 17 Clamp and Rail Bases Torque to 26 in Ibs T i LOWER aA BASE bo NUT LAP 3 NUT 74 g7 CLAMP Hg Di CLAMP Sr vr J BASE iy F BASE A NA JERS re it JA LOWER Nya LOWER PA BASE BASE TY fi 8 REW i Ah SCREW M13509 MI5510 IMPORTANT Plate bases are not recommended for forklift mounting solutions If a plate rather than a clamp base is used you will need to penetrate into the structure of the vehicle a process requiring additional hardware The following plate bases are available e VESA Plate MT3501 e Circular Plate MT3502 Accessories 4 19 Figure 4 18 73325 Standard Arm kit with Omnii Vehicle Cradle Clamp and Rail Bases Torque to 26 in Ibs ST1002 Cradle powered MT3326 Bracket To accommodate the service loop of the connector cable leave a 4 clearance at the bottom of the cradle Leave a 7 minimum clearance at the top of the cradle to allow easy removal of the hand held Refer to the detailed assembly instructions that are packaged with the cradle when selecting a mounting location Omnii Vehicle Cradles Quick Start Guide PN 8000221
182. fter 4 minutes the terminal may reboot Removing the Battery Pack e If your unit is equipped with a hand strap unhook it from the base of the battery e Press the two buttons at the sides of the compartment simultaneously and slide the battery out Installing the Battery Pack e Slide the charged battery with the contoured plastic facing you into the unit with the contacts matching position and the guide tabs moving into the corresponding slots at the base of the compartment Click both sides of the battery into place A A A Basic Operation 1 5 e f your computer is equipped with a hand strap re attach the clip to the slot at the base of the battery e Switch the unit on see Switching the Omnii On and Off on page 1 5 Switching the Omni On and Off Follow the instructions below for your Omnii If your keyboard has a power button 55 and 66 key keyboards only press that instead of the FN Enter Power key combinations described Switching the Omnii On e Press and hold down the Enter Power key for at least one second When the unit is turned off normally it automatically enters a power saving Suspend state When the Omnii is switched on from the suspend state within a few seconds operation resumes in the screen in which you were working prior to turning the computer off IMPORTANT lf your Omnii fails to power up consider the following troubleshooting options The battery may be overheated
183. ger a Double click 0 1000 msec E Show all modules Adding Editing and Removing Triggers For instruction about adding editing and removing triggers refer to Manage Triggers on page 3 36 Imager amp Camera Settings B 15 Barcode Symbologies There are two sets of barcode symbologies one for mager and one for Color Camera To display the barcodes available e Inthe mager amp Camera Settings screen go to the Barcoding tab In the Camera Presets drop down menu at the top of the mager amp Camera Settings screen choose Imager or Color Camera depending on which set of barcodes you want to work with Imager amp Camera Settings OK ng Imaging Barcoding Filter Translat lt Camera Presets 17 cancre Imager amp Camera Settings OK age Default LA Imaging Barcoding Filter Translat LP pAg sA Imager Presets Jin sqey Glossy surface Default Low light eral MOBO Barcode Presets Glossy surface My Default Factory Default mew _Add Remove Activate All Barcode Presets Linear Linear and PDF417 Factory Default Mew Ada Remove getwate R Read W Write A Active ma and Fo _ m Mew Ladd W a Bemovel move activate Goto the Barcode Presets Imager amp Camera Settings OK Imaging Barcoding Translat gt Imager Presets 3yr Default Low light Low power Glossy surface view Add Remove Activate Barcode Presets Linear and P
184. gnize the device connected to the Port Repli cator 9 pin COM5 Power COM6 only Pin 9 on the Omnii COM6 is reserved for 5V power out and is defaulted to OFF This parameter must be set to ON to enable power to a Snap Module or Vehicle cradle Baud Double tapping on this parameter displays a pop up window in which you can choose an appropriate rate of data transfer Figure 3 6 Port Baud Rates Data Bits This parameter determines the number of data bits included in each asynchronous data byte Most devices use 8 bit data bytes Double tapping on this option displays a pop up window in which you can choose either 7 or 8 data bits Parity This parameter determines the type of parity checking used on the data going through the port replicator port Double tapping on this option displays a pop up window in which you can choose the appropriate parity Stop Bits This parameter specifies the number of stop bits 1 1 5 or 2 used for asynchronous communication 3 58 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Trigger On Sequence And Trigger Off Sequence If a SICK scanner connected to an Omnii port requires a serial stream of data bytes to trigger the scanner on and another to trigger the scanner off the Trigger On Sequence and Trigger Off Sequence parameters allow you to define these serial streams Trigger On Sequence far o foo foo fo fo fo ox Double tapping on Trigger On Sequence or Trigger
185. h the unit is pointed If you find that the compass is inaccurate you may need to calibrate it e Inthe Control Panel choose the Compass icon Compass 3 18 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide e Tap on the Calibrate button and follow the directions to calibrate the compass Make certain that you perform the figure 8 indicated in the instructions in a fairly wide loop to better ensure successful calibration Ka Pag Yil 6 11 Compass Calibrati KI ey KE 2 52 Ci To calibrate turn the device in a figure 8 until this message disappears When the compass recalibration is complete a message appears on the Omnii screen indicating successful calibration J NOTE The accuracy of the digital compass is affected by the following a close proximity to large magnets or metal structures and b internal scanner imager activation Data Transfer between Omnii and a PC Data transfer options vary slightly depending on the type of operating system installed in your PC For Windows XP SP2 operating systems or earlier Microsoft ActiveSync connectivity software can be used to connect your Omnii to PCs If the Windows Vista Windows 7 or later operating system is installed in your PC ActiveSync is not required to transfer data between your Omnii and your PC By using a Snap Module or Desktop Docking Station with your Omnii you can connect to a PC with a cable to e View Omnii files from Windows Exp
186. hat are behind glass or inside the plastic window of an envelope Image Capture Predefined Presets Imaging Menu M The following presets enable successful image capture in almost all conditions NOTE Itis recommended that the default preset be used whenever possible Default This preset works in a wide range of conditions It is optimized for a normal office lighting about 300 Lux Motion This preset uses a shorter exposure time so as to freeze motion Low Light Near This preset is designed for dark conditions it uses a longer exposure time and includes the flash Using the Imagers Applet Configuring the Image Capture Presets Imaging Menu To configure the image capture presets open the dialog box as follows e Tap on Start gt Settings gt Control Panel e Tap on the Imagers icon and if it s not already selected tap on the Imaging tab ie lt gt magets B 4 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide The following screen is displayed Figure B 1 maging Menu Imager amp Camera Settings OK Imaging Barcading Filter Translat L Camera Presets boise Camera Low light near d W Write 4 4ctive This window lists all the presets both predefined and custom Presets are identified as follows e Predefined presets are marked as R read only e Custom presets are marked as RW read and write e One preset either predefined or custom is marked as A active Selecti
187. he phone number entry field Send button tap to dial the number you typed Backspace button tap to erase characters in the phone number entry field End button tap to disconnect the phone call Mute button During a phone call tap to mute sound transmission Tap again to restore sound button When making an international call the sign can be used as a universal substitute for any international dialing prefix and is guaranteed to work worldwide The entry sequence must be as fol lows country code followed by phone number Example A standard phone number 011 36 30 275 28466 using the substitution is typed as follows 36 30 275 28466 The symbol replaces the universal dialing prefix 011 Sending and Ending Calls Using the Omnii Keyboard The 55 key and the 66 key Omnii keyboards come equipped with phone keys each has a Talk and an End key on the physical keyboard e Press the Talk key to answer a call or to display the onscreen phone keypad so you can initiate a call e Press the End key to terminate a phone call Omni Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Talk key End key Receiving an Incoming Call To answer an incoming call e Tap on the Talk button it s labelled with a green phone receiver Voice Menu This menu allows you to manage calls view your call history and if required assign a call forwarding service to your hand held Wo le Call Management Call Li
188. he scanner is turned off once the scanner trigger or button is released This gives the scanner a minimum amount of time to complete its current decode before the scan is cancelled when you quickly trigger on off Power Mode This parameter is a power saving option Tapping on it displays a screen listing two power mode options Continuous Power and Low Power In Continuous Power mode the scanner is always on waiting for a trigger pull or serial communication In Low Power mode the scanner is in a suspend state drawing minimal power until a trigger pull or serial communication wakes it Keep in mind that while this option is more suitable for battery powered applications there will be a slight delay while the scanner powers up to scan a barcode Low Power Timeout To extend laser life you can select the time the scanner remains active following a successful decode The scanner wakes from low power mode when a barcode is scanned a successful decode restores normal flashing This is only used if the unit s Trigger Mode has been changed to Continuous On If the unit is used in a fixed mount this parameter might be used but not if the unit is used as a hand held When you double tap on this parameter a dialog box is displayed in which you can choose a value of 30 sec 7 min 2 min or 3 min J NOTE This parameter is only used if the Trigger Mode has been set to Continuous On and the Omnii is mounted in a fixed position otherwise
189. highlight the network you want to modify and tap on the Configure button to display the Wireless Properties dialog box e Connect button To force connection to a specific existing network highlight the network to which you want the Omnii to connect and tap on the Connect button Wireless Zero Config Settings H 3 Figure H 3 Wireless Information SDI086861 Wireless Information To add a new network double click dd New in the list view or click dd New button Y Add New a 123 preferred a abc preferred blueman preferr Status Associated with blueman Signal Strength No Signal Notify me when new wireless networks are available This tab lists available networks any access points that are broadcasting an SSID and it lists preferred networks networks that you have configured Since access points are generally secure they will most likely not be listed here By default the Omnii attempts to connect to preferred networks This behaviour can be changed by enabling Automatically connect to non preferred networks in the Advanced dialog box see Figure H 6 Advanced Wireless Settings on page H 5 e To add a new configuration tap on the Add New button A blank Wireless Properties dialog box is displayed Wireless Properties Figure H 4 Wireless Properties Wireless Properties OK Network name SSID o This is an ad hoc network wireless access points are not used Encr
190. hoose OneShot the modifier key remains active only until the next key is pressed OneShot Lock OneShot Lock allows you to combine these functions When you choose this option and you press the modifier key once it remains active only until the next key is pressed Configuration 3 31 If you press the modifier key twice it is locked on remaining active until the modifier key is pressed a third time to turn it off Keyboard Macro Keys e Inthe Keyboard Properties dialog box open the Macros tab Keyboard Properties OK Macros Unicode Mapping Scancol 4 PF Macro Key Sequence 17 A macro has 200 programmable characters or positions The macro keys can be programmed to replace frequently used keystrokes along with the function of executable keys including Enter BACKSPACE and DEL FN BACKSPACE function keys and arrow keys Recording and Saving a Macro You can program up to 6 physical macro keys depending on your keyboard layout You can also increase the number of virtual macro keys up to 15 using Scancode Remapping for details see Scancode Remapping on page 3 33 e In the Macro menu highlight a macro key number for example macro 1 to assign a macro to macro key M1 Choose the Record button A message screen is displayed instructing you to Enter Key Strokes to Record Keyboard Properties OK One Shots Macros Unicode mapp 4 LP Macro Key Sequence Enter Key Strokes to Recor
191. ht reflectance measured at 650 nm Tolerant to typical artificial indoor and natural outdoor direct sunlight lighting conditions Fluorescent Incandescent Mercury Vapor Sodium Vapor LED 450 Ft Candles 4 844 Lux Sunlight 8000 Ft Candles 86 111 Lux 22 F to 140 F 30 C to 60 C 40 F to 158 F 40 C to 70 C Internal Imager 4 Scanner Specifications D 3 SE965 Decode Zones In cm 30 76 2 25 635 20 508 Note Typical performance at 73 4 F 23 C on high quality symbols Is 381 Ww i 10 316 Gg t 5s 127 h o o O f F 5 27 i e 10 254 d 12 5 mil C128 x7 TYE YS 15 38 1 u 75mi 12 10 mi Cocke 128 20 508 15 100 UPC 10 amma to 295 25 635 ame O_o eee 34 am a ANG FOO aOR 100 30 76 2 Reflective z Kostina Jesa sessi 2000 In 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 cm 0 127 254 38 1 50 8 635 762 889 106 1143 1270 1270 1524 Depth of Field Minimum distance determined by symbol length and scan angle Distances achieved using adaptive scanning mode D 4 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide SE1224HP High Performance Scanner Parameter SE1224HP Type Laser Class 2 Light Source Visible Laser Diode 650 nm Scan Rate 35 5 scans sec bi directional scan Angle Field of View 42 typical 30 narrow Scan Patterns Linear Minimum Print Contrast Minimum 25 absolute dark light reflectance measured at 650 nm Symbologies UPC EAN Code 128
192. i Config e WiFiConnect A R C 3 2 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Microsoft Software Windows CE 6 0 R3 is a 32 bit real time multitasking Operating System The OS features a small footprint with compatibility to port existing Win32 applications and Touch amp Gesture support Some of the major Windows CE 6 0 R3 components are e Control Panel where both our Advantage product and Microsoft applications are listed e Flash Lite e Internet Explorer Embedded e Microsoft WordPad e Remote Desktop Connection e Windows Explorer The Control Panel The Windows Embedded CE Control Panel provides a group of applications through which you can set a variety of system wide properties such as power keyboard sensitivity network configuration system backup desktop appearance and so on When the Omnii boots up the startup desktop Windows Classic Shell is displayed and any applications stored in the Startup folder start up immediately To access the Control Panel e Press the Windows icon to display the Start Menu e Tapon Settings gt Control Panel If you re using the keyboard e Press the Windows icon to display the Start Menu e Highlight Settings in Start Menu and press the RIGHT arrow key to highlight the Control Panel e Press the Enter key The Control Panel folder contains icons used in the setup of your Omnii Figure 3 1 Control Panel Icons p a File View App
193. i Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Total Recall Clone Options C Contacts and Email Info All _ Deleted System files DI Wi Fi O Selected Options O ops All files registry settings etc are cloned Managing Profiles You can view profiles and choose profile options from the menus in this section Viewing a Profile Tap on the Manage Profile button to see your list of profiles Highlight a profile and then you can choose to View the Profile Summary and go on to the next menu Profile Details List of profiles Profile Summary Profile Details Total Recall Total Recall Please select a profile from the list or Profile Details click browse Profile Summan Frofile version 12 H Added Files H CSP H Registry Flash Disk Defaulti pfl Cloning Disabled 72 files 0 DE Registry Profile Options e Tap on the Manage Profile button to see your list of profiles as shown above Highlight a profile and tap on the Next button to choose from options to restore or clone the profile You can choose from four profile options Restore Now Set for Autorestore Upload to A R C and Clone to USB Total Recall The following profile options are available Set for Autorestore Upload to A R C Clone to USB Tab to one of the above buttons for more help Configuration 3 67 e Next tap on the option button you want to use e Restore Now restores the profile immediately I
194. ications in warehouses ports and yards with a focus on real time wireless data transactions Barcode input methodolo gies are supported by a variety of available scanners Optimization for specific operational environments is also supported with a wide range of peripheral options and carrying accessories The Omnii XT 15f Freezer Variant combines modularity customizability and performance with added tech nology to resist condensation for use in cold condensing environments For details see Appendix F Omnii XT15f Freezer Variants J NOTE The Omnii Hand Held Computer is a body worn device and to maintain compliance with the FCC RF exposure guidelines use a Zebra approved carrying case Use of non approved accessories may violate FCC RF exposure guidelines 4 NOTE For product specifications refer to Appendix E Omnii Specifications About This Guide xili Model Variants Omnii RT15 Hand Held Computer rugged Model 7545XC Omnii XT15 Hand Held Computer extremely rugged Model 7545XA Omnii XT15f Freezer Variant Hand Held Computer extremely rugged Model 7545XT Processor and Memory Texas Instruments Sitara AM37xx ARM Processor 800 MHz OMAP3 compatible Flash ROM 1 GB RAM 512 MB 3 axis accelerometer Operating System Microsoft Windows Embedded CE 6 0 Bundled Applications Internet Explorer 6 Windows Mobile Device Center WordPad ActiveSync Supported Applications TekTerm Client Te
195. ice locks it on it appears underlined on the Taskbar Pressing the key once again unlocks it The TAB Key Typically the TAB key moves the cursor to the next field to the right or downward The ESC Key Generally this key is used as a keyboard shortcut to close the current menu dialog box or activity The SPACE Key The SPACE key is represented on the keyboard by a long low horizontal line contained by a small vertical line on each side Pressing this key inserts a blank space between characters In a Windows dialog box pressing the SPACE key enables or disables a check box The SCAN Key The Omnii is equipped with a single SCAN key on the keyboard and an extra SCAN button located on the left side of the unit SCAN keys activate the scanner beam For units that do not have internal scanners these keys can be remapped to serve other functions Modifier Keys The SHIFT CTRL ALT FN and SYM keys are modifier keys that change the function of the next key pressed The SHIFT CTRL and ALT keys operate much like a desktop keyboard except that they are not chorded two keys held down simultaneously The modifier key must be pressed first followed by the key whose func tion you want modified Getting To Know Your Omnii 2 5 SHIFT and FN The SHIFT and FN modifier keys provide access to additional keys and system functions The functions related to these modifier keys are colour code
196. ices Narrowband Radio Configuration J 3 e Configure the device once e Choose Export to XML file to export the configuration to an XML file it will be named NBRadio Set tings xml automatically in the My Device folder e Copy the file to your PC or a USB key and rename it to NBRadio_AutoLoadSettings xml e On anew unit copy this file to the root directory the My Device folder Warm reset the unit The XML file will be auto loaded onto the device and deleted The device is ready for use Channels Tab A Narrowband Radio OK mala Select the active Channels cH Receive Transmit mza 460 95 460 95 462 59625 462 5625 77G Channel switch speed Slow F Edit Edit D channel ft frequencies 2 order Ss dh BAGA This tab lists the channel frequency pairs Channels can be enabled or disabled here Refer to Edit Channel Frequencies on page J 4 to learn how to add or edit frequencies WARNING Do not add frequencies that are not applicable to your license Channel Switch Speed This parameter changes the threshold the hand held uses to determine when communication quality with a base station is unacceptable When this threshold is exceeded the unit starts channel searching for a new base station Setting this parameter to Slow means a higher threshold the hand held is more tolerant of poor communica tion quality When the channel quality of the hand held radio drops below the perce
197. igh capacity Lithium ion for battery specifications see Lithium ion Smart Battery 5000 mAh ST3003 on page E 4 Expansion Ports MicroSD slot for Flash expansion up to 32 GB Multiple Internal Multi Function Expansion Interfaces with TTL serial USB host GPIO Camera optional Colour 3 Megapixel Autofocus 4x digital Zoom Dual LED flash Video capable Omnii Specifications E 3 Enhanced Features 3 axis accelerometer GPS Compass Environmental Operating Temperature 20 C to 50 C 4 F to 122 F Storage Temperature 40 C to 60 C 40 F to 140 F Humidity 5 to 95 RH non condensing ESD 8 kV contact 15 kV air discharge Omnii RT15 Drop Durability 1 5 m 5 ft 26 drops to polished concrete powered on with accessories multiple 1 8 m 6 ft drops to polished concrete Rain And Dust Resistance IEC 60529 classification IP65 Omnii XT15 Drop Durability 1 7 m 5 6 ft 26 drops to polished concrete powered on with accessories multiple 2 0 m 6 5 ft drops to polished concrete Rain And Dust Resistance IEC 60529 classification IP67 Regulatory Approvals Worldwide Safety EMC RF Laser approvals CE Mark E Mark vehicle cradles RoHS compliant WEEE compliant REACH compliant E 4 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Lithium ion Smart Battery 5000 mAh ST3003 For safety instructions please see Lithium ion Bat
198. in this document should also be followed for High Voltage vehicles to insure safe installation and operation of the powered cradle Extreme Wet Environments For extreme wet environments or environments where it is difficult to restrict vehicle operator access to the power connector Zebra offers a waterproof heat shrink kit PN 1030022 The kit contains 3 pieces of water proof high shrink ratio heat shrink tubing which can be used to encapsulate the entire connector assembly If using this kit please ensure that you order sufficient material to cover installation and service remembering that heat shrink is one time use and must be replaced if it is removed from the connector for any reason Wiring Vehicle Power and Communications to the Cradle An optional 1 8 meter 6 foot extension power cable PN 13985 301 with motion detect or 13985 302 is avail able for your powered vehicle cradle This cable should be wired to a filtered fused maximum 4A accessory supply on the vehicle The power cradle draws no more than 4A less if the accessory supply is greater than 12V Any additional wiring connectors or disconnects used should be rated for at least 10A Installation of the 19440 XXX fuse assembly using a 4A 250V fuse installed is mandatory except when using a CA3002 vehicle power cable The 13985 XXX cables are not used with the CA3002 The 4A fuse is already included in the CA3002 vehicle connector assembly NOTE When connecting PN 13985
199. ing 3 73 Continuous Scan Mode 00 eee C 7 Control Panel ACCESSING APA AO 3 2 App Launch Keys Icon 00 eee ae 3 6 applications list a 3 3 Display Properties 0 0 00 0e 3 19 keyboard properties 3 28 power management properties 3 40 Predefined presets 0 0 00 e eens B 2 Quick Defrost a F 6 stylus properties aa 3 62 Control Panel Settings Kiosk settings 3 48 Country Options Wi Fi Config 3 84 cradle See also vehicle cradle 4 16 CTR ROY muaamada Ka KG eed ee BAK ABA MA anda ROLL 2 4 Custom preset 0 0 ccc ee nee B 1 cycle TASKS o6sisevaeeaeeenededaemesexsetadaeeesds 2 22 D Data Bits port replicator 3 57 Decoded Internal Data Options C 5 decoded internal scanner parameters C 3 decoded Intermec ISCP parameters C 6 decoded scanners 20 C 8 decoding barcodes decodes required 0 cece eee eee C 9 SCCUINY Han Wa WG mode dagae bs as ededwswsudees se C 9 DEL Backspace Key 0 00 00 aa 2 4 Delete Char Set ECIS C 6 Demo SCANNE suis ce iaded eee wave ea oina yndennd eae 2 21 Sound ea a 2 21 Desktop background choosing 3 48 desktop con
200. inistrators who have a strong understanding of registry keys and values A WARNING Careless registry editing can cause irreversible damage to the Omnii Voice Using the WWAN Phone Dialer If the WWAN modem is installed and enabled the Phone icon and the GSM signal strength icon will appear automatically on the taskbar Double click on the Phone icon to access the phone dialer J NOTE On 55 and 66 key Omnii keyboards you can also press the Talk key to display the phone keypad providing it has been activated The Talk key is labelled with a green telephone receiver icon Refer to Sending and Ending Calls Using the Omnii Keyboard on page 3 71 for details Configuration 3 71 You can also follow the steps below to access the phone dialer e To access the dialer tap on Start gt Settings gt Control Panel e Tap on the Wireless WAN icon and then tap on the Voice tab The Voice tab displays a phone dialer used to dial phone numbers The Voice menu provides commands which allow you to manage your phone contacts view your phone history and so on Wireless WAN File Dota SMS Voice Phone Number Entry Field Da aa a Bars Send Button Sm TUY raz Universal Hs O J International Dialing Prefix xd i Mute Button 3 sg Sal GHI Backspace Button PORS End Button 1 dax 5m ae it Dialing a Number To make a phone call e Type the recipient s phone number in t
201. ipped with a heated scanner window and a standard 5000 mAh battery model number ST3003 An optional freezer battery model number ST3002 not used with narrowband radio configuration can be ordered for the Chiller variant The Omnii Arctic freezer variant is equipped with an optically bonded heated display module providing a condensation free unit It is only avail able with an ST3002 freezer battery not used with narrowband radio configuration NOTE The Omnii Hand Held Computer is a body worn device and to maintain compliance with the FCC RF exposure guidelines use a Zebra approved carrying case Use of non approved accessories may violate FCC RF exposure guidelines Model Variants e Omnii XT15f Arctic Hand Held Computer extremely rugged condensing free Model 7545XT This model features a multi core heater control logic board that dynamically heats the scan window and LCD display e Omnii XT15f Chiller Hand Held Computer extremely rugged condensing resistant Model 7545XT This model features a single core heater control logic board dynamically heats the scan window F 2 Omni Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Figure F 1 Omnii XT15f Freezer Variants Alphanumeric Numeric Hardware Specifications Physical Dimensions e Length 226 mm 8 89 in e Width At display 98 mm 3 86 in e Depth At display 82 mm 3 2 in At grip area 31 mm 1 22 in e Weight 34 g 1 8 Ib with SE965HP laser ST30
202. ips screwdriver tighten the screws to a torque of 3 Ibs in 3kgf cm to secure the pistol grip in place Figure 4 2 Attaching the Pistol Grip Accessories 4 3 Carrying and Protective Accessories J NOTE The Omnii Hand Held Computer is a body worn device and to maintain compliance with the FCC RF exposure guidelines use a Zebra approved carrying case Use of non approved accessories may violate FCC RF exposure guidelines There are several Omnii carrying and protective accessories to help you work safely and comfortably Attaching Carrying Accessories If your Omnii is not fitted with a hand strap you can install it using the carrying accessory kit supplied You ll need e A Phillips head screwdriver IMPORTANT Do not use adhesives such as Loctite to secure screws on carrying accessories These chemicals may damage the plastic casing Accessory Wrist Strap Hand Strap Soft Shell Holster Hard Shell Holster Forklift Holster Carrying Case Pouch Screen Protector Rubber Boot Yellow Standard back covers A amp B Grey Standard back covers A 4 B Yellow Expansion Back Covers Grey Expansion Back Covers Yellow Expansion Back Covers WWAN End cap Grey Expansion Back Covers WWAN End cap Blue Freezer Standard Back Covers Model Number ST6040 ST6025 ST6050 ST6055 ST6051 ST6090 ST6091 RV6105 ST6080 ST6081 ST6082 ST6083 ST6084 ST6085 ST6086 4 4 Om
203. is ready for setup Paired This tab lists all paired devices and their corresponding services The format of the name is lt Device Name gt lt Service Name gt Additional information may appear in this screen such as the Port Numbers for Serial Profiles service Bluetooth Paired Device Servers Mode Select device to view options TORSWE 018 FrinterPort To learn how to scan for devices to pair review Device on page 3 9 J NOTE If a service is actively paired and connected the device and its services are displayed in bold type face in this list e Tapon an item in the Paired tab to display an associated pop up menu Bluetooth OK Paired Device Servers Mode About Select device to view options The displayed menu depends on the type of the service chosen Query Services and Remove Commands e Query Services displays a Services dialog box where a pairing service is chosen e Remove unpairs the highlighted service and deletes the entry from the tab Configuration 3 9 OBEX OPP Object Exchange Object Push Profile Commands The OPP defines two roles a Push Server and a Push Client Push Server is the device that provides an object exchange server Push Client is the device that pushes and pulls objects to and from the Push Server OBEX OPP contains the following unique menu option e Send File displays an Open File dialog box where the file to be sent can be selected When the transmis sion
204. is suspect e Ifthe adaptor LED stays OFF the adaptor is defective and requires service Vehicle Cradles Models ST1000 and ST1002 A N IMPORTANT The vehicle cradles are shipped with their own quick start guide Omnii Vehicle Cradles Quick Start Guide PN 8000221 It is critical that it be reviewed for additional information and updates The Omnii vehicle cradles are highly ruggedized single station docks Although they provide quick insertion and removal the cradles hold the Omnii securely even when operated in high vibration environments such as vehicles not equipped with suspensions Accessories 4 17 The Omnii vehicle cradle is available in two models e Model ST1000 Unpowered cradle e Model ST1002 Powered cradle with communications port A DE9M serial port powered and two USB Host interfaces Figure 4 16 Front and back of ST1002 with Omnii Mounting holes Release button Power Communications port Zebra also supplies a range of standard mounts for the hand held vehicle cradles and the Omnii vehicle cradles are compatible with all of them Vehicle Cradle Mounting Recommendations A WARNING Before mounting a vehicle cradle in a vehicle there are a number of operator safety issues that require careful attention An improperly mounted cradle may result in one or more of the following operator injury operator visibility obstruction operator distraction and or poor ease of egress for the oper
205. isplayed letting you know that you will lose all unsaved data Tap on OK Once the reset is complete if you checked the box next to Use Windows to configure my wireless settings the Wireless Zero Config screen is displayed on the hand held Refer to Appendix H Wireless Zero Config Settings for details Monitoring the Network Connection The radio signal icon in the taskbar indicates the strength of the communication link with an 802 11 access point To access the radio signal icon e Tap on the radio icon in the taskbar to display the wireless statistics dialog box To access the radio signal icon using the keyboard e Press the Windows key to display the Start Menu e Highlight Shortcuts and then choose System Tray from the sub menu e Use the LEFT and RIGHT arrow keys to highlight the radio signal icon in the taskbar e Press Enter to display the Wireless Statistics dialog box J NOTE Moving in and out of the radio coverage area can have varying effects on a network session At times you may need to renew your connection by logging in again WiFi Connect A R C The WiFiConnectARC utility on the desktop provides a quick method to configure a device for use on a private network primarily for use with Active Remote Configuration A R C When you click on this icon WiFiConnect A R C configures the default WiFi interface The WEP key is set to PsionPsion123 The SSID is set to Psion The default interface becomes the active
206. istering with the network that is not even emergency calls are possible if a mistake is made By default all bands supported by the installed WWAN modem are enabled All bands that are not supported by the installed modem are greyed out While some modems e g Cinterion PH8 P allow all possible combi nations of supported bands to be selected others do not e g Cinterion MC75i A warning is displayed if an unsupported band combination is chosen By enabling only bands in use on a given network the network search time e g after losing the network due to a coverage gap is improved Through the band configuration it is possible to force the modem into GSM only or UMTS only mode As an example this is useful if a legacy application needs to use a dial up connection and the network supports dial up connections only on GSM but not on UMTS as is the case with many Euro pean networks Enable Automatic Time Update If this feature is enabled it allows the system time and time zone to be updated with information received from the WWAN network This feature is network dependent If the WWAN network supports NITZ Network Infor mation and Time Zone then it can send the current time time zone or both to the terminal Driver Mode Configuration WWAN Driyer Mode Oki x Enable automatic port detection Select port 7 Changes to the port settings require a reset to take effect By default the Wireless WAN drive
207. istry Capacity Voltage Cell Configuration Max Charge Voltage Recommended Charge Termination Timeout Charge Temperature Discharge Temperature Storage Temperature Cycle Life ST3003 Lithium ion Li lon 5000 mAh nominal at 1000 mA discharge 20 C to 3 0 V min 3 7 V nominal 2 75 V min to 4 2 V max 1 S2P 2 parallel connected cells 4 2 V 1 5 0 hr charging must stop 0 C to 40 C 32 F to 104 F 20 C to 50 C 4 F to 122 F 20 C to 50 C 4 F to 122 F Storage at elevated tempera tures not recommended 25 C 77 F recommended storage temperature 300 cycles minimum with no degradation below 70 of nominal capacity based on 0 5C charge 0 5C discharge rates to 3 0 V 23 C 73 4 F Lithium ion Smart Battery 5300 mAh ST3002 for Omnii Arctic Model The Omnii Arctic model is shipped with the ST3002 Lithium ion Smart Battery not used with narrowband radio configuration For safety instructions please see Lithium ion Battery Safety Precautions in the Omnii Hand Held Computer Regulatory amp Warranty Guide PN 8000191 Parameter Specifications Model Number ST3002 not used with narrowband radio configuration Chemistry Lithium ion Li lon Capacity 5300 mAh nominal at 1000 mA Discharge 20 C to 2 75 V min Voltage 3 6 V nominal 2 75 V min to 4 2 V max F 6 Omni Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Parameter Specifications
208. ithium ion Smart Battery 5000 mAh ST3003 for Omnii Chiller Model on page F 5 Optional 5300mAh high capacity smart freezer battery Arctic Battery Pack 5300 mAh high capacity Lithium ion smart freezer battery designed for improved per formance in low temperature application For specifications see Lithium ion Smart Battery 5300 mAh ST3002 for Omnii Arctic Model on page F 5 WARNING Powered cradles are designed to allow the Omnii to be powered by a vehicle bat tery The battery installed in the Omnii is also recharged by the vehicle battery This option accepts DC power sources over the range 11 5V to 30V For Omnii XT15f Chiller units voltages above that require the use of the power pre regulator Model No PS1350 However Omnii XT15f Arctic units operating in temperatures from 30 C to 50 C require the use of the power preregulator Model No PS1370 For detailed information see ST1002 Powered Cradle Installation on page 4 20 Environmental Chiller Variant Operating Temperature 20 C to 50 C 4 F to 122 F Storage Temperature 40 C to 60 C 40 F to 140 F Humidity 5 to 95 non condensing condensation resistant Rain Dust IP65 IP67 IEC 60759 Drop Rating Multiple 2 m 6 5 ft drops to polished concrete ESD 8 kV contact 15 kV air discharge Arctic Variant Operating Temperature 30 C to 50 C 22 F to 122 F F 4 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide e St
209. itions Once the card is formatted new partitions can be created in it The default is to create one partition that occu pies the whole card but a card can be divided into more than one partition if desired Each partition appears as a separate folder in Windows Explorer To create new partitions 1 Press the New button next to the Partitions list box The Create New Partition dialog box appears Omni Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Create New Partition OK Mame Sectors sectors p Available Use All Available Disk Space 2 Type a name for the partition If more than one partition is desired uncheck the Use All Available Diskspace check box then specify the desired number of sectors to be used by the partition 4 Press OK The new partition appears in the Partitions list Storage Properties OK Storage Manager Store Info D5K2 SD Memory Can Capacity 121 25 ME Unallocated 0 00 6 Sector Size 512 00 6 The new partition is automatically mounted This is indicated by an asterisk next to its name in the partition list Any unallocated space on the card is indicated at the left and additional partitions can be created in it Partition Management Partitions can be individually dismounted mounted deleted or formatted as well These and additional tasks are available from the Partition Properties dialog Partition Properties OK Name Part0 1 Size B2 2 Sectors T
210. ived by the antenna The higher the RSSI number the stronger the signal Radio Address If auto radio address is enabled the hand held requests an automatically assigned radio address When auto is selected the next field in which a radio address can be entered manually is not available The field to the right of auto is used to assign a radio address manually Manually assigned radio addresses must be predetermined by the system administrator before this field is completed A unique value from 1 to 3840 must be assigned for each unit to identify each hand held over the radio link Initially this field is set to O to prevent radio communication Starting Channel This parameter determines the initial operating radio channel of the hand held When the unit is first powered on and channel selection is set to auto refer to Radio Address on page J 2 a starting channel is automatically chosen Otherwise a channel from one to twenty can be chosen from the drop down menu Keep in mind that only the channels that have been enabled are listed here Radio Information This information is read from the radio installed in the unit and is not editable Import from XML File and Export to XML File Import from XML file allows you to use a configuration that has already been created to set up your unit Export to XML can be used to clone a radio setup so that configuration need only be completed once and can then be copied to an unlimited number of dev
211. jected Enabling Short Code may reduce the robustness of the decoding since the hand held must decode more potential barcodes it is therefore not recommended for general purpose barcodes with 4 or more characters Verify The value entered for this parameter determines the number of correct additional decodes required after the initial decode prior to a barcode being accepted Higher values significantly increase the time it takes to decode a barcode but also improve the reliability of the decoded barcode Security This parameter controls the tolerance for decoding edge to edge barcodes Code 93 Code 128 UPC EAN Lower values have a lower tolerance for misreads but they also increase the time it takes to decode the barcode The default value of 30 is generally a good compromise setting The barcode symbologies for the scanner are listed in the following table Non Decoded Barcode Symbologies Code 39 Code 93 disabled Code 128 Code 11 disabled EAN 13 Interleaved 2 of 5 disabled EAN 8 MSI Plessey disabled UPC A Discrete 2 of 5 disabled UPC E IATA 2 of 5 disabled Codabar disabled This appendix lists specifications for the following internal scanners For a current list of model numbers and descriptions for the Omnii scanner pod and back cover kits please contact your representative or go to SE955 Scanner Configuration Decoded Scan Rate 104 12 scans sec bidirectional scan Angle 47 3 defau
212. l concrete buildings or from within a building the GPS module will have greater difficulty calculating a fix AGPS reduces Time To First Fix TTFF and increases the likelihood of finding and keeping a fix in poor coverage areas such as indoor sites AGPS downloads satellite ephemeris orbital data to the Omnii periodi cally through Wi Fi or WWAN The downloaded data is used by the GPS module to speed the process of getting a fix Update e Click on the Update button to download Extended Ephemeris EE files from a secure host on the Internet using any interface that has an Internet connection These files contain several days worth of ephemeris orbital data that can be used if the satellite broadcast ephemeris is not available The Status field above the Update button displays the progress of the download and once successfully down loaded the Status field will read Idle Settings e Click on the Settings button to define the AGPS server connection settings 3 26 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Download OK AGPS server connection settings Use default settings F Server Kau Port p User name kase Password aa Update anual updates o The AGPS server connection settings drop down menu allows you to choose from two settings Use default settings and Use custom settings The Use default settings option is generally acceptable for most applications Note that aside from the Update fiel
213. l scanner parameters e Press and hold on a symbology e g Code 128 to display a pop up a menu Scanner Settings Barcodes Options Translations Ports Scanner Decoded internal B8 Code 128 Default subtree 3 Default all settings mo Decode Performance on Decode Perf Level 1 Length Restriction Add Remove Data oe To change 4 setting press space or double click e Choose Default subtree to reset only the parameters in the symbology you selected or choose Default all settings to reset all scanner parameters to default settings To reset a single parameter to its default setting e Press and hold on the parameter you want to reset Scanner Settings C 3 H Code 39 El Code 128 3 Enabled on Default parameter Default all settings Length Restriction EF Add Remove Data To change 4 setting press space or double click e Choose Default parameter to reset the parameter to the default setting Decoded Internal Scanners Scanner Settings OK Barcodes Options Translations Ports Scanner H Options HE Advanced Options Data Options H Code 39 H Code 128 Hl EAN 13 H EAN 8 H PC A H UPC E UPC EAN Shared Settings H Code 93 disabled To change a setting press space or Anihle rlirk a Bs th alll e Tap on the Scanner drop down menu and choose Decoded internal Options S NOTE Some options are available only for spe
214. le Authentication Protocol type used for 802 1x authentica tion to an access point 3 80 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Configure Profile 5510 Auth Mode WPA Enterprise EAP Encryption TKIP F EAP FAST MSCHapv2 x l FAST MSCHAPv LEAP User name ORANG PEAPvO MSCHAPvZ FEAP GTE Anony Id TLS Tunnel PAT Ed Mach PAC zi Provisioning Anonymous Authentic verify Server Certificate The following EAP types are supported by Wi Fi Config TLS Provides strong security via the use of client certificates for user authentication PEAPv0 MSCHAPv2 Provides secure user authentication by using a TLS tunnel to encrypt EAP traffic MSCHAPv2 is used as the inner authentication method This is appropriate for use against Windows Active Directory and domains PEAPv1 GTC PEAP authentication using GTC as the inner method which utilizes one time passwords OTPs for authentication against OTP data bases such as SecurelD LEAP Is an authentication method for use with Cisco WLAN access points LEAP does not require the use of server or client certificates LEAP supports Windows Active Directory and domains but requires the use of strong passwords to avoid vulnerability to off line dictionary attacks FAST MSCHAPv2 Is a successor to LEAP and does not require strong passwords to protect against off line dictionary attacks Like LEAP EAP FAST does not require the use of server or client ce
215. log box in sequence beginning at the top of the list If you need to rearrange this list of networks move networks up and down in the list Tap in the Networks List and highlight the network that you want to move up or down in the list To move the highlighted item in the list upward or downward tap on the Up or Down button Deleting A Preferred Network To delete a network from this list e In the preferred networks list highlight the network you want to remove e Tap on the Delete button H 6 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Changing Network Properties To change the properties of an existing preferred network e Highlight the network that you want to modify e Tap on the Properties button e Make any necessary changes in the Wireless Properties dialog box and press Enter to save the changes Omnii XT15ni non incendive Important Safety amp Regulatory Information A The Omnii XT15ni non incendive Hand Held Computer has been qualified by UL LLC to the requirements of the USA and Canada for use in Class Division 2 Groups A B C and D T6 environments The users of this product are cautioned to use accessories and peripherals approved by Zebra The use of accessories other than those recommended or changes to this product that are not approved by Zebra may void the compliance of this product and may result in the loss of the user s authority to operate the equipment WARNING WAR
216. lorer e Drag and drop files between the Omnii and the PC in the same way that you would between PC drives e Back up Omnii files to the PC restore them from the PC to the hand held again etc Uploading Data in a Docking Station The Desktop Docking Stations allow your hand held to upload transaction data to a server computer when a radio link is not available When the Omnii is properly inserted in a docking station a dock icon is displayed in the taskbar at the bottom of the unit screen For detailed information refer to Desktop Docking Stations Models ST4002 and ST4003 on page 4 9 Configuration 3 19 Using Microsoft ActiveSync J NOTE If you use a serial port to connect devices like the Omnii to your desktop computer the connection may not succeed because ActiveSync has trouble connecting at non default baud rates To work around this problem set the ActiveSync baud rate on the desktop to use the same baud rate as the device You can set the baud rate by editing the registry on the desktop host computer as detailed in the steps outlined at the following website http support microsoft com kb 324466 To install ActiveSync follow the step by step instructions provided with the program setup wizard For details go to the following website and type the name into the search box http www microsoft com downloads en default aspx Using Windows Mobile Device Center If you are running Windows Vista Windows 7 or later your d
217. lowing devices battery packs housings LCDs touchscreens keypads Replacement of modules housings keypads LCDs or touchscreens end caps pods or external connectors must only be performed at an authorized Zebra service centre The battery pack used in this device may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mis treated Do not disassemble heat above 100 C 212 F or incinerate Dispose of used battery packs promptly Keep away from children The following additional warnings and cautions must be observed for the safety of the operator and others in potentially hazardous locations The Omnii XT15ni must only be used when the ambient temperature is between 20 C and 50 C 4 F and 122 F The Omnii XT15ni may NOT be connected to any of its available accessories while in potentially hazardous locations This includes anything that uses the communica tions docking connector headset or microphone jacks All allowed connections must be made while outside of the potentially hazardous location The use of Compact Flash Secure Digital and SIM Cards in the Omnii XT15ni while in potentially hazardous locations is permitted as long as these cards are not removed or changed while in the hazardous location Any connector cover removed while in ordinary locations must be reinstalled before entering a potentially hazardous location Omnii XT15ni Battery Information The Omnii XT 15ni hand held operates with a specially adapted bat
218. lows you to test the functionality of all available heaters for approximately 20 seconds to make sure that the heating system heaters and control board are working properly F 10 Omni Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide System Properties In Control Panel gt System Properties the computer s heater software and hardware components are listed under Heater Info The information includes their identification version or part numbers and whether they have been installed System Properties Heater Info HCL Revision 201 HCL Model 517100 HEL Manufacturer Psion Hardware Wireless WAN The Omnii is available with one of the following Wireless WAN WWAN radio options the Cinterion MC75i EDGE and the Cinterion PH8 P HSPA An Omnii Hand Held Computer equipped with a GSM GPRS radio has wide area networking capabilities With either of these radios and a SIM card you can wirelessly transfer data and you use the Omnii voice option to place phone calls Taskbar Icons Wireless WAN icons in the taskbar indicate the status of your wide area network connection Note that these icons are only visible when the relative radio is installed in the computer and the interface is enabled The following taskbar icons are used e G GSM GPRS e E GSM EDGE e 3G UMTS 3G e U UMTS HSPAt User interaction is required e g the user is required to enter a PIN A non recoverable fatal error has occurred The modem
219. lt 35 3 reduced Voltage 3 0 3 6 V 10 5 V 10 Ambient Light 10 000 ft candles Electrical Safety UL 60950 EN IEC 60950 EMI RFI FCC Part 15 Class B EN 55024 CISPR 22 AS 3548 VCCI Environmental ROHS Compliant SE955 Decode Zones on high quality sy SE965 Scanner Parameter Dimensions Weight Configuration Interface Scan Angle Skew Tolerance Pitch Tolerance Roll Tolerance Specular Dead Zone Optical Resolution Scan Repetition Rate Print Contrast Ambient Lighting Toler ance Operating Temperature Storage Temperature Mote Typical parormanco al FRA F 23 C ays Mirae Bara cede eee yp ities ag aed eet ae D 2 Omni Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Note Typical performance at 73 4 F 23 C i enn high quality symbols Depth of Field SE965 0 46 in H x 0 85 in W x 0 61 in D 11 75 mm H x 21 6 mm W x 15 5 mm D 0 27 oz 7 69g Decoded SSI Control over TTL Serial on a 12 pin ZIF connector Wide default 47 typical Medium 35 typical Narrow 10 typical Note The SE965 scan engine does not require margin on either side of the barcode to decode The 47 scan line provides identical scanning performance to older scan engines with a scan line of 53 40 from normal 65 from normal 35 from vertical 8 0 005 in minimum element width 104 12 scans sec bidirectional Minimum 25 absolute dark lig
220. ly by pointing the scanner window at a barcode that your scanner was designed to decode for example a 1D UPC barcode or 2D barcode Press the SCAN key or pistol trigger and check for a valid decode on the hand held screen For a listing of available scanners and their specifications please refer to Appendix E Omnii Specifications Configuration 3 51 Barcodes Scanner Settings OK Barcodes Translations Ports Scanner Decoded internal Decoded finternal H ptio ecoded HHP H AdvaniDecoded Intermec ISCE H Data Options Fl Code 39 H Code 128 Hl EAN 13 Hl EAN 8 Hl UPC A UPC E E UPC EAN Shared Settings H Code 93 disabled To change a setting press space or Anihile rlirk Scanner The drop down menu to the right of the Scanner option allows you to choose configurations for one of the following scanner types depending on what is installed in on your hand held Decoded internal Decoded Intermec ISCP Imager and Non decoded The symbologies listed in the Barcodes tab change to reflect the scanner you choose and the barcodes it supports Always defer to your barcode scanner s programming manual when in doubt about the availability or settings for any parameter J NOTE Your Omnii comes preconfigured from the factory for internal scanner types The type of scan ner installed can be determined from the System icon in the Control Panel under the System Properties tab IMPORTANT To improve
221. m max GHz 802 11n 5 GHz 12 dBm typical 13 5 dBm max Frequency 802 11b g n 2400 2483 5 MHz Range 802 11a n 5150 5350 MHz 5480 5720 MHz and 5725 5845 MHz Channel 802 11b g n 1 to 13 Up to 13 channels depending on country Only 3 channels are non overlapping 802 11a n 36 40 44 48 52 56 60 64 100 104 108 112 116 120 124 128 132 136 140 149 153 157 161 165 Up to 24 channels depending on country All channels are non overlapping RX Sensitivity 802 11b 78 dBm 11 Mbps 802 11g 67 dBm 54 Mbps 802 11a 67 dBm 54 Mbps 802 11n 2 4 66 dBm 65 Mbps GHz 802 11n 5 GHz 66 dBm 65 Mbps Data Rates 1 2 5 5 11 Mbps 802 11a g J6 9 12 18 24 36 48 54 Mbps 802 11n 65 13 19 5 26 39 52 58 5 65 Mbps EVM 802 110 32 max 802 119 26 dB max 802 11a 26 dB max 802 11n 2 4 29 dB max GHz 802 11n 5 GHz 29 dB max Bluetooth Coex TI Wilink6 proprietary WiFi BT co existent scheme istence E 10 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Bluetooth Radio Parameter Specification Manufacturer Form Factor Antenna Port Antenna Type Antenna Gain Transmit Power Frequency Range Channels RX Sensitivity Data Rates 802 11 Coexistence Murata Model LBEH1Z9PFC Embedded surface mount module 11 4 x 9 4 mm This is a combo module containing both Wi Fi 802 11a b g n and Bluetooth V2 1 EDR radio U FL jack shared with Wi Fi 802 11b
222. mber of complete mode changes Numerics 1D internal scanner 0000 2 14 2 15 2D UNAS 2 4 2 enaneae PAA 2 15 34 key freezer keyboard F 4 36 key keyboard alpha keys ACCESSING 2 7 uppercase letters creating 2 7 58 key freezer keyboard F 4 7545 freezer models See Omnii XT15f F 1 1545 Model See Omnii aa E 1 802 11a b g n radio nnna nannaa anaana E 8 CONMGUMING 42366464 KANG esas KAWANG KAI 3 76 3 85 A accessories carn ying CASE nan aeeaewaeawee eas GnaNeeeeeaeaes 4 4 desktop docking stations 4 9 Ethernet cable 0 0 0 0 cee eee 4 15 hand SWAD vst ag tt ssh oe a Ree oh oe ee 4 3 4 4 holster hard shell 0 00004 4 4 DISIOWON AA AA eee ee meena ane 4 1 quad docking station 00 4 13 vehicle cradle eee 4 16 Active Remote Configuration A R C 3 85 AC Wall adaptor 2 mamamana kamahas baa haa nlg 4 7 Administrator Password Kiosk settings 3 45 AGPS Assisted Global Positioning System 3 25 Aim Duration a C 4 aiming dot duration of C 3 C 9 ALT Key 2 a 2 4 appearance display colour scheme 3 20 appending to barcodes characters a 3 53 App Launch Keys 0 000 c eee eee eee 3 6
223. me that the FN key is enabled as Lock mode in the One Shot screen accessible through the Control Panel Keyboard icon In Lock mode pressing the FN key once locks it on Refer to Keyboard One Shot Modes on page 3 30 for details The examples below illustrate how to access A B and C all of which are printed in blue characters above the numeric key 2 The letters you choose appear in the softkey bar as you press the numeric key providing a visual indicator of which letter will be displayed on the screen To choose the letter a e Press the FN key and press the numeric key 2 e Press the FN key again to unlock or turn it off To choose the letter b e Press the FN key and press 2 twice e Press the FN key again to unlock or turn it off To choose the letter c e Press the FN key and press 2 three times e Press the FN key again to unlock or turn it off lt V NOTE Keep in mind that there is a timeout of one second between key presses when sequencing through the alphabetic characters on a key If you pause longer than one second between key presses the alphabetic character that is displayed at that time will be entered Selecting Uppercase Letters To display a single capital letter press the SHIFT key first then the letter you want To access CAPS LOCK mode press FN SHIFT In this state if you press a numeric key the number is displayed rather than the normal shifted function of that ke
224. mpty If the main menu shows an error status at least partial modem information may be available Diagnostics and More The Diagnostics screen may be useful when diagnosing network problems The information presented here is not needed for normal operation The More button shows you some additional detail about your modem WWAN Network Diagnostics WWAN More Modem Info MICE 302 canada Property Value 302 Canada Audio file version 44 60 1 PAPI 720 Rogers na serial no LAC s200 lox 1450 CIO 42941 lOxa bd pe ass ae BCCH 18s fesoemHe BER RSSI dem TEN een AN Tempfagec The following Diagnostics values are displayed e MCC Mobile Country Code decimal value and if available decoded country name e MNC Mobile Network Code decimal value and if available decoded network name e LAC Location Area Code decimal and hexadecimal value e CID Cell Identifier decimal and hexadecimal value e TA Timing Advance decimal value and converted distance to base station in meters e BCCH Broadcast Control Channel ARFCN or UARFCN value and converted frequency in MHz e BER Bit Error Rate e RSSI Received Signal Strength Indication e TCH Traffic Channel ARFCN value and converted frequency in MHz e Batt Battery voltage as measured by the WWAN modem e Temp WWAN modem Temperature G 12 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Note that TA BER and TCH are available only in GSM mode and only whil
225. mum performance After unpacking your unit e Visually inspect the charger for possible damage e Install the IEC power cord if applicable and apply power Operator Controls The Omnii docking stations and chargers have no operator controls Power Consumption Considerations Check to ensure the mains circuit supplying chargers and or docking stations is adequate for the load espe cially if several chargers and docking stations are being powered from the same circuit Desktop Docking Stations Models ST4002 and ST4003 J NOTE Specialized versions of the desktop docking station are available for Argentina and Korea For Argentina model number ST4002 AR is packaged with a wall adaptor and a suitable regional AR plug For Korea model number ST4002 KR is packaged with a wall adaptor and a KR plug AN IMPORTANT The desktop docking station is shipped with its own quick start guide ST4002 and ST4003 Desktop Docking Stations Quick Start Guide PN 8000203 It is critical that it be reviewed for additional information and updates The Omnii can be inserted into two desktop docking stations which are designed to charge the battery installed in the hand held along with a spare battery pack Models ST4002 and ST4003 AN IMPORTANT These docking stations can only be used to charge Zebra approved lithium ion batteries The ST4002 and ST4003 desktop docking stations feature e Fast charging of the internal battery e Fast charging of the
226. n a remote Bluetooth device initiates a Bluetooth connection to the Omnii the remote device is considered the Bluetooth master and the hand held the Bluetooth slave In order for the remote device to connect to the hand held the Omnii must offer a service in the form of a server The Servers tab allows these services to be enabled and configured There are three server services available Serial Scanner and OBEX OPP Serial server enables the Serial Port Profile server a Serial Port can be selected from the drop down menu You can assign either a BSP or a COM prefix from the drop down menu BSP Bluetooth Serial Port was created by Microsoft to allow Bluetooth to have its own serial prefix in order to free up virtual COM prefixes as these are limited and are widely used J NOTE Even after a Serial Port Profile server is created an application must open the created port before a remote device can connect Scanner server enables a Serial Port Profile server and then relays it to the Scanner Service SCS This is used for Bluetooth barcode scanners that operate in client mode SCS opens the server port and handles the scanner input OBEX OPP server enables the Object Push Profile server A warm reset must be performed on the Omnii after a change is made to this option The OPP Server allows other Bluetooth devices to send files to this device e Tap on the check box to activate the server Configuration 3 13 Mode Paired Device
227. n charge LED only shows the status of the spare battery The Omnii charge indicator LED is red If the Omnii charge indicator is red when the hand held is docked e Remove the Omnii and disconnect the adaptor DC power cable e Wait at least 20 seconds and then plug the cable in again e If the Omnii indicator still shows a fault the hand held requires service Spare battery LED is red with a battery installed e Try inserting a battery that is known to be working with another charger e Ifthe charge slot LED continues to show red with the known working battery the charger is defective and requires service e Your Zebra battery and desktop docking station are carefully designed for safety and capacity perfor mance If the battery or charger are not Zebra approved products or the safety mechanism is faulty the spare charge slot LED or the Omnii LED will display red Spare battery LED does not turn on when a battery Is installed e Inspect the charge slot contacts for damage are they bent flattened twisted or broken e Reinstall the battery and check that it is fully seated in the slot Accessories 4 13 e Try inserting a battery that you know to be working into the charger slot e Disconnect and reconnect the DC adaptor and check that the spare battery LED indicator flashes at power up e Ifthe charge slot fails to charge the known working battery it is defective and requires service Quad Docking Station Mod
228. nd emitted to indicate events like warnings key clicks and screen taps You can also configure system Windows sounds and wav files Wireless WAN Provides access to technology like GSM GPRS which allows wide area networking capability such as internet browsing via GSM GPRS It also provides access to the Phone API For detailed information see Appendix G Wireless Wide Area Network WWAN Settings 3 6 Omni Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide App Launch Keys The App Launch Keys icon allows you to map a key to an application so that you can then launch the applica tion from a single key press e Inthe Control Panel choose the App Launch Keys icon Na App Launch Keys To assign an application key e Tap the Add button App Launch Keys key Data Japp Press the key you want to use to launch an application If an unsupported key is pressed a message appears on this screen letting you know The cursor moves to the App field and a new screen is displayed where you can choose the application to which you want to assign the application key If you need to you can Browse through the information in your Omnii until you locate the application you want to launch Select File to Map windows EF control Demolmager lil Demo5canner Sis DemoSignature e Once you ve selected the file you want to map tap on OK The cursor moves to the Data field You can use this field if you ne
229. nd polling protocol parameter settings aspx AN IMPORTANT These parameters should not be changed without a clear understanding of radio protocol timing Statistics Screen e Tap on the Narrowband radio icon in the taskbar to display the Statistics screen These statistics are updated every second while the dialog box is displayed The following table provides a brief description of these protocol and radio statistics Protocol Statistics Rx pmsg Rx poll Rx polltmo Rx abt Rx hdr TX msg TX ini TX err Tx frm Tx rty Radio Statistics Rx ok Rx hdr Rx bdy Rx err Rx errhdr Rx errbdy Tx ok Tx rpt Txmaxd TX err motech Narrowband Radio Configuration J 7 Description Number of received polls with attached message Number of received polls Number of poll timeouts Number of received radio link aborts Number of received headers Number of transmitted messages complete application messages Number of transmitted radio link initialization messages Number of transmitted errors Number of transmitted frames Number of transmitted retries Description Messages successfully received Received poll headers without CRC error Received poll body without CRC error Received errors Received poll header with CRC error or non basestation message Received poll body with CRC error Messages successfully transmitted Messages retransmitted Maximum delay in transmitted messages Number of transmit errors Nu
230. nection remote 3 50 desktop docking station See docking station desktop 4 9 desktop shell appearance 2 25 desktop themeS 0 000 a 3 47 diagnostics WWAN network 05 G 11 dialer phone using 1 8 3 70 dialing phone number 1 8 3 70 3 71 Diff Read Timeout a C 7 Dim For backlight a 3 21 dismounting partitions 0 0 0 0 eee eee 3 60 display appearance colour scheme 3 20 background image eee eee 3 19 Dacko AA 3 20 backlight adjusting 0 0 0 0 0c 2 8 Display Properties 0 0000 3 19 Display Properties 0 0 0 cc eee eee 3 19 docking device icons 0 ee 2 12 docking station aa 4 8 4 9 desktop i0cctcecectceaueseeerdadutadaces 4 9 4 13 cleaning 0 a 4 12 INCICAIONG 2c cece eeeo DE 4 11 Operation ce eee 4 11 operator controls 000 nanana 4 9 troubleshooting aaa 4 12 installation at Site 6 eee 4 8 ST4004 quad operator controls 000 ees 4 14 uploading data using 3 18 docking stations quad docking station ST4004 4 13 DOt NO AA AAP AA C 3 C 9 double click appending characters to a decoded barcode 3 53 scanner trigger aa 3 53
231. nfiguration aaa kanan Ak GEN kaa Gan G 10 Modem Information Aa G 11 PS SS ACO AA AA G 12 PN VOTIVE rea ae tion Pana DENG LAMI AN AA AA G 13 SMS MONU za AA cogs rie ests ater aia ren ars ae vere AA AA AA G 13 NEW AA AA AA AA G 13 MADOX AA AA AP AA AA G 13 ODO APP PG named E sataelinannicneneeeanedaeaen G 14 IN CON Ng I OW icc ceca KANAN AGA AA AA G 14 VOO E EEr A E AE AH PA G 14 Power Mode Table of Contents x Appendix H Wireless Zero Config Settings MV IP CIO SS HATO MaU aaa AA AA AA H 1 Wireless SIAUSUCS AA AA AA AA H 2 Wireless INONMA aaa AA AGAD GA AGA EE H 2 Assigning An IP Address 1 71000100017 H 5 NAME SENIANG O AA AA E T H 5 Advanced a AA ancients cals bac O A EEE E H 5 Rearranging Preferred Networks 11 1 H 5 Deleting A Preferred Network ccccccssccceeecceseeceeeecceuceceueeceeusecsueessausessusessaeeeseeensaeeeseeeness H 5 Changing Network Properties AA H 6 Appendix I Omnii XT15ni Non Incendive Safety Guidelines Omnii XT15ni non incendive Important Safety amp Regulatory Information l 1 Omni XT 190 Battery INTONA acesse EENE Ie I 2 Appendix J Narrowband Radio Configuration Narrowband Radio Setup c cccesscesssssecssecssecerscerecusensecnsvenssenersessecurecurecssacersevsnsersesrseareaeesauresuses J 1 BANG LAP AA ANA AA AA denne amen J 2 Channels TAPA ANAND tarot E E tees J 3 Advanced TAG PPM J 6 TURE POMS CON Sa a se
232. nformation Wireless Zero Config the Windows native supplicant can be used to configure the radio To ensure that Wire less Zero Config is activated refer to e Tap on Start gt Settings gt Network and Dial up Connections CJ Iy Device fa y WiFIC onn ect Documents Recycle Bin PartnerUp e Choose the radio icon representing the radio you want to set up in the sample screen in 2 this is labelled as SD O86861 H 2 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Figure H 1 802 11 Wireless LAN Settings Window cee ed Make New AXOB7721 W02 Connection Wireless Statistics When you choose the Wireless LAN icon an 802 11 Wireless LAN Settings window is displayed This tab lists your radio statistics Choosing the Zero button resets the statistics of the last four items Packets IN Packets OUT IN errors and OUT errors Figure H 2 Wireless Statistics SDID86861 OK Wireless Statistics ale NDIS Compliance 5 1 Driver Version 2 17 MAC Address DO 13 80 a0 34a Network Name Not associated Access Point O0 00 00 00 00 00 Channel O kHz RSSI Bm 100 Data Rate Mbps 54 0 Frame Size 1500 Packets IN O Packets OUT o Errors IN Errors QUT Pa ll Wireless Information This tab displays existing networks to which you can connect and it allows you to add a new network or modify the settings for an existing network e Configure button To change the settings in an existing network
233. ng a Camera To select a camera e Tap on the Camera Presets drop down menu to view the camera options e Choose a camera specifically Front Imager which is located at the top of the unit Setting the Active Preset An active preset has an A to the right To set an active preset e Highlight the preset and tap on the Activate button Viewing a Preset To view the parameter settings in a preset e Highlight a preset and double tap on the View button The associated preset window is displayed Camera Presets OK Preset Default H Options E Image Corrections E Exposure E Focus E White Balance E Windowing Predefined settings are read only e Tap on the sign to expand the lists so that you can view the parameter settings Imager amp Camera Settings B 5 Creating a Custom Preset A new custom preset is created by modifying a preset either a predefined preset or an existing custom preset To create a custom preset e Highlight a preset and tap on the Add button A screen like the sample below is displayed Cloning fram set Default Enter alphanumeric string e Type the name of the new preset in the dialog box e Tapon OK to save your changes The preset list is displayed the new custom preset appears at the end of the list It is marked as read and write Modifying a Custom Preset The parameter values in a custom preset can be modified It is recommended that
234. ng a scan Click Data This parameter determines which character is sent to the application installed in your Omnii following a double click A dialog box appears asking that you press the key you want to insert The ASCII Unicode key value of the keypress is displayed Pressing the ESC key in this dialog box resets the data to zero Display Parameters Scan Result When this parameter is enabled the type of barcode and the result of the scan appear on the screen Note that this information is only displayed after a successful decode and is visible only while the scanner trigger is pressed When the trigger is released this information is cleared from the screen Scan Indicator When this parameter is enabled the laser warning logo appears on the display whenever the scanner is acti vated Scan Result Time sec The value assigned to the Scan Result Time parameter determines how long the scan results of a successful scan are displayed on the screen Time is measured in seconds and a value of 0 zero disables the param eter When you choose this option a dialog box appears where you can enter a value NOTE To remove the scan result from the screen before the Result Time has expired point the scan ner away from the barcode and press the trigger Good Scan Beep and Bad Scan Beep These parameters determine whether or not the Omnii emits an audible scanner beep when a good successful scan or a bad unsuccessful scan is perfo
235. nii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide The Hand Strap Model ST6025 e Attach the strap to the two threaded inserts located at the back of the hand held near the top of the unit see Figure 4 3 Attaching the hand strap on page 4 4 using the two Phillips head screws provided with this accessory e Stretch the hands trap toward the base of the hand held and hook the clip at the bottom of the hand strap into the slot near the base of the battery pack Figure 4 3 Attaching the hand strap Protective Carrying Case Model ST6090 A carrying case is available for the Omnii to shield the unit from damage It is compatible with the hand strap A variety of cases are available depending on the type of end cap attached to your unit Hard Shell Holster Model ST6055 A hard shell holster that includes a belt leg tie down and tether can be used to hang the Omnii with a pistol grip from your waist on either your left or right side e Feed the belt through the top panel of the holster and adjust the belt as needed e f using the leg tie down strap wrap it around your leg and snap the buckle closed Adjust the tightness of the strap for security and comfort e Place the Omnii into the holster with the grip extending back through the custom opening e If desired attach the tether to the pistol grip Figure 4 4 Hard Shell Holster pistol grip tether not shown Accessories 4 5 Power Accessories V Th
236. not be circumvented so it is important that you write down your password and keep it in a safe place PC Connection Enables direct connection to a desktop computer or through ActiveSync see Data Transfer on page 1 8 Selecting the Change Connection button allows you to change the type of direct connection to your PC Power Displays battery pack power status Alternately battery status can be accessed through the taskbar Addi tional tabs allow you to determine suspend states and specify a suspend threshold Kiosk Kiosk enables you to customize your computer settings remove or add shortcuts to the desktop and Control Panel and lock down access to various different components on the computer and the system tray icons for security With Kiosk and Kiosk Shell see The Kiosk Desktop Shell on page 2 25 you can customize the entire look and feel of your User Experience Quick Defrost The optional Heater Control feature for the OmniiXT15f freezer models is used in cold environments to prevent condensation from developing on or inside the Omnii Refer to Appendix F Omnii XT15f Freezer Variants for detailed information Configuration 3 5 Region and Language Allows you to specify the local language that is to be displayed on the hand held screen along with the format of numbers currency time and date for your region Remove Programs Lists the programs that can be removed from your unit To remove a program select it and
237. ntage assigned in the Advanced tab under Low CQ note that the Advanced tab is restricted to authorized personnel the unit moni tors the channel quality for 15 time out periods before searching for a new channel If Channel Switch Speed is set to Fast the current channel is only monitored for up to 2 time out periods before channel switching begins IMPORTANT Fast switch speed is most effective where coverage areas are largely overlapping If the coverage areas barely overlap have dead spots or if the hand held frequently operates on the fringe of coverage this parameter should be set to Slow J 4 Omni Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Edit Channel Frequencies Narrowband Radio OK Basic Channels Select the active Channels Pa Gat RAON Ga Hg 2 462 023 GD J023 464 6375 4646375 Edit Edit i i D channel switch E J frequencies order 7 O e 1 ah A e Click on the Edit channel frequencies button in the bottom left corner of the tab to display the Edit dialog box Edit Channel Frequencies OK x CH Receive MHz Transmit MHz 1 460 95 a62 J023 e in the appropriate channel field type the Receive and Transmit frequency for the channel and click OK You can either edit an existing frequency if required or assign new frequencies for a new channel keeping in mind that you can only use frequency pairs assigned to your license Edit Switch Order Narrowband Radio OK Basic Channel
238. number to the Phonebook a list of new commands is available in the drop down menu Phonebook J Jet Pilyaeele E a7 D gt MG 5S aly You can choose one of the following e New Entry to add another phone number e New SMS Short Message Service to send a new SMS e Edit Entry to change an existing name and or phone number or e Delete Entry to erase an existing phone entry In the Phonebook e Highlight the entry with which you want to work e Choose a command from the drop down menu and tap on Execute to carry out the command Volume amp Sounds Properties The Omnii supports several audio options including Bluetooth The beeper is used for the standard sounds key clicks screen taps and scanning The optional rear speaker can be used for system Windows sounds and wav files When a rear speaker is absent those sounds are routed to the front receiver 3 76 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide In the Control Panel choose the Volume amp Sounds icon Volume amp Sounds Volume Adjustments Volume amp Sounds Properties OK Volume Ga Ka boy Enable sounds for Events warnings beeps and syster v Applications MA Notifications alarms reminders key clicks Soft Loud Screen taps soft Loud Slide the volume button to the left to lower the volume or to the right to increase the volume Under the heading Enable sounds for enable the conditions under which
239. o Windows Classic Shell Desktop Kiosk Shell EP Shutdown H En il Switching the Kiosk Shell requires a device reset All unsaved data will be lost Switch the Shell and reset now Reset Now i NOTE The Omnii will be reset if you choose to switch shells General Maintenance Caring for the Touchscreen The touchscreen is covered with a thin flexible polyester plastic sheet with a conductive coating on the inside The polyester can be permanently damaged by harsh chemicals and is susceptible to abrasions and scratches Using sharp objects on the touchscreen can scratch or cut the plastic or crack the internal conduc tive coating The chemicals listed below must not come into contact with the touchscreen e mustard e ketchup e sodium hydroxide e concentrated caustic solutions e benzyl alcohol e concentrated acids If the touchscreen is used in harsh environments consider applying a disposable screen protector RV6105 These covers reduce the clarity of the display slightly but will dramatically extend the useful life of the touch screen When they become scratched and abraded they are easily removed and replaced Do not to expose the touchscreen to direct sunlight for prolonged periods of time If this is unavoidable use a UV screen protector to extend the life of the screen Cleaning the Omnii A IMPORTANT Do not immerse the unit in water Dampen a soft cloth with mild detergent to wipe the unit clean
240. o include the same on any authorized copies it makes in whole or in part The user agrees not to decompile disassemble decode or reverse engineer any licensed program delivered to the user or any portion thereof We reserves the right to make changes to any software or product to improve reliability function or design We do not assume any product liability arising out of or in connection with the application or use of any product circuit or application described herein No license is granted either expressly or by implication estoppel or otherwise under any of our intellectual property rights An implied license only exists for equipment circuits and subsystems contained in our products Disclaimer Every effort has been made to make this material complete accurate and up to date In addition changes are periodically incorporated into new editions of the publication We reserve the right to make improvements and or changes in the product s and or the program s described in this document without notice and shall not be responsible for any damages including but not limited to consequential damages caused by reliance on the material presented Zebra and the Zebra head graphic are registered trademarks of ZIH Corp The Symbol logo is a registered trademark of Symbol Technologies Inc a Zebra Technologies company Workabout Pro4 and the names of other products and services provided by us are trademarks of ours Window
241. odule selected 3 38 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide V NOTE Itis possible to map the same source to different modules trigger consumers for example to both the Imager and Non Decoded Scanner If so both devices operations will occur simultane ously This is not recommended in most cases especially with devices such as Imagers or RFID Readers It is also possible to map different sources to the same module trigger consumer for exam ple two different trigger keys can be mapped to the RFID File System Add Key Only existing trigger sources are shown in the Source combo box To add a new source to this list tap on the Add Key button A dialog will pop up and allow you to select the keyboard key to use as a trigger source Trigger key Soft Scan F Add Key New Trigger Key Press a key to use as a trigger source Cancel Trigger Press Type You can enable either an Up Down or Double Click response to a trigger press Normally when a trigger keyboard key etc is pressed and released a trigger down event is sent to the owner that is the applica tion receiving the trigger press information followed by a trigger up If Double Click is chosen in this menu when the trigger is pressed released and then pressed again a double click event will have occurred If a mapping with the type Up Down has also been configured for the same source it will only receive the first
242. on whenever the modem requires a PIN such as resume after suspend or modem removal The stored PIN is also automatically entered in the Current PIN text box whenever the Security Configuration dialog box is called up lf unauthorized access to the device is a concern the Require PIN on resume check box should be checked In this case the PIN is not stored whenever a PIN is required you will be prompted to enter an appropriate value V Wireless Wide Area Network WWAN Settings G 9 Network Configuration In the main Wireless WAN window e Tap on the Tools menu and choose Network Manually select network Show available networks Configure frequency bands Enable automatic time update Enable Automatic Network Select By default the GSM radio modem automatically chooses from the available and allowed networks allowed networks are the home network and all other networks with which the home network has a roaming agree ment You may find there are some situations in which you want to override this default behaviour For example you may want to disable roaming if you find yourself in a border area where the home network is not available but a foreign roaming partner is available Abroad you may find that an available network does not have GPRS roaming agreements In this case you ll need to manually select the network which you know to support GPRS roaming Automatic network selection is enabled or disabled by checking or
243. only To change a setting in Customer Preset press space or double click e Tap on the sign to expand one of the lists so that you can view the parameter settings Creating a Custom Preset A new custom preset is created by modifying a preset either a predefined preset or an existing custom preset To create a custom preset e Highlight a preset and tap on the Add button A screen like the sample following is displayed Preset Name OK Cloning from set Factory Default Enter alphanumeric string o e Type the name of the new preset in the dialog box e Tapon OK to save your changes The preset list is displayed the new custom preset appears at the end of the list It is marked as read and write Modifying a Custom Preset The parameter values in a custom preset can be modified It is recommended that very few changes be made to a custom preset To ensure that it will work reliably it should be as close as possible to the original prede fined preset To change a parameter value e Highlight the custom preset and double tap on the Edit button Symbology Settings OK Preset Custom Preset Options All 1D With Strong Recovery Code 39 Code 128 EAN 13 EAN 6 LPL 4 res fe fe FH Ny To change a setting press space or double click Imager amp Camera Settings 6 11 e Tap on the symbols to expand the lists and view the parameter settings
244. operator can then install the application If a license is required it can be obtained by sending an e mail to the software license mailbox or by contacting a Sales Representative from our contact web page http www zebra com US EN Pages Contact_Us WT mc_id psion_us_about_contact_psion offices Additional pieces of software such as a server must be obtained through us F 4 Partner Up Tapping on a preloaded client in the PartnerUp screen displays a drop down menu from which the operator can choose from an array of related options Pocket PC Compatibility The Omnii supports the AYGShell API set that allows Pocket PC compatible applications to run on the hand held Windows Embedded CE includes application programming interface API compatibility support for the Microsoft Windows Powered Pocket PC 2002 shell in units running Windows Embedded CE 3 40 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide The website listed below describes the APIs exposed through AYGShell and the application compatibility between Windows Powered Pocket PC 2002 based applications and Windows Embedded CE based devices http msdn microsoft com library default asp url library en us dncenet html WINCENET CEPCC App asp Power Properties This icon displays a Power Properties dialog box that indicates the unit s battery capacity and allows you to manage battery use e Inthe Control Panel choose the Power icon ey Power Battery Capacity e Inthe
245. orage Temperature 40 C to 60 C 40 F to 140 F e Humidity Condensing condensation free using internal heaters e Rain Dust IP65 IP67 IEC 60759 e Drop Rating Multiple 2 m 6 5 ft drops to polished concrete e ESD 8 kV contact 15 kV air discharge Regulatory Approvals e Worldwide Safety EMC RF Laser approvals e CE Mark e E Mark vehicle cradles e RoHS compliant e WEEE compliant e REACH compliant The Freezer Keyboards Two keyboard layouts are available for the Chiller and Arctic hand held units Both variants include specially designed keyboards that resist freezing due to ice build up in condensing environments Figure F 2 Freezer Keyboard Layouts 58 Key Full Alpha Numeric Keyboard 34 Key Numeric Keyboard SCAN Key FN Keys po sey FN Modifier key SHIFT aiid Modifier key y Omnii XT15f Freezer Variants F 5 Lithium ion Smart Battery 5000 mAh ST3003 for Omnii Chiller Model The Omnii Chiller model is shipped with the standard ST3003 Lithium ion Smart Battery The ST3002 Arctic Battery not used with narrowband radio configuration is available as an option For more information about this battery see Lithium ion Smart Battery 5300 mAh ST3002 for Omnii Arctic Model on page F 5 For safety instructions please see Lithium ion Battery Safety Precautions in the Omnii Hand Held Computer Regulatory amp Warranty Guide PN 8000191 Parameter Specifications Model Number Chem
246. original channel if for some reason the other channels cannot be reached A IMPORTANT Clicking on Auto clears the manually selected channel order The manually ordered channels are listed in the Manual switch order column in the Channels tab Scroll to the right to display the manually ordered channels Narrowband Radio OK Channels Select the active Channels Manual switch order a 460 95 462 5625 464 6375 Ta Be Channel switch speed Slow F Edit i D channel frequencies deh G lf communication quality falls below the channel quality percentage specified in the Advanced tab under Low CQ note that the Advanced tab is restricted to authorized personnel only the channels entered in the Manual switch order are considered for channel switching The channel search is carried out in the order in which the channels were selected J 6 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Advanced Tab The Advanced tab contains protected parameters that are only available to authorized personnel Tune Poll Settings e Tap on the Tune Poll Timings button in the bottom left corner of the Statistics screen to display the options sCHl cosas gi Rs F abt O poll hdr O polltmo 820 frm O roy O err O errhdr 1 errbdy O err 7 modech 7 E Use the following website to identify the appropriate polling parameter values http www ingenuityworking com knowledge w knowledgebase narrow ba
247. ose All orientations the screen rotates to portrait or landscape to match the orientation of the Omnii NOTE Your screen orientation option starts once you press OK and then exit Control Panel The Control Panel screen itself is always in upright Portrait mode Configuration 3 59 Storage Manager The Storage Manager allows you to view information about the storage devices that are present in the Omnii such as SD MMC flash cards and Compact Flash cards o Storage Manager Formatting a Memory Card Formatting a memory card bulk erases it Once a card is erased partitions may be created in it similarly to those on a hard drive Memory card devices are normally mounted made available to the system automati cally when they are inserted They must be dismounted before they can be formatted To format an entire memory card 1 Select Start gt Settings gt Control Panel 2 In Control Panel double click on the Storage Manager icon The Storage Manager menu opens Storage Properties OK Storage Manager Store Info Dek2 SD Memory Can Capacity 121 25 MB Unallocated 0 00 B Sector Size 517 00 B 1 Select the memory card from the drop down list 2 Press the Dismount button to dismount the memory card All partitions on the card will be dismounted 3 Press the Format button to format the memory card All partitions and information on the card will be erased during the formatting process Creating Part
248. ou to define how the GPS module operates You can determine when the GPS module is powered and operating and choose from a set of GPS profiles built into the modem You can also set up the AGPS Manager an assisted GPS utility e Tap on Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt GPS Settings icon 3 24 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide GPS Settings Power Programs AGPS Info GPS Power On and off in suspend GPS Settings Power This tab allows you to dictate how the GPS module behaves The GPS Power drop down menu is used to control when the GPS is powered on and off e Off the GPS module is left off always Always on the GPS module is powered on at all times regardless of the power state of the hand held Suspend On and off in suspend the GPS module is powered on but if the Omnii is in suspend mode the GPS module is turned off Profiles GPS Settings Power Profiles Programs AGPS Info GPS Profile Selection This profile suits the needs of most applications Technical Details Static Nay Off Track Smoothing Off DR Timeout 5 sec Degraded modes Off a D s teh alls Tapping on the GPS Profile Selection drop down menu allows you to choose an appropriate profile Default Automotive or Pedestrian e Default profile is a good general profile suitable for most uses Automotive profile is designed for in vehicle use providing quick location upd
249. ower cable and check that the slot indicator flashes at power up Omnii Docking Connector The docking interface on the base of the Omnii is custom designed to dock with a device via an array of spring mounted pins OC ty SOO GOO amp The following are the pin assignments of the interface 1 GROUND USB OTG P 2 DC IN USB OTG M 3 DOCK LOW PWR 13 CHARGE IN GROUND GROUND maa mma Cf maa Ja o ul oao P hm gt 5 USB OTG VBUS 5 DC IN 6 CHARGE IN UART RX 7 GROUND GROUND D gt 8 DC_IN UART_TX A 2 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Snap Modules Connectors e Model ST4000 Charger only variant power and charge e Model ST4001 USB Host Client variant power charge communications via USB 1 1 2 0 Host and USB 2 0 Client connectors DC IN port e Model ST4005 DE9M Serial variant powered DE9M serial connector power charge serial communica tions Pin 9 is reserved for 5V 1A max power out and is defaulted to off ST4001 ST4005 USB Micro B connector USB Type A connector Powered DE9M serial port USB device ActiveSync USB host The following are the pin assignments of the interfaces ST4001 ST4005 USB Micro B Connector USB Type A Connector DE9M Serial Connector Pin Pin o Signal Pin Signal Port Pinouts A 3 Cable Connectors for Vehicle Cradle Model ST1002 The ST1002 Vehicle Cradle has a 44 pin connector that
250. ows the same rules as the recipient s phone number in the New message dialog The message validity period parameter is sent to the SMS Centre with each message sent subsequently and instructs the SMS Centre on how long it should attempt to deliver the message to the recipient the SMS Centre may impose an upper limit on the validity period regardless of the setting NOTE Only certain discrete validity period values can be sent and thus the validity period is rounded to the nearest allowed value The next time the SMS configuration dialog is opened the rounded value is shown The user interface tries to keep the SMS storage location available for a new incoming message if the Delete oldest message when full check box is checked In this case when a new message arrives and the SMS storage becomes full the oldest received message is deleted If any string is entered as the Message Suppression Prefix then messages beginning with that string will not be shown in either the Inbox or Outbox In this way messages intended for another application running on the same device can be hidden from the user as long as those messages begin with the string configured here Voice The Voice tab is described in detail under Voice Using the WWAN Phone Dialer on page 3 70 Power Mode The power mode of the modem is controlled through the Power menu in the Control Panel not through the Wireless WAN user interface See WWAN Power Mode on page 3 43 Wireless I
251. pervisory use only e Inthe Display Properties dialog box open the Backlight tab Display Properties OK Background Appearance Backioht Intensity Bright for 5 minutes 7 Dim for 30 seconds 7 O When using external power keep the backlight always ON J NOTE Backlight changes take effect immediately You do not need to reset the unit To maximize battery run time keep the display backlight brightness and active durations as low as possible Intensity This parameter is used to adjust the light intensity of the Omnii backlight Sliding the bar to the left lowers the light intensity and sliding it to the right raises the intensity Bright For The value chosen from this drop down menu determines the duration of time that the backlight stays on at the configured intensity after the last user action keypress scan trigger Configuration 3 21 Dim For The value chosen from this drop down menu determines the duration of time that the backlight stays on at half the configured intensity dimmed backlight after expiration of the Bright For delay and as long as no user action takes place such as a keypress or scan trigger At the expiration of the Dim For duration the display backlight shuts off External Power Check Box When you select the check box next to When using external power keep the backlight always ON the back light remains ON at the configured intensity when the Omnii is operating with external powe
252. propriate imager is installed in your Omnii If there is an imager installed but this icon is not present additional software ICS may need to be installed To enable a newly installed imager Press and hold down the FN key and the Enter Power key simultaneously for a minimum of three seconds Imager amp Camera Settings OK Imaging Transa dL Camera Presets 15 Carnera Low light near P Read W write A Active Input Panel The Omnii is equipped with a Soft Input Panel SIP Shown below is the standard Microsoft SIP accessed from the Control Panel p Date Time Dr Debug Soft Keyboard Input Panel Button Icon Internet Keyboard Manage Options Triggers HO e th Mae Tapping on the Input Panel button displays a soft input panel soft keyboard that can be customized using the Input Panel dialog box AN IMPORTANT If the Input Panel button icon is not visible in the taskbar from the Start menu tap on Set tings gt Taskbar and Start Menu Tap the check box next to Show Input Panel Button To remove this icon from the taskbar tap in the check box to erase the check mark 3 28 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide The soft keyboard operates just like a standard keyboard except that rather than pressing a key you tap on letters numbers modifier keys etc on the Omnii screen To customize the appearance and behaviour of the soft keyboard Tap on the Input Panel icon in the
253. r not battery power If the Omnii is drawing power from its battery this option is ignored and the other parameters defined in Display Properties dialog box take effect Dr Debug Dr Debug is an error diagnostic and troubleshooting tool Tap on Start gt Settings gt Control Panel Tap on the Dr Debug icon Cr Debug Status Dr Debug Status Utilities Motion Meter Settings No error logs found Or Debug is on Dr Watson is on Motion Meter is on NetLog is running Browse logs This tab indicates the status on off of the debug engines Tapping on Browse logs displays error logs for your review The logs should be used as reference when working with Technical Support personnel Utilities The Utilities tab can be used to log network traffic When you tap on the Start button debug data is collected so that if necessary it can be forwarded to a technician for evaluation 3 22 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Dr Debug File prefix netlog File size 500000 Fa D gt lah FR gall The Utilities tab can also be used to log heater control logic board information Dr Debug OK Dr Debug OK Status Utilities motion Meter Settings Status Utites motion Meter Settings HeaterL og HeaterLog HeaterLog Name HeaterLog csy HeaterLog size kb 1024 Ga is running HeaterLog Name HeaterLog csy HeaterLog size kb 1024 ieee is stopped a
254. r reads regular 1D and PDF417 barcodes at short to medium distances EA11 2D imager reads 1D and 2D barcodes including damaged and low contrast regular 1D barcodes smallest barcode at 5 mil with a minimum read distance to 2 8 in maximum read distance of 5 1 in largest barcode at 40 mil with a minimum read distance of 3 1 in maximum distance of 32 4 in EA20X 2D imager reads 1D and 2D barcodes including damaged and low contrast regular 1D barcodes shortest barcode at 6 mil with a minimum read distance of 6 1 inches maximum read distance of 9 1 inches longest barcode at 40 mil with a minimum read distance of 5 1 inches maximum read distance of 49 2 inches SE4600LR imager captures digital images for transmission to a decoder to decode a barcode of any format supported by the decoding software Uses laser aiming LED illumination and CMOS sensors to capture barcode images over an extended range and under a wide variety of lighting conditions Basic Scanner Operations Turn the hand held on Wait until the unit has booted up completely Aim at the barcode and press the scan key or the trigger A scan beam and a warning indicator appear until a successful decode is achieved or six seconds have elapsed Scanning Techniques Hold the scanner at an angle Do not hold it perpendicular to the barcode Do not hold the scanner directly over the barcode In this position light can reflect back into the scanner exit window and prevent
255. r 20 seconds Pal Pha Heater System This section displays information on the heater system Status The LED state for this parameter indicates whether the communication with the Quick Defrost hardware is successful green or unsuccessful red Voltage This indicates the voltage applied to the heater system Current This shows the total average current used by the heating system Power This represents the total power used by the heating system Temperature This shows the temperature measured inside the unit Omnii XT15f Freezer Variants F 9 Humidity This shows the humidity measured inside the unit Display and Scan Window Heaters This section displays information on the individual heaters J NOTE Ifthe scanner imager is not connected the scan window heater will be disabled greyed out Status These status indicators report the heating mode for each individual heater LED Description Q Blue indicates the heating element is operating in full power mode Q Green indicates the heating element is operating in sustaining mode O Grey indicates the heating element is off Q Red indicates a hardware failure with the heater Current This indicates the average current drawn at the moment for the individual heater Power This indicates the power used at the moment for each individual heater Temperature Shows the temperature measured near the heating element System Test The system test feature al
256. r find a new IP address This is useful if for example you are out of communication range for a longer period of time and your hand held is dropped from the network To define a static IP address e Tap on the Configure button Marvell SDIO8686 Wireless iy Name Servers An IP address can be automatically assigned to this computer IP Address O Specify an IP address IP Address LTT TT Subnet Mask LTT TT Default Gateway LET TT e Tap on the radio button next to Specify an IP address to select it e Type an IP Subnet Mask and Default Gateway address in the appropriate fields Press Enter to save your information Name Server J NOTE If DHCP is enabled name server addresses are assigned automatically e Inthe SDIO86861 IP Information tab see Figure 3 7 SDIO86861 IP Information on page 3 83 tap on the Configure button e Tap on the Name Servers tab 3 84 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Marvell SDIO8686 Wireless i4 IP Address Name Servers Name server addresses Primary DMS ga ol Secondary DNS Lo ul Primary WINS paaa Secondary WINS eee dl The DNS and WINS fields in the Name Servers tab allow you to specify additional WINS and DNS resolvers The format for these fields is Ht 7HHL AA H HHH Wi Fi Config Advanced Country Options AN IMPORTANT 802 11d is enabled by default for auto country detection If you a
257. r is enabled the Enable driver check box is checked If the Enable driver check box is not checked the driver is shut down as soon as the OK button in the Driver Mode dialog box is chosen If on the other hand the Wireless WAN driver is not running and the Enable driver check box is checked the Wireless WAN driver is started as soon the Driver Mode dialog box is closed using the OK button J NOTE When the driver is not running no network status or signal strength can be displayed Since all currently supported GSM modems are automatically detected the Enable automatic port detection check box should always be checked If this check box is not checked a serial port can be selected manually This experimental feature allows the driver to be used with an internal GSM modem that was not recognized by the automatic detection or an external GSM modem connected to a serial port of the computer through USB or through Bluetooth An external modem connected to a serial port must support 115 2 kbit s 8bit no parity and hardware flow control Wireless Wide Area Network WWAN Settings G 11 Modem Information WWAN Modem Info lesmi GPRS O Enterin Mos REVISION 01 100 53227021829330 19021007942631 O p9385024410009758873 CG ma The fields in this dialog box cannot be edited they only display information about the computer s modem If the network operator has not programmed a user s phone number into his SIM the Phone field remains e
258. r power on or resume from suspend The predefined presets are generic and satisfy most user requirements A custom preset can be created for a specific user application such as include only specified barcodes read only a specified number of barcodes or for reading unusual media Every preset belongs to a preset type The following preset types are available e Imaging for photo capture e Imaging for barcode decoding e Symbology selection At any time only one preset of each type can be designated as the user selected active preset Predefined Presets Predefined presets are built into the imaging software and cannot be changed The predefined presets allow you to use the imager to perform specified tasks without having to understand and set numerous variables In almost all cases these predefined presets are sufficient Barcode Predefined Presets Barcoding Menu These presets encompass the majority of the most popular barcodes and their subtypes The barcode decoding symbology predefined presets define which barcodes can be decoded The barcode decoding camera predefined presets determine how the barcode images are captured Barcode Decoding Symbology Predefined Presets The following presets select groups of similar barcodes for decoding J NOTE It is recommended that the default preset be used whenever possible My Default This preset uses the Symbology Settings menu to define the preset For details about the Symbology
259. re egestas ces ee eeu canon tne se woe iat es AA AA J 6 IANS CS CMCC NT paa ANAN NGA T E J 6 About This Guide This guide applies to the following models e 7545MBW e 7545MBWP e 7545MBWPT e 7545MBWT e 7545MBWN e FCC ID GM37545MBW GM37545MBWM and GM37545MBWP e IC 2739D 7545MBW and 2739D 7545MBWP This user guide describes the configuration operation and maintenance of the Omnii Hand Held Computer describes the steps required to get the Omnii ready for operation describes Omnii features including how to charge and maintain the battery the keyboard features the display using the internal scanner etc This chapter also describes the Microsoft Windows Embedded CE 6 0 desktop and how to change the appear ance and actions of the desktop from Windows Classic Shell to the Kiosk Shell describes the programs and applications accessed through two main areas from the Desktop Start Menu Programs and SettingssControl Panel The software includes both Zebra Software Advantage and Microsoft programs and details how to use them to configure the Omnii along with scanners imagers Bluetooth etc This chapter also details the Kiosk program which enables you to customize your computer settings describes the peripherals and accessories available for your Omnii computer describes the Omnii and accessories pinouts describes in detail your imager s settings details your barcode options xii Omnii Hand Held Computer
260. re having difficulty associ ating with your access point you may need to disable 802 11d and choose your country In the Wi Fi Config gt Advanced tab choose Country Option In the drop down menu choose your country Use Windows to configure my wireless settings In the Advanced tab you can set Windows to configure the radio using Wireless Zero Config e Tapon the check box to the left of Use Windows to configure my wireless settings to enable this option Power Save Mode Tap here to add A checkmark Roaming RSSI Threshold to activate the Windows radio Roaming AP Delta configuration AM A device reset may be required to apply changes made Power Save Mode This allows you to set the 802 11 power saving mode of the radio to CAM continuous access always on recommended or MAX_PSP maximum power saving mode Roaming RSSI Threshold This sets the RSSI threshold value below which the radio will start scanning for new access points when roaming Values range from 55 to 90 dBm Configuration 3 85 Roaming AP Delta This sets how much greater in dBm the RSSI of a new access point must be than the RSSI of the currently associated access point in order for the hand held to initiate a roam Values range from 5 to 30 dBm Concluding the Wi Fi Configuration If you ve made changes in the Advanced menus you will need to warm reset your Omnii e Choose Start gt Shutdown gt Warm Reset e A dialog box is d
261. recorded at the higher sample rate or bits per sample will be higher quality sound but will require more file storage space Lower sample rates and or bits per sample produces a smaller file but the sound quality suffers The record and play buttons operate the same as any recording device The X icon deletes the sound and the diskette icon allows you to save your sound Command Prompt Command Prompt is used to access the DOS command prompt At the prompt you can type DOS commands such as dir to display all the directories in the drive Internet Explorer The Omnii is equipped with Microsoft Internet Explorer for Windows Embedded CE You can access the Internet Options icon through the Start Menu under Settings gt Control Panel or by double tapping on the desktop icon My Device and then double tapping on the Control Panel icon Microsoft WordPad WordPad is a basic word processor used to create edit and print rtf doc and txt files Kiosk Access Kiosk Access allows you to change the appearance and actions of the desktop from the default Windows Classic Shell to the Kiosk shell 2 22 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Remote Desktop Connection Remote Desktop Connection is an Omnii application used to connect to a Windows Terminal Server so that you Can run a session on the Server machine using the hand held Windows Embedded CE device Remote Desktop Connection on page 3 50 provides a website with de
262. reset list and save the changes Removing a Custom Preset e Highlight the custom preset you want to delete and tap on the Remove button A window is displayed warning you that you are about to remove a preset e Tapon Yes to remove the preset or No to cancel the operation Configuring the Barcode Decoding Camera Presets Barcoding Menu To configure the barcode decoding camera presets e Tap on Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Imagers e Tap on the Barcoding tab Figure B 2 Camera Presets Imager amp Camera Settings OK Low power Glossy surface Add Barcode Presets My Default Factory Default All Linear Linear and POF417 R Add Remove R Read W yyrite 4 Active J NOTE The top portion of the window displays the barcode decoding camera presets This window lists all the presets both predefined and the custom Presets are identified as follows e Predefined presets are marked as read only For a description review Predefined Presets on page B 2 e Predefined presets are marked as R read only e Custom presets are marked as RW read and write e One preset either predefined or custom is marked as A active Imager amp Camera Settings B 7 Selecting a Camera To select a camera e Tap on the Camera Presets drop down menu to view the camera options e Choose a camera specifically Front Imager which is located at the top of the unit Setting the Active Preset An active prese
263. rmed Set these parameters to either on to enable the beeper or off to disable it Multiple Beep Tones You can set the audible scanner beep to emit a series of three beeps instead of one Set this parameter to on to enable the multiple beep tones 3 54 A Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Good Scan Vibrates and Bad Scan Vibrates Scanner Settings OK Barcodes Options Translations Ports Internal scanner Non configurable Bad Scan Beep on Multiple Beep Tones off Good Scan vibrates off Number of vibrates 1 Duration of vibrate 300 msec Pause between vibrates 100 Bad Scan vibrates off Number of vibrates 2 Duration of vibrate 300 msec Pause between Vibrates 250 To change a setting press space or double click 7 Ball ME These parameters determine whether or not the Omnii creates a vibration when a good successful scan or a bad unsuccessful scan is performed Set these parameters to on to enable the vibration You can set the Number and Duration of vibrations as well as the Pause between vibrations The screen above shows the default settings Soft Scan Timeout This parameter is used by the SDK Scan function soft scan starting a scan session via the SDK function instead of a physical user trigger press The value assigned to this parameter determines the soft scan timeout from 7 to 10 sec default is 3 sec Scan Log File If this parameter is ena
264. rminal Emulation Wavelink TN Terminal Emulation Note that Tekterm Client is the only application available when a Narrowband radio is installed in the unit Device Management and Utilities Kiosk Total Recall Tweakilt Dr Debug Utilities SOTI MobileControl Mobile Device Management Easy configuration management and provisioning platform Powerful remote control and troubleshooting functionality Integrated real time geofencing and location services Advanced device security user authentication and lockdown features User Interface Colour Touch Display 9 4 cm 3 7 in diagonal VGA 640 x 480 Transflective High visibility option superior sunlight visibility with 165 cd m2 brightness Extreme Duty option withstands 1 25 Joule impact superior low temperature operation to 20 C 4 F with 160 cd m2 brightness Better abrasion resistance Touchscreen Passive stylus or finger operation pan and flick gestures supported Signature capture Keyboards xiv Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Manual Large selection of backlit keypads in both alpha and numeric formats For a list of currently available keyboard configurations consult your Zebra representative or go to http www zebra com US EN ProducttLines Psion WT mc id psion us p handheld e Voice Audio 4 Feedback High volume beeper 95 dBA Integrated microphone and speaker Optional Push to Talk Speaker e Walki
265. rtificates and supports Windows Active Directory and domains Complete the fields in the Configure Profile screen If you re uncertain about some of the options your system administrator will be able to provide the correct information for your wireless network Once you ve completed the necessary fields tap on OK Verify Server Certificate When the Verify Server Certificate box is checked the Omnii will verify the certificate provided by the authenti cation server during the authentication process This requires that an appropriate certificate be manually installed on the Omnii for the verification Enable OPMK When used with compatible wireless infrastructure Opportunistic Key Caching OPMK reduces the number of full authentications required when roaming Only available with WPA2 Enterprise EAP authentication mode Configuration 3 81 SSID Auth Mode Encryption TKIP EAF FAST MSCHAPW2 l User name Passwd nony Id Tunnel PAC Jm Mach PAC fail Provisioning 5nanymous HAuthentic verify Server Certificate Enable OPME Connecting the Wireless Network Your configured network is listed in the Configure tab An X next to a network indicates that this is the network to which the Omnii will connect Wi Fi Config Add New Edit Remove Scan e Tap on the Connect button to activate your network The Status tab is displayed The Status field displays ASSOCIATING while the 802 1
266. ry capacity information On the keyboard e Press Windows to display the Start Menu e Choose Shortcuts from the Start Menu and then press the RIGHT arrow key to display the sub menu e Choose System Tray in the sub menu e Use the arrow keys to highlight the icon in the taskbar about which you d like more information e Press Enter to display the appropriate dialog box Customizing the Taskbar To customize the taskbar so that it displays only those icons you require e Inthe Start Menu choose Settings and then Taskbar If you re using the keyboard e Press Windows to display the Start Menu 2 20 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide M e Highlight the Settings option highlight Taskbar in the sub menu and press Enter The Taskbar and Start Menu dialog box is displayed Taskbar and Start Menu General Advanced i Always on top C Auto hide Show glock Show active app v show Start button Mi Show Input Panel button e Tap on the items you want to activate or deactivate The check mark indicates active items If you re using the keyboard e Highlight the options you want to activate and press the SPACE key to select them A check mark indi cates active items The Start Menu The Start Menu lists the operations you can access and work with It is available from the startup desktop or from within any application e To display the menu tap on the Start Menu E y My
267. s and the Windows Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Bluetooth The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by Bluetooth SIG Inc and any use of such marks by us is under license All trademarks used herein are the property of their respective owners Omni Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Manual Revision History Changes to the original guide are listed below 4 Ela fe t Date Description Rev 001A 04 2015 Zebra rebrand About This Guide Unan aa namasa KG nae KALA nn AGA AA AS XI TEXU GORVESNHONS AA AA AA AA xii Overview of the Omnii Hand Held Computer ccccccccecccscececeeseeeeeteeeeeeeseeeceneneeesseeteeeteeenseees xii Regulatory Labels a cscennserinisrenndhniasalgpcnceroenaede iecsieteinesidadeisidhwtasieeidusiatsins dhe aaudsiersiedesaaiedciesanwiementaldist oaukiyoesiacuetoned Xvi Chapter 1 Basic Operation JM Get OM AA bade anaes PA APA 1 1 Omnii Modules YA VEE AA eunesnnctstebeudabecadeduk eondccenel vaviecsccdennssecs 1 3 Documents NE Er AA 1 3 Preparing the Omnii TOF Operation GAAN GANA 1 4 TAG BUGI Y eer EE E E E E E E E EEEE E E 1 4 Switching the Omni OMAN OT ossessione E aN NS 1 5 FS SUI UNS ON aaea E E AA AA 1 5 Performing a Warm ReSEe1 ccccccssseccccceeeeceeceeeeeecceeeseseeceeeceeeeceeeseseeeeeeeseeeeeeeessaeaeseeesseaeeeeeeeteas 1 6 Performing a Cold ROS CE ies aNG NAGA
268. s In addition to the increased security that comes with larger key sizes the AES algorithm is a symmetrical block cipher that can encrypt encipher and decrypt decipher information e Authentication 802 11 supports several subtypes of network authentication services Open Shared WPA and WPA PSK Under Open authentication any wireless station can request authentication The station that needs to authenticate with another wireless station sends an authentication management frame that contains the identity of the sending station The receiving station then sends back a frame that indicates whether it recognizes the identity of the sending station Under Shared authentication each wireless station is assumed to have received a secret shared key over a secure channel that is independent from the 802 11 wireless network communications channel Under WPA and WPA PSK authentication the use of 802 1x authentication is required For wireless net works without a Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RADIUS infrastructure WPA supports the use of a preshared key For wireless networks with a RADIUS infrastructure Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP and RADIUS is supported e Network Key This text box is used to specify a 5 or 13 ASCII character sequence or an equivalent 10 or 26 Hexadecimal digit sequence that matches the active WEP key on the access point To assign a Network key highlight The key is provided automatically and unche
269. s Pattern Angle Shock Vibration ESD Laser Safety Class LED Class Maximum Engine Dimen sions typical 40 horizontal 30 vertical 625 5 nm dominant wavelength 60 x 40 at 80 center intensity 2000 G 5 applied via any mounting surface at 30 and 55 C for a period of 0 85 0 05 msec 2500 G 5 applied via any mounting surface at 23 C fora period of 0 85 0 05 msec Unpowered SE4500 withstands a random vibration along each of the X Y and Z axes for a period of one hour per axis 6 G rms defined as follows 20 to 80 Hz Ramp up at 0 04 G Hz at 3 dB octave 80 to 350 Hz 0 04 G7 Hz 350 Hz to 2 kHZRamp down at 0 04 G Hz at 3 dB octave 2 kV connector CDRH IEC Class 2 IEC Class 1M 11 8 mm H x 21 50 mm W x 16 3 mm D 0 46 in H x 0 85 in W x 0 64 in D D 12 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Parameter Specification Weight 8 0 grams 0 28 oz Electrical Interface 21 pin 0 3 mm pitch ZIF connector SE4500SR Decode Zone SE4500 SR 6 67 mil PDF417 3 4 CZ 7 1 ne 7 5 mil Code 39 110 6 eh 10 mil PDF417 40 1 13 mil 100 UPC p 15 5 1 6 me 15 mil PDF417 14 7 28k 15 mil Data Matrix 112 4 Ki 20 mil Code 39 24 7 In O 5 10 15 20 25 cm 0 12 7 25 4 38 1 50 8 63 5 Depth of Field In cm 9 22 9 4 5 114 0 O 4 5 114 9 229 O IT mQ sS O o T Internal Imager 4 Scanner Specifications D 13 SE4600LR Long Range Imager
270. s WAN icons in the taskbar indicate the status of your wide area network connection For details see Taskbar Icons on page G 1 2 12 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Docking Device dah When a hand held is inserted in a docking station charger or cradle an associated icon appears in the taskbar ES dh Combo Charger amp Quad Docking Station Powered Vehicle Cradle Desktop Dock Combo Docking Station amp Snap Module Bluetooth Radio This icon displayed in the taskbar represents the installed Bluetooth radio Input Panel You can tap the Input Panel icon to activate the soft keyboard application Audio Indicators The Omnii supports several audio options including Bluetooth The optional rear speaker can be used for system Windows sounds and wav files When a rear speaker is absent those sounds are routed to the front receiver The beeper provides a variety of sounds and can be configured to emit a sound when a key is pressed a keyboard character is rejected scan input is accepted or rejected an operator s entry does not match in a match field or the battery is low The volume rocker button is located on the left side of the hand held Information on configuring sounds is detailed in Volume amp Sounds Properties on page 3 75 Vibrations You can set the Omnii to vibrate when a successful or unsuccessful barcode scan is performed See Scanners on page 3 50 Inserting the microSD Card and SIM
271. s loaded from the FTP Server to the Temp folder and from the Temp folder to the FTP Server If this option is disabled a warm reset must be performed to accept the change Advanced Interface and Network Settings TweakIT Settings oo Enable IPv6 8 Modem Logging A Advanced Services Settings Enable IPv6 settings This option allows you to enabled Internet Protocol specification version 6 that has been published to enable 128 bit IP addresses replacing version 4 Modem Logging When this option is enabled the Omnii logs AT commands e g dial out information password string etc that the administrator can monitor for debugging purposes Modem commands are stored in MdmLog txt 3 70 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Advanced Services Settings TweakIT Settings Hi Advanced CE Services Settings Hit Advanced Interface and Network Settings Smee cvanced Services Settings SNTP Server SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol Server The SNTP Server Name typed in this dialog box is used to synchronize Omnii time with the server time A warm reset must be performed once the server name as been entered Registry Editor TweakIT Settings OKI x Advanced Registry Editor Path HKLM 6 NGA LOCAL MACHINE H a HKEY CLASSES ROOT Hae HKEY CURRENT USER uli HKEY USERS RegPersisted 1 0x00000001 Value gt a This option is reserved for senior adm
272. se Computer from this menu only the devices that have the matching Computer COD value will be displayed Choosing Al lists all detected devices Device Pop up Menu Bluetooth Device servers Mode About Select device to start pairing Name Address TORPSG 011 i OMNI aa Refresh Mame Delete The Device pop up menu allows you to pair a device update a device name or delete a device from the list Pair begins the pairing process by querying the services and profiles of the discovered device An authentica tion dialog box is displayed the first time a Bluetooth device is paired Refresh Name repeats the device name inquiry updating the name This command is useful if a device is listed without a name unknown or if a device name has been changed remotely Delete removes this device from the list Pairing a Device To pair devices e Follow the manufacturer s instructions to place the remote device in pairing mode e Choose the Devices tab and Scan for devices in your area e When the scan is complete tap on the device to which you want to pair e Inthe pop up Device menu tap on Pair An Authentication dialog box is displayed Configuration 3 11 Authentication Enter a passcode to establish a secure connection To proceed without authentication press Next Passcode e If the remote device has authentication enabled type the PIN in this dialog box e To proceed without authentication
273. set of trigger events Module Trigger This identifies the driver or application receiving the trigger presses Show All Modules By default inactive owners are not shown By checking this check box all owners both active and inactive are displayed Microphone e Inthe Control Panel choose the Microphone icon Use this dialog box to adjust the gain for the specific microphones associated with your hand held Configuration 3 39 A Built in Microphone Microphone Default All e Tap on the drop down menu and choose the microphone for which you want to adjust the gain e Slide the microphone tab to the left to decrease the gain and to the right to increase the gain Tapping on the Default button sets the current microphone you ve chosen to the default gain Tapping on Default All sets all microphones listed to their default gain TekTerm Client TekTerm Client is a powerful emulation application ideally suited for real time data transaction applications associated with mainframes and servers The Omnii includes unique features that support TekTerm Client an application we have designed that has the ability to maintain multiple simultaneous sessions with a variety of host computers For detailed information please refer to the TekTerm Client Software User Manual PN 8000073 PartnerUp This app displays a number of pre loaded applications Tapping on an app in the list takes you to an associated web site The
274. sfully scanned in both directions forward and reverse before being decoded Decoded Internal Data Options Transmit Code ID Char A code ID character identifies the scanned barcode type In addition to any single character prefix already selected the code ID character is inserted between the prefix and the decoded symbol When you double tap on this parameter a dialog box is displayed in which you can choose a transmit code None AIM or Symbol Scan Data Format This parameter allows you to change the scan data transmission format Double tapping on Scan Data Format displays the following options from which you can choose a data format data as is data S1 data S2 data S1 S2 P data P data S1 P data S2 and P data S1 S2 Prefix P Suffix S1 and Suffix S2 A prefix and or one or two suffixes may be appended to scan data for use in data editing When you double tap on these parameters dialog boxes are displayed in which you can enter a value from 0 to 255 C 6 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Delete Char Set ECls Setting this parameter to on enables the scanner to delete any escape sequences representing Character Set ECls Extended Channel Interpretations also known as GLIs from its buffer before transmission When this parameter is enabled the scanner transmits data from PDF417 and MicroPDF417 barcodes containing Character Set ECls even when the ECI Protocol is disabl
275. spare battery pack e A Host USB port to connect peripherals such as a printer keyboard etc e A Client USB port to connect the docking station to a PC J NOTE The ST4002 desktop dock can be upgraded to include the DE9M and RJ45 interfaces by using the ST4100 Xmod Expansion Module The ST4003 desktop docking station additionally provides e ADE9QM serial port unpowered and an RJ45 10Base T Ethernet interface Both these interfaces are com patible with the USB to Ethernet serial drivers included in the Omnii see Figure 4 10 Back of ST4003 Desktop Docking Station on page 4 10 4 10 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Figure 4 9 Desktop Docking Station Models ST4002 and ST4003 Omnii charge indicator LED far left Indicates charge status of internal Omnii battery Release button Omnii charging bay Spare battery Spare battery charging bay Spare battery LED Indicates charge status of a spare battery inserted in the rear charging bay of the docking station The desktop docking station storage temperature is 30 C to 60 C 22 F to 140 F Operating temperature and humidity are 5 95 non condensing and 0 C to 40 C 32 F to 104 F The desktop docking station uses careful charge algorithms designed to maximize battery life while ensuring the shortest possible charge time See Battery Details on page 2 1 for more information regarding battery capacity charge times and bat
276. ssigned determines after what time period the scanner will timeout from 0 to 2550 msec Diff Read Timeout Prevents unwanted reading of other barcodes on the same label The value assigned determines after what time period the scanner will timeout from 0 to 2550 msec Add AIM ID Prefix The AIM ID Association for Automatic Identification and Mobility is an international barcode identifier When this parameter is enabled the A M D is inserted at the beginning of the decoded barcode C 8 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide The barcode symbologies for the scanner are listed in the following table Decoded Intermec ISCP Barcode Symbologies Code 39 TLC 39 disabled Code 128 2D PDF 417 EAN 13 2D micro PDF 417 EAN 8 Discrete 2 of 5 disabled UPC A Telepen disabled UPC E Gs1 DataBar disabled UPC EAN Shared Settings Composite Code 93 disabled TLC 39 disabled Codabar disabled PDF 417 MSI Plessey disabled micro PDF 417 disabled Code 11 disabled CodaBlock F disabled Interleaved 2 of 5 disabled CodaBlock A disabled Matrix 2 of 5 disabled Non Decoded Scanners Figure C 1 Non Decoded Scanner Options Scanner Settings Barcodes Scanner amg Fl Code 39 El Code 128 BEAN 13 BEAN 8 UPC A UPC E H Codabar disabled Code 93 disabled Code 11 disabled M To change a setting press space right arrow or double click e Tap on the Scanner drop down menu
277. ssigned for this parameter determines the delay in milliseconds between repeat characters Sliding the Repeat Delay bar to the left increases the delay between key repeats and sliding the bar to the right shortens the repeat delay time Repeat Rate The value assigned for the Repeat Rate parameter determines how quickly the key you press repeats and is measured in characters per second cps Sliding the bar to the left slows the repeat rate and sliding the bar to the right increases the repeat rate Z NOTE Use the field at the bottom of this dialog box to test the repeat delay and rate settings you ve chosen Keyboard Backlight e In the Keyboard Properties dialog box open the Backlight tab Keyboard Properties OK 15 seconds O When using external power keep the backlight always ON Intensity This parameter is used to adjust the light intensity of the Omnii keyboard backlight Sliding the bar to the left darkens the keyboard backlight intensity and sliding it to the right lightens the intensity 3 30 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide J NOTE The keypad backlight maximum brightness will decrease over time as it ages Use mid range intensity settings when possible to extend the backlight lifespan When the backlight starts to dim use this parameter to make it brighter ON For The value chosen from this drop down menu determines the duration of time that the keyboard backlight stays on after th
278. sts b 2 gt U 25G Call Management The Call Management option only becomes available in the Voice menu when at least one phone call is either On hold or Active When you choose this command the currently active phone call is listed in a dialog box Wireless WAN x Call Management fle Tools sms EB Data Voice Cal Naa 4165551212 On hold 4165551314 Active Call Lists A D h D A b Configuration 3 73 Using the drop down menu you can choose to Hang Up All Calls This option only appears when more than one call is listed Hang Up This option disconnects only the call you ve highlighted in the list Hold This option places the call you ve highlighted on hold Retrieve This option is only available when a call is on hold and choosing it retrieves the call you have highlighted from hold e Inthe Call Management list highlight the phone number to which you d like to apply a command e Choose a command from the drop down menu and tap on Execute to carry out the command on the high lighted phone number If you have two active calls on your hand held one On Hold and one Active you can set up a conference call between yourself and the other callers To set up a conference call e Highlight the phone number that is currently On Hold and choose Retrieve Tap on Execute Both calls will be listed as Active in the Call Management list All calls are now conferenced so that you as well as your c
279. t has an A to the right in Figure B 3 Viewing Barcode Decoding Symbologies on page B 9 the active preset is Default To set an active preset e Highlight the preset and tap on the Activate button Viewing a Preset To view the parameter settings in a preset e Highlight a preset and double tap on the View button The associated preset window is displayed Camera Presets OK Preset Default H Options E Image Corrections E Exposure E Focus E White Balance E Windowing Predefined settings are read only e Tap on the sign to expand one of the lists so that you can view the parameter settings Creating a Custom Preset A new custom preset is created by modifying a preset either a predefined preset or an existing custom preset To create a custom preset e Highlight a preset and tap on the Add button A screen like the sample following is displayed Preset Name Cloning fram set Default Enter alphanumeric string mud e Type the name of the new preset in the dialog box e Tapon OK to save your changes B 8 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide The preset list is displayed the new custom preset appears at the end of the list It is marked as read and write Modifying a Custom Preset The parameter values in a custom preset can be modified It is recommended that very few changes be made to a custom preset To ensure that it will work reliably it should
280. t set Once a password has been set the message will disappear Administrator password Shell Settings Restrictions Control Panel Settings a Import Export to File t Administrator password is currently not set When an administrator password is set the restricted options are accessed using a key combination If a pass word has been set the user would be prompted for the password 3 46 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide The option Show Password changes the displayed password from hidden to readable Administrator Password OK x Enter the current password Hew password Confirm new password an Show password Shell Settings The Shell Settings application has two menus Applications and Advanced Applications Shell Settings Edit Parameters Applications Advanced Command Select applications to be accessible from Windows Programs Demo DemoScan the Desktop or an application Display Name iis Demo5canner p Display name Pemoscanner Parameters DemodSignature Demo5ound Internet Explorer Microsoft Wordpad Psionvl Access Remote Desktop Connection Settings Windows Explorer C Command Prompt 151414141414 41 aT The Applications menu lists all the applications installed on the computer alphabetically The items checked in this view are shown on the Desktop The Add and Edit buttons allow you to search for and add an
281. tails about this option Wi Fi Config The Wi Fi Config application is used to configure the Omnii 802 11a b g n radio for one or more wireless network profiles Windows Explorer The Windows Explorer installed on your Omnii is consistent with all Windows Embedded CE devices Shortcuts Figure 2 7 Shortcuts Sub Menu tc hie Ed My Device My WiFIConnect Documents U y Recycle Bin PattnerUp ae Fa pooo t iosk Programs gt HEE ai Shortcuts BG System Tray G settings E3 Cycle Tasks RUN E Task Manager T DI PEG System Tray If your touchscreen is not enabled you can use the System Tray option to access the icons in the taskbar at the bottom of the screen The taskbar displays indicators such as a radio signal icon These indicators are attached to dialog boxes that provide additional information e Choose Shortcuts gt System Tray When System Tray is chosen the taskbar icons become accessible To display the dialog box attached to an icon e Use the arrow keys to highlight an icon for example the Bluetooth icon e Press Enter to display the Bluetooth menus Cycle Tasks When Cycle Tasks is selected and the Task Manager is not open you can cycle through active applications To cycle through your active applications e Choose Shortcuts gt Cycle Tasks or e Press ALT TAB Task Manager The Task Manager allows you to switch to another task or to end an active task To display the
282. tap on Next After entering the device PIN the Services dialog appears with a list of services available for that device TORSWE O16 Select service for pairing Serial Port PrinterPort e Click in the check box to the left of the service to activate it e Click on Done Services that require more information present a configuration dialog box Serial Profile is an example Serial Profile Select profile options and press Next Mode Mode Encryption Disable Encryption Port coma l Port This dialog box offers a number of additional options such as enabling Encryption and selecting four different Modes Serial ActiveSync Scanner and Printer Port Serial is used for simple serial port communication ActiveSync is for ActiveSync over Bluetooth 3 12 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Scanner is used to create a connection to a barcode scanner A serial connection is created then the Scanner Services is notified of the connection so that the incoming barcode scan will be forwarded directly to Scanner Services Printer Port must be chosen here if you want to communicate with a paired B uetooth printer For further details see Mode on page 3 13 e Once you ve completed the information tap on Next and then in the Services screen click on Done Servers Bluetooth Select a service to be enabled on this device Select Port Scanner OBEX OPF Whe
283. terion Wireless Modules commands SIM Application Toolkit SAT Release 99 Audio Interfaces Antenna USB UICC interface Audio speech codecs GSM AMR EFR FR HR 3GPP AMR Speakerphone operation echo cancellation noise suppression 500hms Main GSM UMTS antenna UMTS diversity antenna GPS antenna active passive USB 2 0 High Speed 480Mbit s device interface Supported chip cards UICC SIM USIM 3V 1 8V Special features Phonebook Antenna SIM and phone SAIC Single Antenna Interference Cancellation DARP Downlink Advanced Receiver Performance RX diversity type 3i Model RA2070 802 11a b g n Radio Parameter Sub parameter Specification Manufacturer Form Factor Antenna Port Antenna Type Model RA2070 Murata LBEH1Z9PFC Embedded surface mount module 11 4 x 9 4 mm This is a combo module containing both Wi Fi 802 11a b g n and Bluetooth V2 1 EDR radio 802 11b g n U FL jack Non diversity Multiplexed between 802 11b g n 2 4GHz and Bluetooth radio 802 11a n U FL jack Non diversity 802 11b g n PCB substrate patch antenna Covers 2400 2484 MHz lt 2 5 1 VSWR 802 11a n PCB substrate patch antenna Covers 5150 5860 MHz lt 2 5 1 VSWR Omnii Specifications E 9 Parameter Sub parameter Specification Antenna Gain 1 9 dBi Transmit Power 18 dBm typical 19 5 dBm max 13 dBm typical 14 5 dBm max 12 dBm typical 13 5 dBm max 802 11n 2 4 12 dBm typical 13 5 dB
284. tery model number ST3003 NI A WARNING The battery pack used in this device may ignite create a chemical burn hazard explode or release toxic materials if mistreated Do not incinerate disassemble or heat above 100 C 212 F Charge ONLY with Zebra Model ST3003 NI Do not short circuit may cause burns Keep away from children Use ONLY Zebra battery pack Model ST3003 NI Risk of fire or explosion if incorrect battery pack is used Promptly dispose of used battery pack according to the instructions Omni XT15ni Non Incendive Safety Guidelines 1 3 A WARNING Le block plies utilis dans cet appareil peut prendre feu constituer un risque de br lure chimique exploser ou d gager des substances toxiques s il est manipul de fagon inappropriee Ne pas jeter au feu demonter ou chauffer a plus de 100 C 212 F Ne charger qu avec les dispositifs Zebra ST3003 NI Ne pas court circuiter cela pour rait causer des br lures Garder hors de la port e des enfants N utiliser que le mod le de bloc plies Zebra ST3003 NI L utilisation d un mauvais bloc plies pourrait constituer un risque d incendie ou d explosion Mettre rapidement au rebut tout bloc plies use conformement aux instructions Narrowband Radio Setup disable headset mode Only external Bluetooth audio is enabled with narrowband configu ration A IMPORTANT Narrowband configuration has the keyboard microphone and audio receiver disabled to IMPORTANT For Narrowband
285. tery Safety Precautions in the Omnii Hand Held Computer Regulatory amp Warranty Guide PN 8000191 Parameter Model Number Chemistry Capacity Voltage Cell Configuration Max Charge Voltage Recommended Charge Termination Timeout Charge Temperature Discharge Temperature Storage Temperature Cycle Life Specifications ST3003 lithium ion Li lon 5000 mAh nominal at 1000 mA discharge 20 C to 3 0 V min 3 7 V nominal 2 75 V min to 4 2 V max 1 S2P 2 parallel connected cells 4 2 V 1 5 0 hr charging must stop 0 C to 40 C 32 F to 104 F 20 C to 50 C 4 F to 122 F 20 C to 50 C 4 F to 122 F Storage at elevated temperatures not recommended 25 C 77 F recommended storage temperature 300 cycles minimum with no degradation below 70 of nominal capacity based on 0 5C charge 0 5C discharge rates to 3 0 V 23 C 73 4 F Wireless Radios Parameter Manufacturer Form Factor Output Power Control via AT Commands Supply Voltage Range EDGE Data Transmission GPRS Data Transmission CSD Data Transmission SMS Omnii Specifications E 5 Cinterion MC751 GSM GPRS EDGE Radio Specifications Cinterion Model MC75i Quad Band GSM 850 900 1800 1900 MHz EDGE E GPRS multi slot class 12 GPRS multi slot class 12 GSM release 99 Class 4 2 W for EGSM850 Class 4 2 W for EGSM900 Class 1 1 W for GSM1800 Class 1 1 W for GSM1900 H
286. tery detected Solid Green Battery charging complete Flashing Green Charge in progress Flashing Yellow Battery is not charging due to out of temperature conditions Solid Red Battery is not charging due to out of temperature conditions Operation Charging the Omni Battery The desktop docking station supplies DC power to enable the Omnii internal fast charger When installed in the dock the Omnii battery charge LED will illuminate to indicate the unit has external power and can charge the internal battery The Omnii charge indication follows the same convention as the charger s spare battery indicator Figure 4 9 Desktop Docking Station Models ST4002 and ST4003 on page 4 10 J NOTE Battery charging continues whether the Omnii is switched on or off Charging the Spare Battery IMPORTANT Do not store spare batteries in a charger for more than 72 hours Doing so may damage the battery or reduce its charge capacity e Install the battery in the battery charging bay rear slot of the desktop docking station Place the battery contacts down to mate with the connector and pivot the battery into place in the battery charging bay e The desktop docking station spare battery LED lights up immediately During charge the LED will be flashing green e When the battery has finished charging the LED turns solid green e The charge stops when the battery is fully charged and the LED remains green 4 12 Omni Hand Held Computer with Windows
287. tery life See Charging the Spare Battery on page 4 11 for spare battery charge information Figure 4 10 Back of ST4003 Desktop Docking Station Locking arm Omnii charging bay Connector pins Spare battery DC IN port charging bay N Client USB port DE9M serial port RJ45 Ethernet port Host USB port Accessories 4 11 Charging a Battery Installed in the Omni e Insert the DC power cable to the DC IN port on the desktop docking station Plug the pronged end of the cable into an AC outlet e Slide the hand held into the docking station making certain that the hand held is securely seated on the docking station connector pins and engages the locking arms of the docking station When the Omnii is switched on a message is displayed briefly on the screen indicating that the unit is properly installed in the station and the docking station icon is displayed in the taskbar The LED on the Omnii lights up indicating that the unit has external power and battery charging will begin It is safe to leave the unit in the desktop docking station while it is not in use the battery will not be overcharged Indicators The front mounted LED on the desktop docking station indicates the spare battery charge status The LED on the Omnii is active even when the hand held is inserted in a docking station and in suspend mode so that the charge status of the battery can be detected easily Charge LED Behaviour Function OFF No bat
288. the Omnii voice option to place phone calls see Voice Communication on page 1 8 below To see the radio specifications please go to Wireless Radios on page E 5 Data Transfer Data transfer options vary slightly depending on the type of operating system installed in your PC Various options exist depending on whether you are using Windows XP or earlier Windows Vista Windows 7 or later For connection details please refer to Data Transfer between Omnii and a PC on page 3 18 Voice Communication If the MC75i EDGE or the Cinterion PH8 P HSPA WWAN radio modem is installed and enabled the Phone icon and the GSM signal strength icon will appear automatically on the taskbar For details on using your Voice options please refer to Voice Using the WWAN Phone Dialer on page 3 70 NOTE The voice option is not available in North America for the MC75i EDGE radio Operating System e Microsoft Windows Embedded CE 6 0 Battery Details Omnii Hand Held Computers are powered by a lithium ion battery pack Model ST3003 Please see the following sections for detailed battery information e Installation e Calibration and power settings e Chargers and docking stations e Specifications e Contact pinout Battery Safety AN IMPORTANT Before attempting to install use or charge the battery pack it is critical that you review and follow the important safety guidelines in the quick reference guide entitled the Omnii Hand Held
289. the decode speed and performance enable set to on only those codes that are required by the application For information on configuring the barcode symbologies see Appendix C Scanner Settings Keep in mind that some barcode types are only available when an internal imaging scanner is installed All internal scanners can be configured using these dialog boxes Restoring Default Settings If you want to restore the factory defaults after making changes the defaults can be applied to a selected parameter sub tree of parameters or all scanner parameters e Press and hold on a symbology e g Code 128 to display a pop up menu 3 52 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Scanner Settings Barcodes Scanner Decoded internal iy H Code 39 Be Code 128 3 End Default subtree 3 Default all settings H ENADIE TSE TO Decode Performance on b Decade Perf Level 1 Length Restriction Add Remove Data om To change 4 setting press space or double click e Choose Default subtree to reset only the parameters in the symbology you selected or choose Default all settings to reset all scanner parameters to default settings To reset a single parameter to its default setting e Press and hold on the parameter you want to reset Scanner Settings Barcodes Scanner Decoded internal F H Code 39 El Code 128 Enabled on Enable G51 128 G51 US o Cnable ISBT 128 off Def
290. the unit on and to shut down the unit to Suspend mode For details refer to Switching the Omnii On and Off on page 1 5 There are a number of modifier keys that provide access to additional keys and system functions as described in Modifier Keys on page 2 4 The Blue FN modifier key provides access to additional keys and system functions These functions are colour coded in blue print above the keyboard keys Getting To Know Your Omnii 2 3 Figure 2 1 Keyboard Layouts SYM Key SCAN Key FN Modifier Key Enter Power Key SHIFT Modifier Key Windows Key 36 Key Numeric 123 Keyboard 59 Key Alpha ABC Keyboard The Power Button 55 Key and 66 Key Keyboards only The Power button in the upper right corner of the keyboard switches the unit on and off Talk key Power button End key 55 Key Alpha ABC Keyboard with phone Regular Keys The Enter Key The Enter key is used to execute the usual Enter keyboard functions and on some units to also power the unit on and off for details refer to Switching the Omnii On and Off on page 1 5 J NOTE 55 key and 66 key keyboards are equipped with a Power button For these keyboards the Enter key does not switch the unit on or off 2 4 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide The SHIFT Key The SHIFT key is used to display uppercase alpha characters and to provide access to other symbols and functions on the numeric keybo
291. then click on the Remove button Scanners Provides scanner parameters and the barcode symbologies that the Omnii barcode scanner will successfully read Screen Rotation This feature enables you to change screen orientation into either landscape portrait or both modes Storage Manager Allows you to view information about the storage devices that are present such as SD MMC flash cards For details see Storage Manager on page 3 59 Stylus Adjusts how Windows Embedded CE recognizes your double tap as slow or rapid successive taps In the Calibration tab you can recalibrate your touchscreen by tapping on the Recalibrate button and following the directions on the screen System You can display the system and memory properties as well as create your device name In the Memory tab you can allocate memory between storage memory and program memory System Properties Identifies the computer s software and hardware components indicating which components are installed their version or part numbers and whether they are enabled or disabled Total Recall Provides access to a backup restore and deployment utility to maintain applications and settings over cold reboots and for multiple devices Tweakit Allows you to change Advanced System Settings interface network and servers User System Settings display font size and provides the Registry Editor Volume amp Sounds Allows you to adjust the volume of the sou
292. this picture as the background Flip Side Blue Windows ShelThemes Ingen Disable access to the Notifications Launch an application on Startup Launch an application on Startup l a Administrator Key Sequence Administrator Key Sequence shift Blue 0 F Shift Blue 0 7 The following options can be enabled or disabled in the Kiosk Shell Desktop themes shown in the drop down list as Windows Classic Shell Clear Run Ingenuity Active Glow and Flip Side Blue 3 48 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide J NOTE The Desktop theme can be changed from the default Windows Classic Shell to one of the Kiosk themes shown here but by tapping on the Desktop icon Kiosk Shell see The Kiosk Desktop Shell on page 2 25 the Ingenuity theme is automatically loaded The computer must be reset in order for the shell to change e Use this picture as the background You can select a picture as the Desktop background e Notifications If disabled the Notifications tooltips will still display e Launch an application Startup A window is displayed listing all of the installed and added applica tions Any applications selected will startup after a reboot The following item is not optional e Administrator Key Sequence Sets the key sequence to open Kiosk Access Restrictions This section deals with items that are by default available to users but can be restricted by an administrator
293. ting the TOUCNSCIEGN ccccccsscseccccesseseceeccesseceeeceaeseceeseseuaeeeeesseeaaceeesssuaeeeeesseaaeeeessssaaaeees 2 8 NGI CAN OU aar AA 2 9 BA AA AA AA AA AA 2 9 Battery Charge Status LED 22 X Aa 2 9 Operating System Status LED 2 2 2 2 X aaa 2 9 RAO AUS a PAA AA AA 2 10 scale heel EE D AA AA ANA GANA AGA NAUL TGA 2 10 Onscreen TIC ROMS AA 2 10 AW adele 0c2 0 bo AA eee eee 2 12 VIDTA UO ea E E E A E 2 12 Inserting the microSD Card and SIM Card 1 1111727272 QQXXX aa 2 12 HANS dle US cede E E A T E E E E E E 2 12 Scanners and Imagers 2 2 13 Basic Scanner 012 2110 RAP 2 14 le slain TGA CS AA E T E A 2 14 Scanner Status LED Sounds and Vibrations 1 7 7 27 727202 QX aa 2 14 TOUS NOON AA 2 15 Operating One Dimensional 1D Internal Laser Scanners ccceccccceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeas 2 15 Operating Internal Two Dimensional 2D IMA QEPS ccccccceececceceeeeeeceeeeaeeeeeeeeseeeseeeseaaeeeeeeeas 2 15 Windows Embedded CE Nama ne a nen er neat eae sre E 2 16 Navigating in Windows Embedded CE and Applications cccccccceeseeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaeeeees 2 16 Navigating USING a Touchscreen ssccincucceticc cbc pacceiacciencdsnecanssedengwendabesetaesduabennndvencdieiieetentcoenet 2 16 Navigating Using the Keyboard ccccccccccceecc a 2 17 The Windows Classic Shell Startup Desktop
294. ting to the Internet the cache size the Internet connection options and the security level that is applied when browsing Keyboard Toggles character repeat on and off and specifies delay and rate for repeated characters It also allows you to adjust the keyboard backlight threshold and intensity and many other functions Manage Triggers This utility allows you to define buttons as triggers for different devices For example you would use this utility to configure a button for the scanner RFID reader and camera Microphone Enables you to adjust the gain for the specific microphones associated with your hand held Network and Dial up Connections Displays network interfaces and allows new dial up and VPN interfaces to be created It also allows Windows configuration of the interface Refer to Connectivity on page 1 7 for details Owner Provides fields in which you can specify owner information A Notes tab allows additional information to be entered and displayed when the unit is powered up Network ID tab information is used to access network resources This information should be provided by your System Administrator PartnerUp This app displays a number of pre loaded applications By tapping on an application in the list you are taken to the associated web site and allowed to install the application Password Allows you to assign a password to restrict access to elements of the unit Once assigned password access can
295. tion Open or Shared the WEP security key length 64 bitor 128 bit and the key type ASCII or Hex WEP Key fields are also provided where you can specify a 5 or 13 ASCII character sequence or an equivalent 10 or 26 Hexadecimal digit sequence that matches the active WEP key on the access point WPA amp WPA2 Personal PSK Pre Shared Key When PSK is selected either WPA Personal PSK or WPA2 Personal PSK a shared key must be configured on both the access point and the hand held computer One of the following can be chosen from the Encryption drop down menu TKIP AES or TKIP AES 802 1X WPA amp WPA2 Enterprise CCKM WPA amp CCKM WPA2 These authentication modes use 802 1X with EAP authentication When 802 1X is selected the Omnii uses WEP encryption with automatic as opposed to static keying For the others the user may choose TKIP AES or TKIP AES encryption Encryption The Encryption menu allows you to choose the type of encryption that will be used to protect transmitted data Choose an Encryption method valid for your network from the drop down menu Only the Encryption options that are compatible with the type of Auth Mode you ve chosen will be listed In fact in some cases this menu will not be available at all EAP User name Passwd Anonv Id Tunnel FAT ET Mach PAC fa Provisioning 5nanymous HAuthentic Verify Server Certificate EAP This menu allows you to choose the EAP Extensib
296. tions 2 10 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Operating LED Behaviour Function OFF when unit is in Suspend or Shutdown Normal operating status Solid Yellow The unit is powering on Fast Flashing Yellow The unit is entering Suspend mode Flashing Yellow This LED is controlled by the Microsoft NLED api Radio Status LED The third LED from the left indicates that the GPS radio is enabled or that the WWAN radio is enabled Radio Traffic LED Behaviour Function OFF The radio is disabled Slow Flashing Blue The radio is enabled and active Scanner Status LED The fourth far right LED indicates scanner status Scan LED Behaviour Function OFF The scanner is not in use Solid Red during scan Scan in progress Solid Green after decode Successful scan OFF when scan ended Flashing Red Unsuccessful scan Onscreen Indicators The taskbar at the bottom of the screen displays a variety of system status indicators including the Input Panel button if you have chosen to show that option in the Taskbar and Start Menu settings Getting To Know Your Omnii 2 11 a a amp Figure 2 4 Taskbar Bl fay WIFILOAMECt Documents nd Partner Up g Recycle Bin 7 lt a He Kiosk Shell Remote Desktop Internet Explorer Microsoft WordPad The taskbar changes dynamically and only those icons that are applicable are displayed For example if a radio is not installe
297. to import delete and view these certificates Compass on page 3 3 directs you to the appropriate setup information Compass The internal compass can be calibrated to indicate in which direction the unit is pointed Date Time Allows you to set the current Month Date Time and Time Zone on your unit Dialing Specifies dialing settings including area code country code dial type and the code to disable call waiting You can store multiple patterns for example Work Home and so on using this dialog box Display Changes the display backlight and the appearance colour scheme on the unit desktop Dr Debug Provides both error diagnostic and troubleshooting tools Error Reporting Allows you to enable or disable Microsoft error reporting prompts GPS Settings Allows you to enable and configure GPS operation Imagers The Imagers applet is used to create modify delete and activate imager settings This icon is only present when the appropriate imager is installed For detailed information see Appendix B Imager amp Camera Settings Input Panel Provides the framework for a Microsoft Soft Input Panel SIP should you need to design your own SIP or change some soft keyboard options 3 4 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Internet Options Provides options to configure your Internet browser You can determine items such as the default and search page that the browser applies when connec
298. to the Ethernet Network Network Access The Omnii automatically detects insertion into the docking station and loads the appropriate drivers to commu nicate with the network To connect more docking stations downstream up to 4 on the same network use the Ethernet cable supplied with your quad docking station as the daisy chain cable see Figure 4 15 Daisy chain configuration on page 4 15 Figure 4 14 Ethernet network connection Left side RJ45 port Ethernet connector to network Activity LED 7 Na O flashing green Right side RJ45 port Ethernet connector to other docks Link LED 10 or 100 Base T solid amber Ethernet connector Figure 4 15 Daisy chain configuration Maximum of four ST4004 Quad Docking Stations on one network cable TEZ as Ethernet network cable a Ai Daisy chain cable Daisy chain cable 4 16 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Cleaning the ST4004 AN IMPORTANT Do not immerse the unit in water Dampen a soft cloth with mild detergent to wipe the unit clean Use only mild detergent or soapy water on a slightly damp cloth to clean the ST4004 Avoid abrasive cleaners solvents or strong chemicals for cleaning The plastic case is susceptible to harsh chemicals The plastic is partially soluble in oils mineral spirits and gasoline The plastic slowly decomposes in strong alkaline solutions Troubleshooting The Omnii Charge Indicator LE
299. tops applying power the battery cannot be overcharged if left in the charger slot Troubleshooting Improper Battery Storage Storing batteries in the gang charger for extended periods more than a week or two is not recommended Lithium ion batteries lose capacity if they are maintained at full charge for long periods of time See the battery handling recommendations in The Battery on page 1 4 Accessories 4 25 Power Self test LEDs Don t Light Up The charge slot LEDs will light up briefly when first applying power indicating the self test mode When applying power to the unit all the LEDs will light up Yellow will show up in the 25 LED for each bay green for other LEDs Then bay 1 will blink a binary representation of the firmware version V09 1001 If the self test is not evident e Remove all batteries and unplug the charger e Connect another device to the mains outlet to ensure there is power e Remove the IEC mains power cable from the charger and check it for damage e Reconnect the mains cable in the charger and mains outlet Indicator Does Not Light When Battery Installed e Remove the battery and clean the contacts on the battery and the charge slot e Reinstall the battery and check that it is fully seated in the slot e Inspect the charge slot contacts for damage are they bent flattened twisted or broken e Try inserting a battery that you know to be working in the charger slot e Reconnect the mains p
300. trial and Standard 2 of 5 Codabar Code 93 93i Code 11 MSI Plessey Telepen PDF417 Micro PDF417 Ambient Light Works in any lighting conditions from O to 100 000 lux EV15 Imager Decode Zone 0 Lux to 100 000 Lux Minimum Range Maximum Range Inches Inches 0 40 High quality symbols in normal room light Mil Size Sd Internal Imager amp Scanner Specifications D 7 EA11 Decoded 2D Imager Parameter Specification Scan Rate 2D mode 56 images s auto adaptive Linear Emulation Mode 200 scans s auto adaptive Scan Angle 38 9 horizontal 25 4 vertical Optical Resolution 752 H x 480 V pixels 256 gray levels Versions Standard range Symbologies 1D EAN UPC GS1 Databar limited expanded amp omni directional RSS Code 39 Code 128 UCC EAN 128 ISBN ISBT Interleaved Matrix Industrial and Standard 2 of 5 Codabar Code 93 93i Code 11 MSI Plessey Telepen postal codes Australian Post BPO Canada Post Dutch Post Japan Post PostNet Sweden Post Symbologies 2D Data Matrix PDF417 Micro PDF 417 Codablock Maxicode QR Aztec GS1 composite codes Voltage optics 3 3V 5 10 typical values Operating Current 170mA 310mA lighting condition dependent Power Saving Mode 2mA Ambient Light Works in any lighting conditions from O to 100 000 lux Regulatory Approvals UL VDE certified ROHS compliant EA11 Typical Reading Distances EA11 Standard Optics Data Matrix
301. u w Administrator access in Start Menu Launch an application on Startup Administrator Key Sequence Administrator Key Sequence shift Blue 0 shift Blue 0 The following options can be enabled or disabled in the Windows Classic Shell Desktop theme e Start Menu Bar If disabled access to both Start Menu and Notifications are disabled The Notification tooltips will still display Any changes made will occur after a device reset e Start Button If disabled access to the Start Button and Notifications are disabled The Notification tool tips will still display J NOTE lf Disable access to the Start Button is selected but the Kiosk Access by Key Sequence remains unchecked you will see the following status message A Key Sequence is required when the Start Button is disabled the check box will be auto checked and the focus will be set to the key sequence selection Notifications If disabled the Notifications tooltips will still display Administrator Access in Start Menu When this box is checked the Kiosk Access program will be shown in the Start Menu gt Programs list The following item is not optional e Administrator Key Sequence Sets the key sequence to open Kiosk Access Other Shell Themes Shell Settings Shell Settings Applications Advanced _ Applications Advanced Ingenuity Window s Classic Shell ae Ingenuity intuitive user experience Active Glow Ad Use
302. uals aspx 1 4 Omni Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Preparing the Omnii for Operation The Battery A vV The Omnii is powered by a Lithium ion Smart Battery pack 5000 mAh Model ST3003 IMPORTANT Before charging the battery it is critical that you review the battery safety guidelines in the Omnii Hand Held Computer Regulatory amp Warranty Guide PN 8000191 Battery packs shipped from the factory are charged to approximately 40 and must be fully charged prior to use Batteries can be charged using a variety of chargers and docking stations For detailed information see Battery Details on page 2 1 Replacing the Battery Pack IMPORTANT Always switch the unit off before changing the battery see Switching the Omnii On and Off on page 1 5 However assuming the default power saving parameters and battery reserve level have not been altered battery swap time is a minimum of 4 minutes you will not lose data if the battery is replaced within this time frame Figure 1 6 Omnii Battery Battery Top Release button Battery compartment Guide tabs Release button tabs 3 A UON s NOTE lf you are using a docking station or an external power supply you can insert an uncharged bat tery and use the device while the battery charges Assuming the default power saving parameters and battery reserve level have not been altered a battery can be removed for up to 4 minutes without losing data A
303. unchecking Enable automatic network select in the Network dialog box When automatic network selection is disabled you must select a network manually Show Available Networks Available networks can also be viewed without changing any settings Scanning for available networks is a lengthy operation a progress bar is shown while the scan is active For every network that is found the network name country status and numeric network identifier MCC MNC Mobile Country Code followed by the Mobile Network Code is displayed NOTE Your home network operator will need to let you know which other networks have roaming agree ments Even when a network is listed with an Available status it does not necessarily follow that it can be used or that the roaming agreement covers GPRS A status of Forbidden indicates that the network cannot be used If you choose a network that is not covered by a roaming agreement the status in the main WWAN dialog box changes to Emer gency calls only No network found GPRS not available or GPRS not allowed Configure Frequency Bands V GSM SOOMHz GSM 1800MHz GSM 1900MHz C UMTS 850MHz DO UMTS SOOMHz DI UMTS 1900MHz DJ UMTS 2100MHz UMTS Aws G 10 Omni Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide The network selection can be modified by enabling or disabling GSM and UMTS frequency bands IMPORTANT Care must be taken when disabling bands the wrong band will prevent the modem from reg
304. up profile automatic configuration may be used to automatically pick the correct manually configured profile for each SIM card For this to work each profile must be configured while the corresponding SIM card is inserted in the device and initialized i e the status is at least Searching for network Wireless Wide Area Network WWAN Settings G 7 The Select profile drop down list in the data configuration profile selects to which profile a subsequent action applies A profile named Default is always present and contains the current parameters from the database The following actions are available Show The parameters for the selected profile are displayed when you tap the stylus on this button For the Default profile the publicly known password is shown otherwise the password is hidden Edit The parameters of the selected profile can be edited when you choose the Edit button Keep in mind that you cannot edit the Default profile Delete The selected profile is deleted You cannot delete the Default profile Activate When this button is chosen the selected profile becomes the active profile Activation is possible only if the Enable automatic configuration check box is unchecked New Tapping on the New button allows you to create a new profile Figure G 2 Creating a New Profile New Data Profile OK Name Microcell C1 APN intemet fido ca Uusernamet Password Prompt user for password Force PAP
305. up user interface UI will appear for how many seconds and whether the battery cycle count is displayed off by default Edit Changing Ratings Text You can customize the ratings text with the Edit option By enclosing your text within the html tag used for Bold lt b gt or removing the tag to unbold the text you can change the text that will appear in the pop up battery status screen For example the default text Excellent can be changed to Battery is excellent and will last one day shift Ratings Description Change the text for each Rating to be displayed in the Popup UI Battery Health Li Only supported Ratings are displayed Battery Power Use default Fro Battery Health lt b gt Battery is excellent and will last Kk one day shift lt b gt Battery is excellent and will last one day shift Previews eae Battery is excellent and Cycle count 003 will last one day shift FE Bull Ph Kiosk Access V Kiosk Access enables you to customize your computer settings remove or add shortcuts to the desktop and Control Panel and limit access to various different components on the computer and the system tray icons for security NOTE The Desktop theme can be changed from the default Windows Classic Shell to the Kiosk Shell either in the Kiosk Access settings see Other Shell Themes on page 3 47 or by tapping on the Desktop icon Kiosk Shell see The Kiosk Desktop Shell on page 2 25
306. very few changes be made to a custom preset To ensure that it will work reliably it should be as close as possible to the original prede fined preset To change a parameter value e Highlight the custom preset and double tap on the Edit button Camera Presets Preset Custom Preset E Options E Image Corrections E Exposure H Focus H White Balance E windowing To change a setting press space or double click e Tap on the symbols to expand the lists so that you can view the parameter settings e Scroll through the parameter list until you reach the parameter that you want to change e Fora parameter that can take a range of values Highlight the parameter and then press the SPACE key or double click on the parameter An associated dialog box containing the valid range of values for the parameter and the current setting like the sample screen following is displayed Enter value from O to 157 Hd msec B 6 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide Type a value in the field provided e Fora parameter that toggles between two values such as on or off and enabled or disabled Highlight the parameter and then press the SPACE key or double click on the parameter Either method toggles between the two available values e When you ve completed your edits tap on OK The parameter list is displayed the new value for the changed parameter is shown e Tapon OK to exit to the p
307. which you can enter a value between 1 and 10 seconds Decoded ISCP Advanced Options Continuous Scan Mode Setting this parameter to on keeps the laser on and continuously decoding as long as the scanner button is pressed and held down Minimum Cancel Time The value assigned to this parameter determines the time delay before the scanner is turned off once the scanner trigger or button is released This gives the scanner a minimum amount of time to complete its current decode before the scan is cancelled when you quickly trigger on off Low Power Timeout To extend laser life you can select the time the scanner remains active following a successful decode The scanner wakes from low power mode when a barcode is scanned a successful decode restores normal flashing When you double tap on this parameter a dialog box is displayed in which you can choose a value of 30 sec 1 min 2 min or 3 min NOTE This parameter is only used if the Trigger Mode has been set to Continuous On and the unit is mounted in a fixed position otherwise Low Power Timeout is not used Parameter Scanning Setting this parameter to Enabled allows decoding of parameter barcodes Same Read Validate The data is only transmitted after repeated reads give the same result The value assigned at this parameter determines the number of reads required from 0 to 70 times Same Read Timeout Prevents the same barcode from being read more than once The value a
308. y Press FN SHIFT again to turn the CAPS LOCK mode off 2 8 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide The Keypad Backlight The intensity of the keypad backlight and the conditions under which this backlight is activated can be config ured using the Keyboard icon in the Windows Embedded CE Control Panel The behaviour of the keypad backlight is tailored in the Keyboard Properties dialog box Refer to Keyboard Backlight on page 3 29 for details about this option J NOTE Keep in mind that this option may be restricted to supervisory use only The Display The Omnii is equipped with display backlighting to improve character visibility in low light conditions The back light switches on when a key is pressed Adjusting the Display Backlight The behaviour of the display backlight and the intensity of the backlight can be specified in the Display Proper ties dialog box in the Control Panel af NOTE Refer to Backlight on page 3 20 for details about the Display Properties dialog box Calibrating the Touchscreen If your Omnii touchscreen has never been calibrated or if you find that the stylus pointer is not accurate when you tap on an item use the Stylus Properties dialog box in the Control Panel to recalibrate the screen e Inthe Control Panel choose the Stylus icon to display the Stylus Properties window Stylus e Select the Calibration tab and then choose the Recalibrate button Stylus Properties OK
309. yellow and then green Establishing a Packet Data Connection To display the main Wireless WAN dialog box e Double tap on the Wireless WAN icon in the taskbar If the icon is not visible in the taskbar the radio interface has been shut down or the modem has been removed e Inthe Control Panel choose the Wireless WAN icon Wireless WY ADS The main Wireless WAN dialog box is displayed M J Wireless Wide Area Network WWAN Settings G 3 Figure G 1 Establishing a Connection File Tools SMS Voice Data Network Rogers Signal 93 SSdBm o Status Ready toconnect Rx Tx sz bytes B485 GF NOTE f you are prompted to enter a PIN refer to Entering a PIN Number on page G 4 for details When Ready to connect is displayed in the Status field the Connect Data button is enabled e Tap on the Connect Data button The progress of the connection is tracked in the Status field e Connecting e PPP link to modem active e Authenticating user e User authenticated e Connected NOTE Keep in mind that these states may be displayed fairly quickly if the progress of the connection is rapid When the connection state reaches PPP link to modem active the taskbar icon changes to indicate an active connection The Connect Data button changes to Disconnect Disconnecting From a Network To disconnect from the network e Tap the stylus on the Disconnect button and then on OK When the computer
310. ype 0x06 File System fatfsd cll Flags Ox00000010 To dismount a partition 1 Choose the desired partition 2 Tap the Properties button The Partition Properties dialog appears 3 Tap the Dismount button The partition is dismounted The asterisk disappears next to its name in the partitions list To delete a partition Configuration 3 61 1 Select the desired partition 2 Tap the Delete button A warning dialog appears 3 Tap the OK button The partition is deleted To format a partition 1 Choose the desired partition 2 Tap the Properties button The Partition Properties dialog appears 3 Tap the Dismount button The partition is dismounted The asterisk disappears next to its name in the partitions list 4 Tap the Format button The Format dialog appears Partition Size 40 4 ME Version E Number of FATs ji 7 Poot Entries BE Cluster Size KB o s TFAT Quick Format 5 Choose your format options These options include e Version of file system FAT 16 for devices holding up to 4 GB or FAT 32 for devices containing up to 32 GB e Number of FATs File Allocation Tables e Number of entries allowed in the root directory e Cluster size 5 KB to 64 KB There are also two check boxes which govern e Whether to use the transaction safe FAT file system TFAT This file system keeps multiple copies of the file allocation table changing one while maintaining another as a
311. yption AES 4uthentication waz Network key key index fi The key is provided automatically Enable 802 1 authentication e Type the appropriate SSID Service Set Identifier in the Network name SSID dialog box The Network name field can contain a maximum of 32 characters The name assigned here is listed as a preferred network AN IMPORTANT Keep in mind that the Omnii will only communicate with access points that are configured with the same SSID e Ad Hoc And Infrastructure If you are using an Infrastructure network one in which the hand helds must pass data through an access point leave the check box next to This is an ad hoc network blank If you are using an Ad Hoc network a network in which the hand helds pass data directly to other Ad Hoc devices without an access point add a checkmark in the check box next to This is an ad hoc network to enable Ad Hoc e Encryption WEP Wired Equivalent Privacy encryption prevents others from accidentally accessing your network If you are not using encryption you can choose Disabled from the drop down encryption menu Otherwise leave this field as is H 4 Omnii Hand Held Computer with Windows CE 6 0 User Guide AES Advanced Encryption Standard is a standard for protecting data through encryption AES supports key sizes of 128 bits 192 bits and 256 bits and will serve as a replacement for the Data Encryption Standard DES which has a key size of 56 bit
312. ystrokes along with the function of executable keys like the Enter Power key the BACK SPACE key any function key and arrow key etc 59 Key Alphanumeric Keyboard Macro Keys These keyboards have six macro keys M1 to M6 located on the S to X keys second last row of keys To access a macro key press the FN key followed by the macro key 36 Key Numeric Keyboard Macro Keys These keyboards are equipped with five macro keys M1 to M5 These keys are colour coded in blue print above function keys F1 to F5 Getting To Know Your Omnii 2 7 To access a macro key press the FN key followed by the macro key Numeric Keyboards Accessing Alpha Keys On the Numeric Omnii keyboards all alphabetic characters are printed on the unit plastic in blue typeface above the keys Alpha characters are accessed by pressing the FN modifier key then pressing another key on the keyboard The Alpha Modified Numeric 789 keyboard has each blue alphabetic character assigned as a single FN shifted character on individual keys An indicator in the left corner of the taskbar displays the currently selected character The Numeric 123 keyboards have telephone style alphabetic keys with the blue alphabetic characters located in groups of 3 or 4 above each of the numeric keys To access characters on these keyboards a few extra steps are needed as described below Choosing a Single Alpha Character ay NOTE The following examples assu

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

MapSight  HWB Series User Manual  GE-D380027T    INSTALLATION AND USER`S MANUAL 810 LX / 815 LX  Observations of the Active Galactic Nuleus Markarian 421  Operating instructions CT205  Manuel d`utilisation Bloc électrique EBL 225  Spirent Communications - Spirent Knowledge Base  TFA 42.4001 sport watch  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file